Project

Gutenberg's Twenty Thousand Leagues under the Sea (slightly abridged), by Jules
Verne

THIS EBOOK WAS ONE OF PROJECT GUTENBERG'S EARLY FILES

PRODUCED AT A TIME WHEN PROOFING METHODS AND TOOLS
WERE NOT WELL DEVELOPED. THERE IS AN IMPROVED
ILLUSTRATED EDITION OF THIS TITLE WHICH MAY VIEWED AT
EBOOK [ #2488 ]

This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with almost no
restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the
terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at
www.gutenberg.net Title: Twenty Thousand Leagues under the Sea (slightly
abridged) Author: Jules Verne Release Date: Sep 1, 1994 [EBook #164] Last
Updated: December 13, 2016 Language: English *** START OF THIS
PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 20000 LEAGUES UNDER THE SEA ***

This etext was done by a number of anonymous volunteers of the Gutenberg

Project,
to whom we owe a great deal of thanks and to whom we dedicate this book.
TWENTY THOUSAND LEAGUES
UNDER THE SEA

by
JULES VERNE
 CONTENTS
PART I

CHAPTER
I A SHIFTING REEF
II PRO AND CON
III I FORM MY RESOLUTION
IV NED LAND
V AT A VENTURE
VI AT FULL STEAM
VII AN UNKNOWN SPECIES OF WHALE
VIII MOBILIS IN MOBILI
IX NED LAND'S TEMPERS
X THE MAN OF THE SEAS
XI ALL BY ELECTRICITY
XII SOME FIGURES
XIII THE BLACK RIVER
XIV A NOTE OF INVITATION
XV A WALK ON THE BOTTOM OF THE SEA
XVI A SUBMARINE FOREST
FOUR THOUSAND LEAGUES UNDER THE
XVII
PACIFIC
XVIII VANIKORO
XIX TORRES STRAITS
XX A FEW DAYS ON LAND
XXI CAPTAIN NEMO'S THUNDERBOLT
XXII "AEGRI SOMNIA"
XXIII THE CORAL KINGDOM
 CONTENTS
PART II

CHAPTER
I THE INDIAN OCEAN
II A NOVEL PROPOSAL OF CAPTAIN NEMO'S
III A PEARL OF TEN MILLIONS
IV THE RED SEA
V THE ARABIAN TUNNEL
VI THE GRECIAN ARCHIPELAGO
THE MEDITERRANEAN IN FORTY-EIGHT
VII
HOURS
VIII VIGO BAY
IX A VANISHED CONTINENT
X THE SUBMARINE COAL-MINES
XI THE SARGASSO SEA
XII CACHALOTS AND WHALES
XIII THE ICEBERG
XIV THE SOUTH POLE
XV ACCIDENT OR INCIDENT?
XVI WANT OF AIR
XVII FROM CAPE HORN TO THE AMAZON
XVIII THE POULPS
XIX THE GULF STREAM
FROM LATITUDE 47° 24' TO LONGITUDE 17°
XX
28'
XXI A HECATOMB
XXII THE LAST WORDS OF CAPTAIN NEMO
XXIII CONCLUSION
 PART ONE

CHAPTER I

A SHIFTING REEF

The year 1866 was signalised by a remarkable incident, a mysterious and

puzzling phenomenon, which doubtless no one has yet forgotten. Not to mention
rumours which agitated the maritime population and excited the public mind,
even in the interior of continents, seafaring men were particularly excited.
Merchants, common sailors, captains of vessels, skippers, both of Europe and
America, naval officers of all countries, and the Governments of several States
on the two continents, were deeply interested in the matter.

For some time past vessels had been met by "an enormous thing," a long
object, spindle-shaped, occasionally phosphorescent, and infinitely larger and
more rapid in its movements than a whale.

The facts relating to this apparition (entered in various log-books) agreed in

most respects as to the shape of the object or creature in question, the untiring
rapidity of its movements, its surprising power of locomotion, and the peculiar
life with which it seemed endowed. If it was a whale, it surpassed in size all
those hitherto classified in science. Taking into consideration the mean of
observations made at divers times—rejecting the timid estimate of those who
assigned to this object a length of two hundred feet, equally with the exaggerated
opinions which set it down as a mile in width and three in length—we might
fairly conclude that this mysterious being surpassed greatly all dimensions
admitted by the learned ones of the day, if it existed at all. And that it DID exist
was an undeniable fact; and, with that tendency which disposes the human mind
in favour of the marvellous, we can understand the excitement produced in the
entire world by this supernatural apparition. As to classing it in the list of fables,
the idea was out of the question.

On the 20th of July, 1866, the steamer Governor Higginson, of the Calcutta
and Burnach Steam Navigation Company, had met this moving mass five miles
off the east coast of Australia. Captain Baker thought at first that he was in the
presence of an unknown sandbank; he even prepared to determine its exact
position when two columns of water, projected by the mysterious object, shot
with a hissing noise a hundred and fifty feet up into the air. Now, unless the
sandbank had been submitted to the intermittent eruption of a geyser, the
Governor Higginson had to do neither more nor less than with an aquatic
mammal, unknown till then, which threw up from its blow-holes columns of
water mixed with air and vapour.

Similar facts were observed on the 23rd of July in the same year, in the
Pacific Ocean, by the Columbus, of the West India and Pacific Steam Navigation
Company. But this extraordinary creature could transport itself from one place to
another with surprising velocity; as, in an interval of three days, the Governor
Higginson and the Columbus had observed it at two different points of the chart,
separated by a distance of more than seven hundred nautical leagues.

Fifteen days later, two thousand miles farther off, the Helvetia, of the
Compagnie-Nationale, and the Shannon, of the Royal Mail Steamship Company,
sailing to windward in that portion of the Atlantic lying between the United
States and Europe, respectively signalled the monster to each other in 42° 15' N.
lat. and 60° 35' W. long. In these simultaneous observations they thought
themselves justified in estimating the minimum length of the mammal at more
than three hundred and fifty feet, as the Shannon and Helvetia were of smaller
dimensions than it, though they measured three hundred feet over all.

Now the largest whales, those which frequent those parts of the sea round the
Aleutian, Kulammak, and Umgullich islands, have never exceeded the length of
sixty yards, if they attain that.

In every place of great resort the monster was the fashion. They sang of it in
the cafes, ridiculed it in the papers, and represented it on the stage. All kinds of
stories were circulated regarding it. There appeared in the papers caricatures of
every gigantic and imaginary creature, from the white whale, the terrible "Moby
Dick" of sub-arctic regions, to the immense kraken, whose tentacles could
entangle a ship of five hundred tons and hurry it into the abyss of the ocean. The
legends of ancient times were even revived.

Then burst forth the unending argument between the believers and the
unbelievers in the societies of the wise and the scientific journals. "The question
of the monster" inflamed all minds. Editors of scientific journals, quarrelling
with believers in the supernatural, spilled seas of ink during this memorable
campaign, some even drawing blood; for from the sea-serpent they came to
direct personalities.

During the first months of the year 1867 the question seemed buried, never to
revive, when new facts were brought before the public. It was then no longer a
scientific problem to be solved, but a real danger seriously to be avoided. The
question took quite another shape. The monster became a small island, a rock, a
reef, but a reef of indefinite and shifting proportions.

On the 5th of March, 1867, the Moravian, of the Montreal Ocean Company,
finding herself during the night in 27° 30' lat. and 72° 15' long., struck on her
starboard quarter a rock, marked in no chart for that part of the sea. Under the
combined efforts of the wind and its four hundred horse power, it was going at
the rate of thirteen knots. Had it not been for the superior strength of the hull of
the Moravian, she would have been broken by the shock and gone down with the
237 passengers she was bringing home from Canada.

The accident happened about five o'clock in the morning, as the day was
breaking. The officers of the quarter-deck hurried to the after-part of the vessel.
They examined the sea with the most careful attention. They saw nothing but a
strong eddy about three cables' length distant, as if the surface had been violently
agitated. The bearings of the place were taken exactly, and the Moravian
continued its route without apparent damage. Had it struck on a submerged rock,
or on an enormous wreck? They could not tell; but, on examination of the ship's
bottom when undergoing repairs, it was found that part of her keel was broken.

This fact, so grave in itself, might perhaps have been forgotten like many
others if, three weeks after, it had not been re-enacted under similar
circumstances. But, thanks to the nationality of the victim of the shock, thanks to
the reputation of the company to which the vessel belonged, the circumstance
became extensively circulated.

The 13th of April, 1867, the sea being beautiful, the breeze favourable, the
Scotia, of the Cunard Company's line, found herself in 15° 12' long. and 45° 37'
lat. She was going at the speed of thirteen knots and a half.

At seventeen minutes past four in the afternoon, whilst the passengers were
assembled at lunch in the great saloon, a slight shock was felt on the hull of the
Scotia, on her quarter, a little aft of the port-paddle.

The Scotia had not struck, but she had been struck, and seemingly by
something rather sharp and penetrating than blunt. The shock had been so slight
that no one had been alarmed, had it not been for the shouts of the carpenter's
watch, who rushed on to the bridge, exclaiming, "We are sinking! we are
sinking!" At first the passengers were much frightened, but Captain Anderson
hastened to reassure them. The danger could not be imminent. The Scotia,
divided into seven compartments by strong partitions, could brave with impunity
any leak. Captain Anderson went down immediately into the hold. He found that
the sea was pouring into the fifth compartment; and the rapidity of the influx
proved that the force of the water was considerable. Fortunately this
compartment did not hold the boilers, or the fires would have been immediately
extinguished. Captain Anderson ordered the engines to be stopped at once, and
one of the men went down to ascertain the extent of the injury. Some minutes
afterwards they discovered the existence of a large hole, two yards in diameter,
in the ship's bottom. Such a leak could not be stopped; and the Scotia, her
paddles half submerged, was obliged to continue her course. She was then three
hundred miles from Cape Clear, and, after three days' delay, which caused great
uneasiness in Liverpool, she entered the basin of the company.

The engineers visited the Scotia, which was put in dry dock. They could
scarcely believe it possible; at two yards and a half below water-mark was a
regular rent, in the form of an isosceles triangle. The broken place in the iron
plates was so perfectly defined that it could not have been more neatly done by a
punch. It was clear, then, that the instrument producing the perforation was not
of a common stamp and, after having been driven with prodigious strength, and
piercing an iron plate 1 3/8 inches thick, had withdrawn itself by a backward
motion.

Such was the last fact, which resulted in exciting once more the torrent of
public opinion. From this moment all unlucky casualties which could not be
otherwise accounted for were put down to the monster.
 Upon this imaginary creature rested the responsibility of all these shipwrecks,
which unfortunately were considerable; for of three thousand ships whose loss
was annually recorded at Lloyd's, the number of sailing and steam-ships
supposed to be totally lost, from the absence of all news, amounted to not less
than two hundred!

Now, it was the "monster" who, justly or unjustly, was accused of their
disappearance, and, thanks to it, communication between the different continents
became more and more dangerous. The public demanded sharply that the seas
should at any price be relieved from this formidable cetacean.[1]

[1] Member of the whale family.

CHAPTER II

PRO AND CON

At the period when these events took place, I had just returned from a
scientific research in the disagreeable territory of Nebraska, in the United States.
In virtue of my office as Assistant Professor in the Museum of Natural History in
Paris, the French Government had attached me to that expedition. After six
months in Nebraska, I arrived in New York towards the end of March, laden with
a precious collection. My departure for France was fixed for the first days in
May. Meanwhile I was occupying myself in classifying my mineralogical,
botanical, and zoological riches, when the accident happened to the Scotia.

I was perfectly up in the subject which was the question of the day. How
could I be otherwise? I had read and reread all the American and European
papers without being any nearer a conclusion. This mystery puzzled me. Under
the impossibility of forming an opinion, I jumped from one extreme to the other.
That there really was something could not be doubted, and the incredulous were
invited to put their finger on the wound of the Scotia.
 On my arrival at New York the question was at its height. The theory of the
floating island, and the unapproachable sandbank, supported by minds little
competent to form a judgment, was abandoned. And, indeed, unless this shoal
had a machine in its stomach, how could it change its position with such
astonishing rapidity?

From the same cause, the idea of a floating hull of an enormous wreck was
given up.

There remained, then, only two possible solutions of the question, which
created two distinct parties: on one side, those who were for a monster of
colossal strength; on the other, those who were for a submarine vessel of
enormous motive power.

But this last theory, plausible as it was, could not stand against inquiries made
in both worlds. That a private gentleman should have such a machine at his
command was not likely. Where, when, and how was it built? and how could its
construction have been kept secret? Certainly a Government might possess such
a destructive machine. And in these disastrous times, when the ingenuity of man
has multiplied the power of weapons of war, it was possible that, without the
knowledge of others, a State might try to work such a formidable engine.

But the idea of a war machine fell before the declaration of Governments. As
public interest was in question, and transatlantic communications suffered, their
veracity could not be doubted. But how admit that the construction of this
submarine boat had escaped the public eye? For a private gentleman to keep the
secret under such circumstances would be very difficult, and for a State whose
every act is persistently watched by powerful rivals, certainly impossible.

Upon my arrival in New York several persons did me the honour of

consulting me on the phenomenon in question. I had published in France a work
in quarto, in two volumes, entitled Mysteries of the Great Submarine Grounds.
This book, highly approved of in the learned world, gained for me a special
reputation in this rather obscure branch of Natural History. My advice was
asked. As long as I could deny the reality of the fact, I confined myself to a
decided negative. But soon, finding myself driven into a corner, I was obliged to
explain myself point by point. I discussed the question in all its forms, politically
and scientifically; and I give here an extract from a carefully-studied article
which I published in the number of the 30th of April. It ran as follows:
 "After examining one by one the different theories, rejecting all other
suggestions, it becomes necessary to admit the existence of a marine animal of
enormous power.

"The great depths of the ocean are entirely unknown to us. Soundings cannot
reach them. What passes in those remote depths—what beings live, or can live,
twelve or fifteen miles beneath the surface of the waters—what is the
organisation of these animals, we can scarcely conjecture. However, the solution
of the problem submitted to me may modify the form of the dilemma. Either we
do know all the varieties of beings which people our planet, or we do not. If we
do NOT know them all—if Nature has still secrets in the deeps for us, nothing is
more conformable to reason than to admit the existence of fishes, or cetaceans of
other kinds, or even of new species, of an organisation formed to inhabit the
strata inaccessible to soundings, and which an accident of some sort has brought
at long intervals to the upper level of the ocean.

"If, on the contrary, we DO know all living kinds, we must necessarily seek
for the animal in question amongst those marine beings already classed; and, in
that case, I should be disposed to admit the existence of a gigantic narwhal.

"The common narwhal, or unicorn of the sea, often attains a length of sixty
feet. Increase its size fivefold or tenfold, give it strength proportionate to its size,
lengthen its destructive weapons, and you obtain the animal required. It will
have the proportions determined by the officers of the Shannon, the instrument
required by the perforation of the Scotia, and the power necessary to pierce the
hull of the steamer.

"Indeed, the narwhal is armed with a sort of ivory sword, a halberd,

according to the expression of certain naturalists. The principal tusk has the
hardness of steel. Some of these tusks have been found buried in the bodies of
whales, which the unicorn always attacks with success. Others have been drawn
out, not without trouble, from the bottoms of ships, which they had pierced
through and through, as a gimlet pierces a barrel. The Museum of the Faculty of
Medicine of Paris possesses one of these defensive weapons, two yards and a
quarter in length, and fifteen inches in diameter at the base.

"Very well! suppose this weapon to be six times stronger and the animal ten
times more powerful; launch it at the rate of twenty miles an hour, and you
obtain a shock capable of producing the catastrophe required. Until further
information, therefore, I shall maintain it to be a sea-unicorn of colossal
dimensions, armed not with a halberd, but with a real spur, as the armoured
frigates, or the `rams' of war, whose massiveness and motive power it would
possess at the same time. Thus may this puzzling phenomenon be explained,
unless there be something over and above all that one has ever conjectured, seen,
perceived, or experienced; which is just within the bounds of possibility."

These last words were cowardly on my part; but, up to a certain point, I

wished to shelter my dignity as professor, and not give too much cause for
laughter to the Americans, who laugh well when they do laugh. I reserved for
myself a way of escape. In effect, however, I admitted the existence of the
"monster." My article was warmly discussed, which procured it a high
reputation. It rallied round it a certain number of partisans. The solution it
proposed gave, at least, full liberty to the imagination. The human mind delights
in grand conceptions of supernatural beings. And the sea is precisely their best
vehicle, the only medium through which these giants (against which terrestrial
animals, such as elephants or rhinoceroses, are as nothing) can be produced or
developed.

The industrial and commercial papers treated the question chiefly from this
point of view. The Shipping and Mercantile Gazette, the Lloyd's List, the Packet-
Boat, and the Maritime and Colonial Review, all papers devoted to insurance
companies which threatened to raise their rates of premium, were unanimous on
this point. Public opinion had been pronounced. The United States were the first
in the field; and in New York they made preparations for an expedition destined
to pursue this narwhal. A frigate of great speed, the Abraham Lincoln, was put in
commission as soon as possible. The arsenals were opened to Commander
Farragut, who hastened the arming of his frigate; but, as it always happens, the
moment it was decided to pursue the monster, the monster did not appear. For
two months no one heard it spoken of. No ship met with it. It seemed as if this
unicorn knew of the plots weaving around it. It had been so much talked of, even
through the Atlantic cable, that jesters pretended that this slender fly had stopped
a telegram on its passage and was making the most of it.

So when the frigate had been armed for a long campaign, and provided with
formidable fishing apparatus, no one could tell what course to pursue.
Impatience grew apace, when, on the 2nd of July, they learned that a steamer of
the line of San Francisco, from California to Shanghai, had seen the animal three
weeks before in the North Pacific Ocean. The excitement caused by this news
was extreme. The ship was revictualled and well stocked with coal.

Three hours before the Abraham Lincoln left Brooklyn pier, I received a
letter worded as follows:

To M. ARONNAX, Professor in the Museum of Paris, Fifth Avenue Hotel, New

York.

SIR,—If you will consent to join the Abraham Lincoln in this expedition, the
Government of the United States will with pleasure see France represented in the
enterprise. Commander Farragut has a cabin at your disposal.

Very cordially yours, J.B. HOBSON, Secretary of Marine.

CHAPTER III

I FORM MY RESOLUTION

Three seconds before the arrival of J. B. Hobson's letter I no more thought of

pursuing the unicorn than of attempting the passage of the North Sea. Three
seconds after reading the letter of the honourable Secretary of Marine, I felt that
my true vocation, the sole end of my life, was to chase this disturbing monster
and purge it from the world.

But I had just returned from a fatiguing journey, weary and longing for
repose. I aspired to nothing more than again seeing my country, my friends, my
little lodging by the Jardin des Plantes, my dear and precious collections—but
nothing could keep me back! I forgot all—fatigue, friends and collections—and
accepted without hesitation the offer of the American Government.

"Besides," thought I, "all roads lead back to Europe; and the unicorn may be
amiable enough to hurry me towards the coast of France. This worthy animal
may allow itself to be caught in the seas of Europe (for my particular benefit),
and I will not bring back less than half a yard of his ivory halberd to the Museum
of Natural History." But in the meanwhile I must seek this narwhal in the North
Pacific Ocean, which, to return to France, was taking the road to the antipodes.

"Conseil," I called in an impatient voice.

Conseil was my servant, a true, devoted Flemish boy, who had accompanied
me in all my travels. I liked him, and he returned the liking well. He was quiet
by nature, regular from principle, zealous from habit, evincing little disturbance
at the different surprises of life, very quick with his hands, and apt at any service
required of him; and, despite his name, never giving advice—even when asked
for it.

Conseil had followed me for the last ten years wherever science led. Never
once did he complain of the length or fatigue of a journey, never make an
objection to pack his portmanteau for whatever country it might be, or however
far away, whether China or Congo. Besides all this, he had good health, which
defied all sickness, and solid muscles, but no nerves; good morals are
understood. This boy was thirty years old, and his age to that of his master as
fifteen to twenty. May I be excused for saying that I was forty years old?

But Conseil had one fault: he was ceremonious to a degree, and would never
speak to me but in the third person, which was sometimes provoking.

"Conseil," said I again, beginning with feverish hands to make preparations

for my departure.

Certainly I was sure of this devoted boy. As a rule, I never asked him if it
were convenient for him or not to follow me in my travels; but this time the
expedition in question might be prolonged, and the enterprise might be
hazardous in pursuit of an animal capable of sinking a frigate as easily as a
nutshell. Here there was matter for reflection even to the most impassive man in
the world. What would Conseil say?

"Conseil," I called a third time.

Conseil appeared.

"Did you call, sir?" said he, entering.

"Yes, my boy; make preparations for me and yourself too. We leave in two
hours."
 "As you please, sir," replied Conseil, quietly.

"Not an instant to lose; lock in my trunk all travelling utensils, coats, shirts,
and stockings—without counting, as many as you can, and make haste."

"And your collections, sir?" observed Conseil.

"They will keep them at the hotel."

"We are not returning to Paris, then?" said Conseil.

"Oh! certainly," I answered, evasively, "by making a curve."

"Will the curve please you, sir?"

"Oh! it will be nothing; not quite so direct a road, that is all. We take our
passage in the Abraham, Lincoln."

"As you think proper, sir," coolly replied Conseil.

"You see, my friend, it has to do with the monster—the famous narwhal. We

are going to purge it from the seas. A glorious mission, but a dangerous one! We
cannot tell where we may go; these animals can be very capricious. But we will
go whether or no; we have got a captain who is pretty wide-awake."

Our luggage was transported to the deck of the frigate immediately. I

hastened on board and asked for Commander Farragut. One of the sailors
conducted me to the poop, where I found myself in the presence of a good-
looking officer, who held out his hand to me.

"Monsieur Pierre Aronnax?" said he.

"Himself," replied I. "Commander Farragut?"

"You are welcome, Professor; your cabin is ready for you."

I bowed, and desired to be conducted to the cabin destined for me.

The Abraham Lincoln had been well chosen and equipped for her new
destination. She was a frigate of great speed, fitted with high-pressure engines
which admitted a pressure of seven atmospheres. Under this the Abraham
Lincoln attained the mean speed of nearly eighteen knots and a third an hour—a
considerable speed, but, nevertheless, insufficient to grapple with this gigantic
cetacean.

The interior arrangements of the frigate corresponded to its nautical qualities.

I was well satisfied with my cabin, which was in the after part, opening upon the
gunroom.

"We shall be well off here," said I to Conseil.

"As well, by your honour's leave, as a hermit-crab in the shell of a whelk,"

said Conseil.

I left Conseil to stow our trunks conveniently away, and remounted the poop
in order to survey the preparations for departure.

At that moment Commander Farragut was ordering the last moorings to be

cast loose which held the Abraham Lincoln to the pier of Brooklyn. So in a
quarter of an hour, perhaps less, the frigate would have sailed without me. I
should have missed this extraordinary, supernatural, and incredible expedition,
the recital of which may well meet with some suspicion.

But Commander Farragut would not lose a day nor an hour in scouring the
seas in which the animal had been sighted. He sent for the engineer.

"Is the steam full on?" asked he.

"Yes, sir," replied the engineer.

"Go ahead," cried Commander Farragut.

CHAPTER IV

NED LAND

Captain Farragut was a good seaman, worthy of the frigate he commanded.

His vessel and he were one. He was the soul of it. On the question of the monster
there was no doubt in his mind, and he would not allow the existence of the
animal to be disputed on board. He believed in it, as certain good women believe
in the leviathan—by faith, not by reason. The monster did exist, and he had
sworn to rid the seas of it. Either Captain Farragut would kill the narwhal, or the
narwhal would kill the captain. There was no third course.

The officers on board shared the opinion of their chief. They were ever
chatting, discussing, and calculating the various chances of a meeting, watching
narrowly the vast surface of the ocean. More than one took up his quarters
voluntarily in the cross-trees, who would have cursed such a berth under any
other circumstances. As long as the sun described its daily course, the rigging
was crowded with sailors, whose feet were burnt to such an extent by the heat of
the deck as to render it unbearable; still the Abraham Lincoln had not yet
breasted the suspected waters of the Pacific. As to the ship's company, they
desired nothing better than to meet the unicorn, to harpoon it, hoist it on board,
and despatch it. They watched the sea with eager attention.

Besides, Captain Farragut had spoken of a certain sum of two thousand

dollars, set apart for whoever should first sight the monster, were he cabin-boy,
common seaman, or officer.

I leave you to judge how eyes were used on board the Abraham Lincoln.

For my own part I was not behind the others, and, left to no one my share of
daily observations. The frigate might have been called the Argus, for a hundred
reasons. Only one amongst us, Conseil, seemed to protest by his indifference
against the question which so interested us all, and seemed to be out of keeping
with the general enthusiasm on board.

I have said that Captain Farragut had carefully provided his ship with every
apparatus for catching the gigantic cetacean. No whaler had ever been better
armed. We possessed every known engine, from the harpoon thrown by the hand
to the barbed arrows of the blunderbuss, and the explosive balls of the duck-gun.
On the forecastle lay the perfection of a breech-loading gun, very thick at the
breech, and very narrow in the bore, the model of which had been in the
Exhibition of 1867. This precious weapon of American origin could throw with
ease a conical projectile of nine pounds to a mean distance of ten miles.
 Thus the Abraham Lincoln wanted for no means of destruction; and, what
was better still she had on board Ned Land, the prince of harpooners.

Ned Land was a Canadian, with an uncommon quickness of hand, and who
knew no equal in his dangerous occupation. Skill, coolness, audacity, and
cunning he possessed in a superior degree, and it must be a cunning whale to
escape the stroke of his harpoon.

Ned Land was about forty years of age; he was a tall man (more than six feet
high), strongly built, grave and taciturn, occasionally violent, and very
passionate when contradicted. His person attracted attention, but above all the
boldness of his look, which gave a singular expression to his face.

Who calls himself Canadian calls himself French; and, little communicative
as Ned Land was, I must admit that he took a certain liking for me. My
nationality drew him to me, no doubt. It was an opportunity for him to talk, and
for me to hear, that old language of Rabelais, which is still in use in some
Canadian provinces. The harpooner's family was originally from Quebec, and
was already a tribe of hardy fishermen when this town belonged to France.

Little by little, Ned Land acquired a taste for chatting, and I loved to hear the
recital of his adventures in the polar seas. He related his fishing, and his
combats, with natural poetry of expression; his recital took the form of an epic
poem, and I seemed to be listening to a Canadian Homer singing the Iliad of the
regions of the North.

I am portraying this hardy companion as I really knew him. We are old

friends now, united in that unchangeable friendship which is born and cemented
amidst extreme dangers. Ah, brave Ned! I ask no more than to live a hundred
years longer, that I may have more time to dwell the longer on your memory.

Now, what was Ned Land's opinion upon the question of the marine monster?
I must admit that he did not believe in the unicorn, and was the only one on
board who did not share that universal conviction. He even avoided the subject,
which I one day thought it my duty to press upon him. One magnificent evening,
the 30th July (that is to say, three weeks after our departure), the frigate was
abreast of Cape Blanc, thirty miles to leeward of the coast of Patagonia. We had
crossed the tropic of Capricorn, and the Straits of Magellan opened less than
seven hundred miles to the south. Before eight days were over the Abraham
Lincoln would be ploughing the waters of the Pacific.

Seated on the poop, Ned Land and I were chatting of one thing and another as
we looked at this mysterious sea, whose great depths had up to this time been
inaccessible to the eye of man. I naturally led up the conversation to the giant
unicorn, and examined the various chances of success or failure of the
expedition. But, seeing that Ned Land let me speak without saying too much
himself, I pressed him more closely.

"Well, Ned," said I, "is it possible that you are not convinced of the existence
of this cetacean that we are following? Have you any particular reason for being
so incredulous?"

The harpooner looked at me fixedly for some moments before answering,

struck his broad forehead with his hand (a habit of his), as if to collect himself,
and said at last, "Perhaps I have, Mr. Aronnax."

"But, Ned, you, a whaler by profession, familiarised with all the great marine
mammalia—YOU ought to be the last to doubt under such circumstances!"

"That is just what deceives you, Professor," replied Ned. "As a whaler I have
followed many a cetacean, harpooned a great number, and killed several; but,
however strong or well-armed they may have been, neither their tails nor their
weapons would have been able even to scratch the iron plates of a steamer."

"But, Ned, they tell of ships which the teeth of the narwhal have pierced
through and through."

"Wooden ships—that is possible," replied the Canadian, "but I have never

seen it done; and, until further proof, I deny that whales, cetaceans, or sea-
unicorns could ever produce the effect you describe."

"Well, Ned, I repeat it with a conviction resting on the logic of facts. I believe
in the existence of a mammal power fully organised, belonging to the branch of
vertebrata, like the whales, the cachalots, or the dolphins, and furnished with a
horn of defence of great penetrating power."

"Hum!" said the harpooner, shaking his head with the air of a man who would
not be convinced.
 "Notice one thing, my worthy Canadian," I resumed. "If such an animal is in
existence, if it inhabits the depths of the ocean, if it frequents the strata lying
miles below the surface of the water, it must necessarily possess an organisation
the strength of which would defy all comparison."

"And why this powerful organisation?" demanded Ned.

"Because it requires incalculable strength to keep one's self in these strata and
resist their pressure. Listen to me. Let us admit that the pressure of the
atmosphere is represented by the weight of a column of water thirty-two feet
high. In reality the column of water would be shorter, as we are speaking of sea
water, the density of which is greater than that of fresh water. Very well, when
you dive, Ned, as many times 32 feet of water as there are above you, so many
times does your body bear a pressure equal to that of the atmosphere, that is to
say, 15 lb. for each square inch of its surface. It follows, then, that at 320 feet
this pressure equals that of 10 atmospheres, of 100 atmospheres at 3,200 feet,
and of 1,000 atmospheres at 32,000 feet, that is, about 6 miles; which is
equivalent to saying that if you could attain this depth in the ocean, each square
three-eighths of an inch of the surface of your body would bear a pressure of
5,600 lb. Ah! my brave Ned, do you know how many square inches you carry on
the surface of your body?"

"I have no idea, Mr. Aronnax."

"About 6,500; and as in reality the atmospheric pressure is about 15 lb. to the
square inch, your 6,500 square inches bear at this moment a pressure of 97,500
lb."

"Without my perceiving it?"

"Without your perceiving it. And if you are not crushed by such a pressure, it
is because the air penetrates the interior of your body with equal pressure. Hence
perfect equilibrium between the interior and exterior pressure, which thus
neutralise each other, and which allows you to bear it without inconvenience.
But in the water it is another thing."

"Yes, I understand," replied Ned, becoming more attentive; "because the

water surrounds me, but does not penetrate."

"Precisely, Ned: so that at 32 feet beneath the surface of the sea you would
undergo a pressure of 97,500 lb.; at 320 feet, ten times that pressure; at 3,200
feet, a hundred times that pressure; lastly, at 32,000 feet, a thousand times that
pressure would be 97,500,000 lb.—that is to say, that you would be flattened as
if you had been drawn from the plates of a hydraulic machine!"

"The devil!" exclaimed Ned.

"Very well, my worthy harpooner, if some vertebrate, several hundred yards

long, and large in proportion, can maintain itself in such depths—of those whose
surface is represented by millions of square inches, that is by tens of millions of
pounds, we must estimate the pressure they undergo. Consider, then, what must
be the resistance of their bony structure, and the strength of their organisation to
withstand such pressure!"

"Why!" exclaimed Ned Land, "they must be made of iron plates eight inches
thick, like the armoured frigates."

"As you say, Ned. And think what destruction such a mass would cause, if
hurled with the speed of an express train against the hull of a vessel."

"Yes—certainly—perhaps," replied the Canadian, shaken by these figures,

but not yet willing to give in.

"Well, have I convinced you?"

"You have convinced me of one thing, sir, which is that, if such animals do
exist at the bottom of the seas, they must necessarily be as strong as you say."

"But if they do not exist, mine obstinate harpooner, how explain the accident
to the Scotia?"

CHAPTER V

AT A VENTURE

The voyage of the Abraham Lincoln was for a long time marked by no
special incident. But one circumstance happened which showed the wonderful
dexterity of Ned Land, and proved what confidence we might place in him.

The 30th of June, the frigate spoke some American whalers, from whom we
learned that they knew nothing about the narwhal. But one of them, the captain
of the Monroe, knowing that Ned Land had shipped on board the Abraham
Lincoln, begged for his help in chasing a whale they had in sight. Commander
Farragut, desirous of seeing Ned Land at work, gave him permission to go on
board the Monroe. And fate served our Canadian so well that, instead of one
whale, he harpooned two with a double blow, striking one straight to the heart,
and catching the other after some minutes' pursuit.

Decidedly, if the monster ever had to do with Ned Land's harpoon, I would
not bet in its favour.

The frigate skirted the south-east coast of America with great rapidity. The
3rd of July we were at the opening of the Straits of Magellan, level with Cape
Vierges. But Commander Farragut would not take a tortuous passage, but
doubled Cape Horn.

The ship's crew agreed with him. And certainly it was possible that they
might meet the narwhal in this narrow pass. Many of the sailors affirmed that the
monster could not pass there, "that he was too big for that!"

The 6th of July, about three o'clock in the afternoon, the Abraham Lincoln, at
fifteen miles to the south, doubled the solitary island, this lost rock at the
extremity of the American continent, to which some Dutch sailors gave the name
of their native town, Cape Horn. The course was taken towards the north-west,
and the next day the screw of the frigate was at last beating the waters of the
Pacific.

"Keep your eyes open!" called out the sailors.

And they were opened widely. Both eyes and glasses, a little dazzled, it is
true, by the prospect of two thousand dollars, had not an instant's repose.

I myself, for whom money had no charms, was not the least attentive on
board. Giving but few minutes to my meals, but a few hours to sleep, indifferent
to either rain or sunshine, I did not leave the poop of the vessel. Now leaning on
the netting of the forecastle, now on the taffrail, I devoured with eagerness the
soft foam which whitened the sea as far as the eye could reach; and how often
have I shared the emotion of the majority of the crew, when some capricious
whale raised its black back above the waves! The poop of the vessel was
crowded on a moment. The cabins poured forth a torrent of sailors and officers,
each with heaving breast and troubled eye watching the course of the cetacean. I
looked and looked till I was nearly blind, whilst Conseil kept repeating in a calm
voice:

"If, sir, you would not squint so much, you would see better!"

But vain excitement! The Abraham Lincoln checked its speed and made for
the animal signalled, a simple whale, or common cachalot, which soon
disappeared amidst a storm of abuse.

But the weather was good. The voyage was being accomplished under the
most favourable auspices. It was then the bad season in Australia, the July of that
zone corresponding to our January in Europe, but the sea was beautiful and
easily scanned round a vast circumference.

The 20th of July, the tropic of Capricorn was cut by 105d of longitude, and
the 27th of the same month we crossed the Equator on the 110th meridian. This
passed, the frigate took a more decided westerly direction, and scoured the
central waters of the Pacific. Commander Farragut thought, and with reason, that
it was better to remain in deep water, and keep clear of continents or islands,
which the beast itself seemed to shun (perhaps because there was not enough
water for him! suggested the greater part of the crew). The frigate passed at
some distance from the Marquesas and the Sandwich Islands, crossed the tropic
of Cancer, and made for the China Seas. We were on the theatre of the last
diversions of the monster: and, to say truth, we no longer LIVED on board. The
entire ship's crew were undergoing a nervous excitement, of which I can give no
idea: they could not eat, they could not sleep—twenty times a day, a
misconception or an optical illusion of some sailor seated on the taffrail, would
cause dreadful perspirations, and these emotions, twenty times repeated, kept us
in a state of excitement so violent that a reaction was unavoidable.

And truly, reaction soon showed itself. For three months, during which a day
seemed an age, the Abraham Lincoln furrowed all the waters of the Northern
Pacific, running at whales, making sharp deviations from her course, veering
suddenly from one tack to another, stopping suddenly, putting on steam, and
backing ever and anon at the risk of deranging her machinery, and not one point
of the Japanese or American coast was left unexplored.

The warmest partisans of the enterprise now became its most ardent
detractors. Reaction mounted from the crew to the captain himself, and certainly,
had it not been for the resolute determination on the part of Captain Farragut, the
frigate would have headed due southward. This useless search could not last
much longer. The Abraham Lincoln had nothing to reproach herself with, she
had done her best to succeed. Never had an American ship's crew shown more
zeal or patience; its failure could not be placed to their charge—there remained
nothing but to return.

This was represented to the commander. The sailors could not hide their
discontent, and the service suffered. I will not say there was a mutiny on board,
but after a reasonable period of obstinacy, Captain Farragut (as Columbus did)
asked for three days' patience. If in three days the monster did not appear, the
man at the helm should give three turns of the wheel, and the Abraham Lincoln
would make for the European seas.

This promise was made on the 2nd of November. It had the effect of rallying
the ship's crew. The ocean was watched with renewed attention. Each one
wished for a last glance in which to sum up his remembrance. Glasses were used
with feverish activity. It was a grand defiance given to the giant narwhal, and he
could scarcely fail to answer the summons and "appear."

Two days passed, the steam was at half pressure; a thousand schemes were
tried to attract the attention and stimulate the apathy of the animal in case it
should be met in those parts. Large quantities of bacon were trailed in the wake
of the ship, to the great satisfaction (I must say) of the sharks. Small craft
radiated in all directions round the Abraham Lincoln as she lay to, and did not
leave a spot of the sea unexplored. But the night of the 4th of November arrived
without the unveiling of this submarine mystery.

The next day, the 5th of November, at twelve, the delay would (morally
speaking) expire; after that time, Commander Farragut, faithful to his promise,
was to turn the course to the south-east and abandon for ever the northern
regions of the Pacific.

The frigate was then in 31° 15' N. lat. and 136° 42' E. long. The coast of
Japan still remained less than two hundred miles to leeward. Night was
approaching. They had just struck eight bells; large clouds veiled the face of the
moon, then in its first quarter. The sea undulated peaceably under the stern of the
vessel.

At that moment I was leaning forward on the starboard netting. Conseil,

standing near me, was looking straight before him. The crew, perched in the
ratlines, examined the horizon which contracted and darkened by degrees.
Officers with their night glasses scoured the growing darkness: sometimes the
ocean sparkled under the rays of the moon, which darted between two clouds,
then all trace of light was lost in the darkness.

In looking at Conseil, I could see he was undergoing a little of the general

influence. At least I thought so. Perhaps for the first time his nerves vibrated to a
sentiment of curiosity.

"Come, Conseil," said I, "this is the last chance of pocketing the two
thousand dollars."

"May I be permitted to say, sir," replied Conseil, "that I never reckoned on

getting the prize; and, had the government of the Union offered a hundred
thousand dollars, it would have been none the poorer."

"You are right, Conseil. It is a foolish affair after all, and one upon which we
entered too lightly. What time lost, what useless emotions! We should have been
back in France six months ago."

"In your little room, sir," replied Conseil, "and in your museum, sir; and I
should have already classed all your fossils, sir. And the Babiroussa would have
been installed in its cage in the Jardin des Plantes, and have drawn all the curious
people of the capital!"

"As you say, Conseil. I fancy we shall run a fair chance of being laughed at
for our pains."

"That's tolerably certain," replied Conseil, quietly; "I think they will make fun
of you, sir. And, must I say it——?"

"Go on, my good friend."

 "Well, sir, you will only get your deserts."

"Indeed!"

"When one has the honour of being a savant as you are, sir, one should not
expose one's self to——"

Conseil had not time to finish his compliment. In the midst of general silence
a voice had just been heard. It was the voice of Ned Land shouting:

"Look out there! The very thing we are looking for—on our weather beam!"

CHAPTER VI

AT FULL STEAM

At this cry the whole ship's crew hurried towards the harpooner—
commander, officers, masters, sailors, cabin boys; even the engineers left their
engines, and the stokers their furnaces.

The order to stop her had been given, and the frigate now simply went on by
her own momentum. The darkness was then profound, and, however good the
Canadian's eyes were, I asked myself how he had managed to see, and what he
had been able to see. My heart beat as if it would break. But Ned Land was not
mistaken, and we all perceived the object he pointed to. At two cables' length
from the Abraham Lincoln, on the starboard quarter, the sea seemed to be
illuminated all over. It was not a mere phosphoric phenomenon. The monster
emerged some fathoms from the water, and then threw out that very intense but
mysterious light mentioned in the report of several captains. This magnificent
irradiation must have been produced by an agent of great SHINING power. The
luminous part traced on the sea an immense oval, much elongated, the centre of
which condensed a burning heat, whose overpowering brilliancy died out by
successive gradations.

"It is only a massing of phosphoric particles," cried one of the officers.

 "No, sir, certainly not," I replied. "That brightness is of an essentially
electrical nature. Besides, see, see! it moves; it is moving forwards, backwards;
it is darting towards us!"

A general cry arose from the frigate.

"Silence!" said the captain. "Up with the helm, reverse the engines."

The steam was shut off, and the Abraham Lincoln, beating to port, described
a semicircle.

"Right the helm, go ahead," cried the captain.

These orders were executed, and the frigate moved rapidly from the burning
light.

I was mistaken. She tried to sheer off, but the supernatural animal approached
with a velocity double her own.

We gasped for breath. Stupefaction more than fear made us dumb and
motionless. The animal gained on us, sporting with the waves. It made the round
of the frigate, which was then making fourteen knots, and enveloped it with its
electric rings like luminous dust.

Then it moved away two or three miles, leaving a phosphorescent track, like
those volumes of steam that the express trains leave behind. All at once from the
dark line of the horizon whither it retired to gain its momentum, the monster
rushed suddenly towards the Abraham Lincoln with alarming rapidity, stopped
suddenly about twenty feet from the hull, and died out—not diving under the
water, for its brilliancy did not abate—but suddenly, and as if the source of this
brilliant emanation was exhausted. Then it reappeared on the other side of the
vessel, as if it had turned and slid under the hull. Any moment a collision might
have occurred which would have been fatal to us. However, I was astonished at
the manoeuvres of the frigate. She fled and did not attack.

On the captain's face, generally so impassive, was an expression of

unaccountable astonishment.

"Mr. Aronnax," he said, "I do not know with what formidable being I have to
deal, and I will not imprudently risk my frigate in the midst of this darkness.
Besides, how attack this unknown thing, how defend one's self from it? Wait for
daylight, and the scene will change."

"You have no further doubt, captain, of the nature of the animal?"

"No, sir; it is evidently a gigantic narwhal, and an electric one."

"Perhaps," added I, "one can only approach it with a torpedo."

"Undoubtedly," replied the captain, "if it possesses such dreadful power, it is

the most terrible animal that ever was created. That is why, sir, I must be on my
guard."

The crew were on their feet all night. No one thought of sleep. The Abraham
Lincoln, not being able to struggle with such velocity, had moderated its pace,
and sailed at half speed. For its part, the narwhal, imitating the frigate, let the
waves rock it at will, and seemed decided not to leave the scene of the struggle.
Towards midnight, however, it disappeared, or, to use a more appropriate term, it
"died out" like a large glow-worm. Had it fled? One could only fear, not hope it.
But at seven minutes to one o'clock in the morning a deafening whistling was
heard, like that produced by a body of water rushing with great violence.

The captain, Ned Land, and I were then on the poop, eagerly peering through
the profound darkness.

"Ned Land," asked the commander, "you have often heard the roaring of
whales?"

"Often, sir; but never such whales the sight of which brought me in two
thousand dollars. If I can only approach within four harpoons' length of it!"

"But to approach it," said the commander, "I ought to put a whaler at your
disposal?"

"Certainly, sir."

"That will be trifling with the lives of my men."

"And mine too," simply said the harpooner.

 Towards two o'clock in the morning, the burning light reappeared, not less
intense, about five miles to windward of the Abraham Lincoln. Notwithstanding
the distance, and the noise of the wind and sea, one heard distinctly the loud
strokes of the animal's tail, and even its panting breath. It seemed that, at the
moment that the enormous narwhal had come to take breath at the surface of the
water, the air was engulfed in its lungs, like the steam in the vast cylinders of a
machine of two thousand horse-power.

"Hum!" thought I, "a whale with the strength of a cavalry regiment would be
a pretty whale!"

We were on the qui vive till daylight, and prepared for the combat. The
fishing implements were laid along the hammock nettings. The second lieutenant
loaded the blunder busses, which could throw harpoons to the distance of a mile,
and long duck-guns, with explosive bullets, which inflicted mortal wounds even
to the most terrible animals. Ned Land contented himself with sharpening his
harpoon—a terrible weapon in his hands.

At six o'clock day began to break; and, with the first glimmer of light, the
electric light of the narwhal disappeared. At seven o'clock the day was
sufficiently advanced, but a very thick sea fog obscured our view, and the best
spy glasses could not pierce it. That caused disappointment and anger.

I climbed the mizzen-mast. Some officers were already perched on the mast-
heads. At eight o'clock the fog lay heavily on the waves, and its thick scrolls rose
little by little. The horizon grew wider and clearer at the same time. Suddenly,
just as on the day before, Ned Land's voice was heard:

"The thing itself on the port quarter!" cried the harpooner.

Every eye was turned towards the point indicated. There, a mile and a half
from the frigate, a long blackish body emerged a yard above the waves. Its tail,
violently agitated, produced a considerable eddy. Never did a tail beat the sea
with such violence. An immense track, of dazzling whiteness, marked the
passage of the animal, and described a long curve.

The frigate approached the cetacean. I examined it thoroughly.

The reports of the Shannon and of the Helvetia had rather exaggerated its
size, and I estimated its length at only two hundred and fifty feet. As to its
dimensions, I could only conjecture them to be admirably proportioned. While I
watched this phenomenon, two jets of steam and water were ejected from its
vents, and rose to the height of 120 feet; thus I ascertained its way of breathing. I
concluded definitely that it belonged to the vertebrate branch, class mammalia.

The crew waited impatiently for their chief's orders. The latter, after having
observed the animal attentively, called the engineer. The engineer ran to him.

"Sir," said the commander, "you have steam up?"

"Yes, sir," answered the engineer.

"Well, make up your fires and put on all steam."

Three hurrahs greeted this order. The time for the struggle had arrived. Some
moments after, the two funnels of the frigate vomited torrents of black smoke,
and the bridge quaked under the trembling of the boilers.

The Abraham Lincoln, propelled by her wonderful screw, went straight at the
animal. The latter allowed it to come within half a cable's length; then, as if
disdaining to dive, it took a little turn, and stopped a short distance off.

This pursuit lasted nearly three-quarters of an hour, without the frigate

gaining two yards on the cetacean. It was quite evident that at that rate we should
never come up with it.

"Well, Mr. Land," asked the captain, "do you advise me to put the boats out to
sea?"

"No, sir," replied Ned Land; "because we shall not take that beast easily."

"What shall we do then?"

"Put on more steam if you can, sir. With your leave, I mean to post myself
under the bowsprit, and, if we get within harpooning distance, I shall throw my
harpoon."

"Go, Ned," said the captain. "Engineer, put on more pressure."

Ned Land went to his post. The fires were increased, the screw revolved
forty-three times a minute, and the steam poured out of the valves. We heaved
the log, and calculated that the Abraham Lincoln was going at the rate of 18 1/2
miles an hour.

But the accursed animal swam at the same speed.

For a whole hour the frigate kept up this pace, without gaining six feet. It was
humiliating for one of the swiftest sailers in the American navy. A stubborn
anger seized the crew; the sailors abused the monster, who, as before, disdained
to answer them; the captain no longer contented himself with twisting his beard
—he gnawed it.

The engineer was called again.

"You have turned full steam on?"

"Yes, sir," replied the engineer.

The speed of the Abraham Lincoln increased. Its masts trembled down to
their stepping holes, and the clouds of smoke could hardly find way out of the
narrow funnels.

They heaved the log a second time.

"Well?" asked the captain of the man at the wheel.

"Nineteen miles and three-tenths, sir."

"Clap on more steam."

The engineer obeyed. The manometer showed ten degrees. But the cetacean
grew warm itself, no doubt; for without straining itself, it made 19 3/10 miles.

What a pursuit! No, I cannot describe the emotion that vibrated through me.
Ned Land kept his post, harpoon in hand. Several times the animal let us gain
upon it.—"We shall catch it! we shall catch it!" cried the Canadian. But just as
he was going to strike, the cetacean stole away with a rapidity that could not be
estimated at less than thirty miles an hour, and even during our maximum of
speed, it bullied the frigate, going round and round it. A cry of fury broke from
everyone!
 At noon we were no further advanced than at eight o'clock in the morning.

The captain then decided to take more direct means.

"Ah!" said he, "that animal goes quicker than the Abraham Lincoln. Very
well! we will see whether it will escape these conical bullets. Send your men to
the forecastle, sir."

The forecastle gun was immediately loaded and slewed round. But the shot
passed some feet above the cetacean, which was half a mile off.

"Another, more to the right," cried the commander, "and five dollars to
whoever will hit that infernal beast."

An old gunner with a grey beard—that I can see now—with steady eye and
grave face, went up to the gun and took a long aim. A loud report was heard,
with which were mingled the cheers of the crew.

The bullet did its work; it hit the animal, and, sliding off the rounded surface,
was lost in two miles depth of sea.

The chase began again, and the captain, leaning towards me, said:

"I will pursue that beast till my frigate bursts up."

"Yes," answered I; "and you will be quite right to do it."

I wished the beast would exhaust itself, and not be insensible to fatigue like a
steam engine. But it was of no use. Hours passed, without its showing any signs
of exhaustion.

However, it must be said in praise of the Abraham Lincoln that she struggled
on indefatigably. I cannot reckon the distance she made under three hundred
miles during this unlucky day, November the 6th. But night came on, and
overshadowed the rough ocean.

Now I thought our expedition was at an end, and that we should never again
see the extraordinary animal. I was mistaken. At ten minutes to eleven in the
evening, the electric light reappeared three miles to windward of the frigate, as
pure, as intense as during the preceding night.
 The narwhal seemed motionless; perhaps, tired with its day's work, it slept,
letting itself float with the undulation of the waves. Now was a chance of which
the captain resolved to take advantage.

He gave his orders. The Abraham Lincoln kept up half steam, and advanced
cautiously so as not to awake its adversary. It is no rare thing to meet in the
middle of the ocean whales so sound asleep that they can be successfully
attacked, and Ned Land had harpooned more than one during its sleep. The
Canadian went to take his place again under the bowsprit.
 The frigate approached noiselessly, stopped at two cables' lengths from the
animal, and following its track. No one breathed; a deep silence reigned on the
bridge. We were not a hundred feet from the burning focus, the light of which
increased and dazzled our eyes.

At this moment, leaning on the forecastle bulwark, I saw below me Ned Land
grappling the martingale in one hand, brandishing his terrible harpoon in the
other, scarcely twenty feet from the motionless animal. Suddenly his arm
straightened, and the harpoon was thrown; I heard the sonorous stroke of the
weapon, which seemed to have struck a hard body. The electric light went out
suddenly, and two enormous waterspouts broke over the bridge of the frigate,
rushing like a torrent from stem to stern, overthrowing men, and breaking the
lashings of the spars. A fearful shock followed, and, thrown over the rail without
having time to stop myself, I fell into the sea.

CHAPTER VII

AN UNKNOWN SPECIES OF WHALE

This unexpected fall so stunned me that I have no clear recollection of my

sensations at the time. I was at first drawn down to a depth of about twenty feet.
I am a good swimmer (though without pretending to rival Byron or Edgar Poe,
who were masters of the art), and in that plunge I did not lose my presence of
mind. Two vigorous strokes brought me to the surface of the water. My first care
was to look for the frigate. Had the crew seen me disappear? Had the Abraham
Lincoln veered round? Would the captain put out a boat? Might I hope to be
saved?

The darkness was intense. I caught a glimpse of a black mass disappearing in

the east, its beacon lights dying out in the distance. It was the frigate! I was lost.

"Help, help!" I shouted, swimming towards the Abraham Lincoln in

desperation.
 My clothes encumbered me; they seemed glued to my body, and paralysed
my movements.

I was sinking! I was suffocating!

"Help!"

This was my last cry. My mouth filled with water; I struggled against being
drawn down the abyss. Suddenly my clothes were seized by a strong hand, and I
felt myself quickly drawn up to the surface of the sea; and I heard, yes, I heard
these words pronounced in my ear:

"If master would be so good as to lean on my shoulder, master would swim

with much greater ease."

I seized with one hand my faithful Conseil's arm.

"Is it you?" said I, "you?"

"Myself," answered Conseil; "and waiting master's orders."

"That shock threw you as well as me into the sea?"

"No; but, being in my master's service, I followed him."

The worthy fellow thought that was but natural.

"And the frigate?" I asked.

"The frigate?" replied Conseil, turning on his back; "I think that master had
better not count too much on her."

"You think so?"

"I say that, at the time I threw myself into the sea, I heard the men at the
wheel say, `The screw and the rudder are broken.'

"Broken?"

"Yes, broken by the monster's teeth. It is the only injury the Abraham Lincoln
has sustained. But it is a bad look-out for us—she no longer answers her helm."
 "Then we are lost!"

"Perhaps so," calmly answered Conseil. "However, we have still several

hours before us, and one can do a good deal in some hours."

Conseil's imperturbable coolness set me up again. I swam more vigorously;

but, cramped by my clothes, which stuck to me like a leaden weight, I felt great
difficulty in bearing up. Conseil saw this.

"Will master let me make a slit?" said he; and, slipping an open knife under
my clothes, he ripped them up from top to bottom very rapidly. Then he cleverly
slipped them off me, while I swam for both of us.

Then I did the same for Conseil, and we continued to swim near to each
other.

Nevertheless, our situation was no less terrible. Perhaps our disappearance

had not been noticed; and, if it had been, the frigate could not tack, being
without its helm. Conseil argued on this supposition, and laid his plans
accordingly. This quiet boy was perfectly self-possessed. We then decided that,
as our only chance of safety was being picked up by the Abraham Lincoln's
boats, we ought to manage so as to wait for them as long as possible. I resolved
then to husband our strength, so that both should not be exhausted at the same
time; and this is how we managed: while one of us lay on our back, quite still,
with arms crossed, and legs stretched out, the other would swim and push the
other on in front. This towing business did not last more than ten minutes each;
and relieving each other thus, we could swim on for some hours, perhaps till
day-break. Poor chance! but hope is so firmly rooted in the heart of man!
Moreover, there were two of us. Indeed I declare (though it may seem
improbable) if I sought to destroy all hope—if I wished to despair, I could not.

The collision of the frigate with the cetacean had occurred about eleven
o'clock in the evening before. I reckoned then we should have eight hours to
swim before sunrise, an operation quite practicable if we relieved each other.
The sea, very calm, was in our favour. Sometimes I tried to pierce the intense
darkness that was only dispelled by the phosphorescence caused by our
movements. I watched the luminous waves that broke over my hand, whose
mirror-like surface was spotted with silvery rings. One might have said that we
were in a bath of quicksilver.
 Near one o'clock in the morning, I was seized with dreadful fatigue. My
limbs stiffened under the strain of violent cramp. Conseil was obliged to keep
me up, and our preservation devolved on him alone. I heard the poor boy pant;
his breathing became short and hurried. I found that he could not keep up much
longer.

"Leave me! leave me!" I said to him.

"Leave my master? Never!" replied he. "I would drown first."

Just then the moon appeared through the fringes of a thick cloud that the
wind was driving to the east. The surface of the sea glittered with its rays. This
kindly light reanimated us. My head got better again. I looked at all points of the
horizon. I saw the frigate! She was five miles from us, and looked like a dark
mass, hardly discernible. But no boats!

I would have cried out. But what good would it have been at such a distance!
My swollen lips could utter no sounds. Conseil could articulate some words, and
I heard him repeat at intervals, "Help! help!"

Our movements were suspended for an instant; we listened. It might be only

a singing in the ear, but it seemed to me as if a cry answered the cry from
Conseil.

"Did you hear?" I murmured.

"Yes! Yes!"

And Conseil gave one more despairing cry.

This time there was no mistake! A human voice responded to ours! Was it the
voice of another unfortunate creature, abandoned in the middle of the ocean,
some other victim of the shock sustained by the vessel? Or rather was it a boat
from the frigate, that was hailing us in the darkness?

Conseil made a last effort, and, leaning on my shoulder, while I struck out in
a desperate effort, he raised himself half out of the water, then fell back
exhausted.

"What did you see?"

 "I saw——" murmured he; "I saw—but do not talk—reserve all your
strength!"

What had he seen? Then, I know not why, the thought of the monster came
into my head for the first time! But that voice! The time is past for Jonahs to take
refuge in whales' bellies! However, Conseil was towing me again. He raised his
head sometimes, looked before us, and uttered a cry of recognition, which was
responded to by a voice that came nearer and nearer. I scarcely heard it. My
strength was exhausted; my fingers stiffened; my hand afforded me support no
longer; my mouth, convulsively opening, filled with salt water. Cold crept over
me. I raised my head for the last time, then I sank.

At this moment a hard body struck me. I clung to it: then I felt that I was
being drawn up, that I was brought to the surface of the water, that my chest
collapsed—I fainted.

It is certain that I soon came to, thanks to the vigorous rubbings that I
received. I half opened my eyes.

"Conseil!" I murmured.

"Does master call me?" asked Conseil.

Just then, by the waning light of the moon which was sinking down to the
horizon, I saw a face which was not Conseil's and which I immediately
recognised.

"Ned!" I cried.

"The same, sir, who is seeking his prize!" replied the Canadian.

"Were you thrown into the sea by the shock to the frigate?"

"Yes, Professor; but more fortunate than you, I was able to find a footing
almost directly upon a floating island."

"An island?"

"Or, more correctly speaking, on our gigantic narwhal."

 "Explain yourself, Ned!"

"Only I soon found out why my harpoon had not entered its skin and was
blunted."

"Why, Ned, why?"

"Because, Professor, that beast is made of sheet iron."

The Canadian's last words produced a sudden revolution in my brain. I

wriggled myself quickly to the top of the being, or object, half out of the water,
which served us for a refuge. I kicked it. It was evidently a hard, impenetrable
body, and not the soft substance that forms the bodies of the great marine
mammalia. But this hard body might be a bony covering, like that of the
antediluvian animals; and I should be free to class this monster among
amphibious reptiles, such as tortoises or alligators.

Well, no! the blackish back that supported me was smooth, polished, without
scales. The blow produced a metallic sound; and, incredible though it may be, it
seemed, I might say, as if it was made of riveted plates.

There was no doubt about it! This monster, this natural phenomenon that had
puzzled the learned world, and over thrown and misled the imagination of
seamen of both hemispheres, it must be owned was a still more astonishing
phenomenon, inasmuch as it was a simply human construction.

We had no time to lose, however. We were lying upon the back of a sort of
submarine boat, which appeared (as far as I could judge) like a huge fish of steel.
Ned Land's mind was made up on this point. Conseil and I could only agree with
him.

Just then a bubbling began at the back of this strange thing (which was
evidently propelled by a screw), and it began to move. We had only just time to
seize hold of the upper part, which rose about seven feet out of the water, and
happily its speed was not great.

"As long as it sails horizontally," muttered Ned Land, "I do not mind; but, if it
takes a fancy to dive, I would not give two straws for my life."

The Canadian might have said still less. It became really necessary to
communicate with the beings, whatever they were, shut up inside the machine. I
searched all over the outside for an aperture, a panel, or a manhole, to use a
technical expression; but the lines of the iron rivets, solidly driven into the joints
of the iron plates, were clear and uniform. Besides, the moon disappeared then,
and left us in total darkness.

At last this long night passed. My indistinct remembrance prevents my

describing all the impressions it made. I can only recall one circumstance.
During some lulls of the wind and sea, I fancied I heard several times vague
sounds, a sort of fugitive harmony produced by words of command. What was,
then, the mystery of this submarine craft, of which the whole world vainly
sought an explanation? What kind of beings existed in this strange boat? What
mechanical agent caused its prodigious speed?

Daybreak appeared. The morning mists surrounded us, but they soon cleared
off. I was about to examine the hull, which formed on deck a kind of horizontal
platform, when I felt it gradually sinking.

"Oh! confound it!" cried Ned Land, kicking the resounding plate. "Open, you
inhospitable rascals!"

Happily the sinking movement ceased. Suddenly a noise, like iron works
violently pushed aside, came from the interior of the boat. One iron plate was
moved, a man appeared, uttered an odd cry, and disappeared immediately.

Some moments after, eight strong men, with masked faces, appeared
noiselessly, and drew us down into their formidable machine.

CHAPTER VIII

MOBILIS IN MOBILI

This forcible abduction, so roughly carried out, was accomplished with the
rapidity of lightning. I shivered all over. Whom had we to deal with? No doubt
some new sort of pirates, who explored the sea in their own way. Hardly had the
narrow panel closed upon me, when I was enveloped in darkness. My eyes,
dazzled with the outer light, could distinguish nothing. I felt my naked feet cling
to the rungs of an iron ladder. Ned Land and Conseil, firmly seized, followed
me. At the bottom of the ladder, a door opened, and shut after us immediately
with a bang.

We were alone. Where, I could not say, hardly imagine. All was black, and
such a dense black that, after some minutes, my eyes had not been able to
discern even the faintest glimmer.

Meanwhile, Ned Land, furious at these proceedings, gave free vent to his
indignation.

"Confound it!" cried he, "here are people who come up to the Scotch for
hospitality. They only just miss being cannibals. I should not be surprised at it,
but I declare that they shall not eat me without my protesting."

"Calm yourself, friend Ned, calm yourself," replied Conseil, quietly. "Do not
cry out before you are hurt. We are not quite done for yet."

"Not quite," sharply replied the Canadian, "but pretty near, at all events.
Things look black. Happily, my bowie knife I have still, and I can always see
well enough to use it. The first of these pirates who lays a hand on me——"

"Do not excite yourself, Ned," I said to the harpooner, "and do not
compromise us by useless violence. Who knows that they will not listen to us?
Let us rather try to find out where we are."

I groped about. In five steps I came to an iron wall, made of plates bolted
together. Then turning back I struck against a wooden table, near which were
ranged several stools. The boards of this prison were concealed under a thick
mat, which deadened the noise of the feet. The bare walls revealed no trace of
window or door. Conseil, going round the reverse way, met me, and we went
back to the middle of the cabin, which measured about twenty feet by ten. As to
its height, Ned Land, in spite of his own great height, could not measure it.

Half an hour had already passed without our situation being bettered, when
the dense darkness suddenly gave way to extreme light. Our prison was suddenly
lighted, that is to say, it became filled with a luminous matter, so strong that I
could not bear it at first. In its whiteness and intensity I recognised that electric
light which played round the submarine boat like a magnificent phenomenon of
phosphorescence. After shutting my eyes involuntarily, I opened them, and saw
that this luminous agent came from a half globe, unpolished, placed in the roof
of the cabin.

"At last one can see," cried Ned Land, who, knife in hand, stood on the
defensive.

"Yes," said I; "but we are still in the dark about ourselves."

"Let master have patience," said the imperturbable Conseil.

The sudden lighting of the cabin enabled me to examine it minutely. It only

contained a table and five stools. The invisible door might be hermetically
sealed. No noise was heard. All seemed dead in the interior of this boat. Did it
move, did it float on the surface of the ocean, or did it dive into its depths? I
could not guess.

A noise of bolts was now heard, the door opened, and two men appeared.

One was short, very muscular, broad-shouldered, with robust limbs, strong
head, an abundance of black hair, thick moustache, a quick penetrating look, and
the vivacity which characterises the population of Southern France.

The second stranger merits a more detailed description. I made out his
prevailing qualities directly: self-confidence—because his head was well set on
his shoulders, and his black eyes looked around with cold assurance; calmness—
for his skin, rather pale, showed his coolness of blood; energy—evinced by the
rapid contraction of his lofty brows; and courage—because his deep breathing
denoted great power of lungs.

Whether this person was thirty-five or fifty years of age, I could not say. He
was tall, had a large forehead, straight nose, a clearly cut mouth, beautiful teeth,
with fine taper hands, indicative of a highly nervous temperament. This man was
certainly the most admirable specimen I had ever met. One particular feature
was his eyes, rather far from each other, and which could take in nearly a quarter
of the horizon at once.

This faculty—(I verified it later)—gave him a range of vision far superior to

Ned Land's. When this stranger fixed upon an object, his eyebrows met, his large
eyelids closed around so as to contract the range of his vision, and he looked as
if he magnified the objects lessened by distance, as if he pierced those sheets of
water so opaque to our eyes, and as if he read the very depths of the seas.

The two strangers, with caps made from the fur of the sea otter, and shod with
sea boots of seal's skin, were dressed in clothes of a particular texture, which
allowed free movement of the limbs. The taller of the two, evidently the chief on
board, examined us with great attention, without saying a word; then, turning to
his companion, talked with him in an unknown tongue. It was a sonorous,
harmonious, and flexible dialect, the vowels seeming to admit of very varied
accentuation.

The other replied by a shake of the head, and added two or three perfectly
incomprehensible words. Then he seemed to question me by a look.

I replied in good French that I did not know his language; but he seemed not
to understand me, and my situation became more embarrassing.

"If master were to tell our story," said Conseil, "perhaps these gentlemen may
understand some words."

I began to tell our adventures, articulating each syllable clearly, and without
omitting one single detail. I announced our names and rank, introducing in
person Professor Aronnax, his servant Conseil, and master Ned Land, the
harpooner.

The man with the soft calm eyes listened to me quietly, even politely, and
with extreme attention; but nothing in his countenance indicated that he had
understood my story. When I finished, he said not a word.

There remained one resource, to speak English. Perhaps they would know
this almost universal language. I knew it—as well as the German language—
well enough to read it fluently, but not to speak it correctly. But, anyhow, we
must make ourselves understood.

"Go on in your turn," I said to the harpooner; "speak your best Anglo-Saxon,
and try to do better than I."

Ned did not beg off, and recommenced our story.

 To his great disgust, the harpooner did not seem to have made himself more
intelligible than I had. Our visitors did not stir. They evidently understood
neither the language of England nor of France.

Very much embarrassed, after having vainly exhausted our speaking

resources, I knew not what part to take, when Conseil said:

"If master will permit me, I will relate it in German."

But in spite of the elegant terms and good accent of the narrator, the German
language had no success. At last, nonplussed, I tried to remember my first
lessons, and to narrate our adventures in Latin, but with no better success. This
last attempt being of no avail, the two strangers exchanged some words in their
unknown language, and retired.

The door shut.

"It is an infamous shame," cried Ned Land, who broke out for the twentieth
time. "We speak to those rogues in French, English, German, and Latin, and not
one of them has the politeness to answer!"

"Calm yourself," I said to the impetuous Ned; "anger will do no good."

"But do you see, Professor," replied our irascible companion, "that we shall
absolutely die of hunger in this iron cage?"

"Bah!" said Conseil, philosophically; "we can hold out some time yet."

"My friends," I said, "we must not despair. We have been worse off than this.
Do me the favour to wait a little before forming an opinion upon the commander
and crew of this boat."

"My opinion is formed," replied Ned Land, sharply. "They are rascals."

"Good! and from what country?"

"From the land of rogues!"

"My brave Ned, that country is not clearly indicated on the map of the world;
but I admit that the nationality of the two strangers is hard to determine. Neither
English, French, nor German, that is quite certain. However, I am inclined to
think that the commander and his companion were born in low latitudes. There is
southern blood in them. But I cannot decide by their appearance whether they
are Spaniards, Turks, Arabians, or Indians. As to their language, it is quite
incomprehensible."

"There is the disadvantage of not knowing all languages," said Conseil, "or
the disadvantage of not having one universal language."

As he said these words, the door opened. A steward entered. He brought us

clothes, coats and trousers, made of a stuff I did not know. I hastened to dress
myself, and my companions followed my example. During that time, the steward
—dumb, perhaps deaf—had arranged the table, and laid three plates.

"This is something like!" said Conseil.

"Bah!" said the angry harpooner, "what do you suppose they eat here?
Tortoise liver, filleted shark, and beef steaks from seadogs."

"We shall see," said Conseil.

The dishes, of bell metal, were placed on the table, and we took our places.
Undoubtedly we had to do with civilised people, and, had it not been for the
electric light which flooded us, I could have fancied I was in the dining-room of
the Adelphi Hotel at Liverpool, or at the Grand Hotel in Paris. I must say,
however, that there was neither bread nor wine. The water was fresh and clear,
but it was water and did not suit Ned Land's taste. Amongst the dishes which
were brought to us, I recognised several fish delicately dressed; but of some,
although excellent, I could give no opinion, neither could I tell to what kingdom
they belonged, whether animal or vegetable. As to the dinner-service, it was
elegant, and in perfect taste. Each utensil—spoon, fork, knife, plate—had a letter
engraved on it, with a motto above it, of which this is an exact facsimile:

MOBILIS IN MOBILI N

The letter N was no doubt the initial of the name of the enigmatical person
who commanded at the bottom of the seas.
 Ned and Conseil did not reflect much. They devoured the food, and I did
likewise. I was, besides, reassured as to our fate; and it seemed evident that our
hosts would not let us die of want.

However, everything has an end, everything passes away, even the hunger of
people who have not eaten for fifteen hours. Our appetites satisfied, we felt
overcome with sleep.

"Faith! I shall sleep well," said Conseil.

"So shall I," replied Ned Land.

My two companions stretched themselves on the cabin carpet, and were soon
sound asleep. For my own part, too many thoughts crowded my brain, too many
insoluble questions pressed upon me, too many fancies kept my eyes half open.
Where were we? What strange power carried us on? I felt—or rather fancied I
felt—the machine sinking down to the lowest beds of the sea. Dreadful
nightmares beset me; I saw in these mysterious asylums a world of unknown
animals, amongst which this submarine boat seemed to be of the same kind,
living, moving, and formidable as they. Then my brain grew calmer, my
imagination wandered into vague unconsciousness, and I soon fell into a deep
sleep.

CHAPTER IX

NED LAND'S TEMPERS

How long we slept I do not know; but our sleep must have lasted long, for it
rested us completely from our fatigues. I woke first. My companions had not
moved, and were still stretched in their corner.

Hardly roused from my somewhat hard couch, I felt my brain freed, my mind
clear. I then began an attentive examination of our cell. Nothing was changed
inside. The prison was still a prison—the prisoners, prisoners. However, the
steward, during our sleep, had cleared the table. I breathed with difficulty. The
heavy air seemed to oppress my lungs. Although the cell was large, we had
evidently consumed a great part of the oxygen that it contained. Indeed, each
man consumes, in one hour, the oxygen contained in more than 176 pints of air,
and this air, charged (as then) with a nearly equal quantity of carbonic acid,
becomes unbreathable.

It became necessary to renew the atmosphere of our prison, and no doubt the
whole in the submarine boat. That gave rise to a question in my mind. How
would the commander of this floating dwelling-place proceed? Would he obtain
air by chemical means, in getting by heat the oxygen contained in chlorate of
potash, and in absorbing carbonic acid by caustic potash? Or—a more
convenient, economical, and consequently more probable alternative—would he
be satisfied to rise and take breath at the surface of the water, like a whale, and
so renew for twenty-four hours the atmospheric provision?

In fact, I was already obliged to increase my respirations to eke out of this

cell the little oxygen it contained, when suddenly I was refreshed by a current of
pure air, and perfumed with saline emanations. It was an invigorating sea breeze,
charged with iodine. I opened my mouth wide, and my lungs saturated
themselves with fresh particles.

At the same time I felt the boat rolling. The iron-plated monster had evidently
just risen to the surface of the ocean to breathe, after the fashion of whales. I
found out from that the mode of ventilating the boat.

When I had inhaled this air freely, I sought the conduit pipe, which conveyed
to us the beneficial whiff, and I was not long in finding it. Above the door was a
ventilator, through which volumes of fresh air renewed the impoverished
atmosphere of the cell.

I was making my observations, when Ned and Conseil awoke almost at the
same time, under the influence of this reviving air. They rubbed their eyes,
stretched themselves, and were on their feet in an instant.

"Did master sleep well?" asked Conseil, with his usual politeness.

"Very well, my brave boy. And you, Mr. Land?"

"Soundly, Professor. But, I don't know if I am right or not, there seems to be a

sea breeze!"
 A seaman could not be mistaken, and I told the Canadian all that had passed
during his sleep.

"Good!" said he. "That accounts for those roarings we heard, when the
supposed narwhal sighted the Abraham Lincoln."

"Quite so, Master Land; it was taking breath."

"Only, Mr. Aronnax, I have no idea what o'clock it is, unless it is dinner-
time."

"Dinner-time! my good fellow? Say rather breakfast-time, for we certainly

have begun another day."

"So," said Conseil, "we have slept twenty-four hours?"

"That is my opinion."

"I will not contradict you," replied Ned Land. "But, dinner or breakfast, the
steward will be welcome, whichever he brings."

"Master Land, we must conform to the rules on board, and I suppose our
appetites are in advance of the dinner hour."

"That is just like you, friend Conseil," said Ned, impatiently. "You are never
out of temper, always calm; you would return thanks before grace, and die of
hunger rather than complain!"

Time was getting on, and we were fearfully hungry; and this time the steward
did not appear. It was rather too long to leave us, if they really had good
intentions towards us. Ned Land, tormented by the cravings of hunger, got still
more angry; and, notwithstanding his promise, I dreaded an explosion when he
found himself with one of the crew.

For two hours more Ned Land's temper increased; he cried, he shouted, but in
vain. The walls were deaf. There was no sound to be heard in the boat; all was
still as death. It did not move, for I should have felt the trembling motion of the
hull under the influence of the screw. Plunged in the depths of the waters, it
belonged no longer to earth: this silence was dreadful.
 I felt terrified, Conseil was calm, Ned Land roared.

Just then a noise was heard outside. Steps sounded on the metal flags. The
locks were turned, the door opened, and the steward appeared.

Before I could rush forward to stop him, the Canadian had thrown him down,
and held him by the throat. The steward was choking under the grip of his
powerful hand.

Conseil was already trying to unclasp the harpooner's hand from his half-
suffocated victim, and I was going to fly to the rescue, when suddenly I was
nailed to the spot by hearing these words in French:

"Be quiet, Master Land; and you, Professor, will you be so good as to listen
to me?"

CHAPTER X

THE MAN OF THE SEAS

It was the commander of the vessel who thus spoke.

At these words, Ned Land rose suddenly. The steward, nearly strangled,
tottered out on a sign from his master. But such was the power of the commander
on board, that not a gesture betrayed the resentment which this man must have
felt towards the Canadian. Conseil interested in spite of himself, I stupefied,
awaited in silence the result of this scene.

The commander, leaning against the corner of a table with his arms folded,
scanned us with profound attention. Did he hesitate to speak? Did he regret the
words which he had just spoken in French? One might almost think so.

After some moments of silence, which not one of us dreamed of breaking,

"Gentlemen," said he, in a calm and penetrating voice, "I speak French, English,
German, and Latin equally well. I could, therefore, have answered you at our
first interview, but I wished to know you first, then to reflect. The story told by
each one, entirely agreeing in the main points, convinced me of your identity. I
know now that chance has brought before me M. Pierre Aronnax, Professor of
Natural History at the Museum of Paris, entrusted with a scientific mission
abroad, Conseil, his servant, and Ned Land, of Canadian origin, harpooner on
board the frigate Abraham Lincoln of the navy of the United States of America."

I bowed assent. It was not a question that the commander put to me.
Therefore there was no answer to be made. This man expressed himself with
perfect ease, without any accent. His sentences were well turned, his words clear,
and his fluency of speech remarkable. Yet, I did not recognise in him a fellow-
countryman.

He continued the conversation in these terms:

"You have doubtless thought, sir, that I have delayed long in paying you this
second visit. The reason is that, your identity recognised, I wished to weigh
maturely what part to act towards you. I have hesitated much. Most annoying
circumstances have brought you into the presence of a man who has broken all
the ties of humanity. You have come to trouble my existence."

"Unintentionally!" said I.

"Unintentionally?" replied the stranger, raising his voice a little. "Was it

unintentionally that the Abraham Lincoln pursued me all over the seas? Was it
unintentionally that you took passage in this frigate? Was it unintentionally that
your cannon-balls rebounded off the plating of my vessel? Was it unintentionally
that Mr. Ned Land struck me with his harpoon?"

I detected a restrained irritation in these words. But to these recriminations I

had a very natural answer to make, and I made it.

"Sir," said I, "no doubt you are ignorant of the discussions which have taken
place concerning you in America and Europe. You do not know that divers
accidents, caused by collisions with your submarine machine, have excited
public feeling in the two continents. I omit the theories without number by which
it was sought to explain that of which you alone possess the secret. But you must
understand that, in pursuing you over the high seas of the Pacific, the Abraham
Lincoln believed itself to be chasing some powerful sea-monster, of which it was
necessary to rid the ocean at any price."
 A half-smile curled the lips of the commander: then, in a calmer tone:

"M. Aronnax," he replied, "dare you affirm that your frigate would not as
soon have pursued and cannonaded a submarine boat as a monster?"

This question embarrassed me, for certainly Captain Farragut might not have
hesitated. He might have thought it his duty to destroy a contrivance of this kind,
as he would a gigantic narwhal.

"You understand then, sir," continued the stranger, "that I have the right to
treat you as enemies?"

I answered nothing, purposely. For what good would it be to discuss such a

proposition, when force could destroy the best arguments?

"I have hesitated some time," continued the commander; "nothing obliged me
to show you hospitality. If I chose to separate myself from you, I should have no
interest in seeing you again; I could place you upon the deck of this vessel which
has served you as a refuge, I could sink beneath the waters, and forget that you
had ever existed. Would not that be my right?"

"It might be the right of a savage," I answered, "but not that of a civilised
man."

"Professor," replied the commander, quickly, "I am not what you call a
civilised man! I have done with society entirely, for reasons which I alone have
the right of appreciating. I do not, therefore, obey its laws, and I desire you never
to allude to them before me again!"

This was said plainly. A flash of anger and disdain kindled in the eyes of the
Unknown, and I had a glimpse of a terrible past in the life of this man. Not only
had he put himself beyond the pale of human laws, but he had made himself
independent of them, free in the strictest acceptation of the word, quite beyond
their reach! Who then would dare to pursue him at the bottom of the sea, when,
on its surface, he defied all attempts made against him?

What vessel could resist the shock of his submarine monitor? What cuirass,
however thick, could withstand the blows of his spur? No man could demand
from him an account of his actions; God, if he believed in one—his conscience,
if he had one—were the sole judges to whom he was answerable.
 These reflections crossed my mind rapidly, whilst the stranger personage was
silent, absorbed, and as if wrapped up in himself. I regarded him with fear
mingled with interest, as, doubtless, OEdiphus regarded the Sphinx.

After rather a long silence, the commander resumed the conversation.

"I have hesitated," said he, "but I have thought that my interest might be
reconciled with that pity to which every human being has a right. You will
remain on board my vessel, since fate has cast you there. You will be free; and,
in exchange for this liberty, I shall only impose one single condition. Your word
of honour to submit to it will suffice."

"Speak, sir," I answered. "I suppose this condition is one which a man of
honour may accept?"

"Yes, sir; it is this: It is possible that certain events, unforeseen, may oblige
me to consign you to your cabins for some hours or some days, as the case may
be. As I desire never to use violence, I expect from you, more than all the others,
a passive obedience. In thus acting, I take all the responsibility: I acquit you
entirely, for I make it an impossibility for you to see what ought not to be seen.
Do you accept this condition?"

Then things took place on board which, to say the least, were singular, and
which ought not to be seen by people who were not placed beyond the pale of
social laws. Amongst the surprises which the future was preparing for me, this
might not be the least.

"We accept," I answered; "only I will ask your permission, sir, to address one
question to you—one only."

"Speak, sir."

"You said that we should be free on board."

"Entirely."

"I ask you, then, what you mean by this liberty?"

"Just the liberty to go, to come, to see, to observe even all that passes here
save under rare circumstances—the liberty, in short, which we enjoy ourselves,
my companions and I."

It was evident that we did not understand one another.

"Pardon me, sir," I resumed, "but this liberty is only what every prisoner has
of pacing his prison. It cannot suffice us."

"It must suffice you, however."

"What! we must renounce for ever seeing our country, our friends, our
relations again?"

"Yes, sir. But to renounce that unendurable worldly yoke which men believe
to be liberty is not perhaps so painful as you think."

"Well," exclaimed Ned Land, "never will I give my word of honour not to try
to escape."

"I did not ask you for your word of honour, Master Land," answered the
commander, coldly.

"Sir," I replied, beginning to get angry in spite of my self, "you abuse your
situation towards us; it is cruelty."

"No, sir, it is clemency. You are my prisoners of war. I keep you, when I
could, by a word, plunge you into the depths of the ocean. You attacked me. You
came to surprise a secret which no man in the world must penetrate—the secret
of my whole existence. And you think that I am going to send you back to that
world which must know me no more? Never! In retaining you, it is not you
whom I guard—it is myself."

These words indicated a resolution taken on the part of the commander,

against which no arguments would prevail.

"So, sir," I rejoined, "you give us simply the choice between life and death?"

"Simply."

"My friends," said I, "to a question thus put, there is nothing to answer. But
no word of honour binds us to the master of this vessel."
 "None, sir," answered the Unknown.

Then, in a gentler tone, he continued:

"Now, permit me to finish what I have to say to you. I know you, M.

Aronnax. You and your companions will not, perhaps, have so much to complain
of in the chance which has bound you to my fate. You will find amongst the
books which are my favourite study the work which you have published on `the
depths of the sea.' I have often read it. You have carried out your work as far as
terrestrial science permitted you. But you do not know all—you have not seen
all. Let me tell you then, Professor, that you will not regret the time passed on
board my vessel. You are going to visit the land of marvels."

These words of the commander had a great effect upon me. I cannot deny it.
My weak point was touched; and I forgot, for a moment, that the contemplation
of these sublime subjects was not worth the loss of liberty. Besides, I trusted to
the future to decide this grave question. So I contented myself with saying:

"By what name ought I to address you?"

"Sir," replied the commander, "I am nothing to you but Captain Nemo; and
you and your companions are nothing to me but the passengers of the Nautilus."

Captain Nemo called. A steward appeared. The captain gave him his orders in
that strange language which I did not understand. Then, turning towards the
Canadian and Conseil:

"A repast awaits you in your cabin," said he. "Be so good as to follow this
man.

"And now, M. Aronnax, our breakfast is ready. Permit me to lead the way."

"I am at your service, Captain."

I followed Captain Nemo; and as soon as I had passed through the door, I
found myself in a kind of passage lighted by electricity, similar to the waist of a
ship. After we had proceeded a dozen yards, a second door opened before me.

I then entered a dining-room, decorated and furnished in severe taste. High

oaken sideboards, inlaid with ebony, stood at the two extremities of the room,
and upon their shelves glittered china, porcelain, and glass of inestimable value.
The plate on the table sparkled in the rays which the luminous ceiling shed
around, while the light was tempered and softened by exquisite paintings.

In the centre of the room was a table richly laid out. Captain Nemo indicated
the place I was to occupy.

The breakfast consisted of a certain number of dishes, the contents of which

were furnished by the sea alone; and I was ignorant of the nature and mode of
preparation of some of them. I acknowledged that they were good, but they had a
peculiar flavour, which I easily became accustomed to. These different aliments
appeared to me to be rich in phosphorus, and I thought they must have a marine
origin.

Captain Nemo looked at me. I asked him no questions, but he guessed my

thoughts, and answered of his own accord the questions which I was burning to
address to him.

"The greater part of these dishes are unknown to you," he said to me.
"However, you may partake of them without fear. They are wholesome and
nourishing. For a long time I have renounced the food of the earth, and I am
never ill now. My crew, who are healthy, are fed on the same food."

"So," said I, "all these eatables are the produce of the sea?"

"Yes, Professor, the sea supplies all my wants. Sometimes I cast my nets in
tow, and I draw them in ready to break. Sometimes I hunt in the midst of this
element, which appears to be inaccessible to man, and quarry the game which
dwells in my submarine forests. My flocks, like those of Neptune's old
shepherds, graze fearlessly in the immense prairies of the ocean. I have a vast
property there, which I cultivate myself, and which is always sown by the hand
of the Creator of all things."

"I can understand perfectly, sir, that your nets furnish excellent fish for your
table; I can understand also that you hunt aquatic game in your submarine
forests; but I cannot understand at all how a particle of meat, no matter how
small, can figure in your bill of fare."

"This, which you believe to be meat, Professor, is nothing else than fillet of
turtle. Here are also some dolphins' livers, which you take to be ragout of pork.
My cook is a clever fellow, who excels in dressing these various products of the
ocean. Taste all these dishes. Here is a preserve of sea-cucumber, which a Malay
would declare to be unrivalled in the world; here is a cream, of which the milk
has been furnished by the cetacea, and the sugar by the great fucus of the North
Sea; and, lastly, permit me to offer you some preserve of anemones, which is
equal to that of the most delicious fruits."

I tasted, more from curiosity than as a connoisseur, whilst Captain Nemo

enchanted me with his extraordinary stories.

"You like the sea, Captain?"

"Yes; I love it! The sea is everything. It covers seven tenths of the terrestrial
globe. Its breath is pure and healthy. It is an immense desert, where man is never
lonely, for he feels life stirring on all sides. The sea is only the embodiment of a
supernatural and wonderful existence. It is nothing but love and emotion; it is the
`Living Infinite,' as one of your poets has said. In fact, Professor, Nature
manifests herself in it by her three kingdoms—mineral, vegetable, and animal.
The sea is the vast reservoir of Nature. The globe began with sea, so to speak;
and who knows if it will not end with it? In it is supreme tranquillity. The sea
does not belong to despots. Upon its surface men can still exercise unjust laws,
fight, tear one another to pieces, and be carried away with terrestrial horrors. But
at thirty feet below its level, their reign ceases, their influence is quenched, and
their power disappears. Ah! sir, live—live in the bosom of the waters! There
only is independence! There I recognise no masters! There I am free!"

Captain Nemo suddenly became silent in the midst of this enthusiasm, by

which he was quite carried away. For a few moments he paced up and down,
much agitated. Then he became more calm, regained his accustomed coldness of
expression, and turning towards me:

"Now, Professor," said he, "if you wish to go over the Nautilus, I am at your
service."

Captain Nemo rose. I followed him. A double door, contrived at the back of
the dining-room, opened, and I entered a room equal in dimensions to that which
I had just quitted.

It was a library. High pieces of furniture, of black violet ebony inlaid with
brass, supported upon their wide shelves a great number of books uniformly
bound. They followed the shape of the room, terminating at the lower part in
huge divans, covered with brown leather, which were curved, to afford the
greatest comfort. Light movable desks, made to slide in and out at will, allowed
one to rest one's book while reading. In the centre stood an immense table,
covered with pamphlets, amongst which were some newspapers, already of old
date. The electric light flooded everything; it was shed from four unpolished
globes half sunk in the volutes of the ceiling. I looked with real admiration at
this room, so ingeniously fitted up, and I could scarcely believe my eyes.

"Captain Nemo," said I to my host, who had just thrown himself on one of
the divans, "this is a library which would do honour to more than one of the
continental palaces, and I am absolutely astounded when I consider that it can
follow you to the bottom of the seas."

"Where could one find greater solitude or silence, Professor?" replied Captain
Nemo. "Did your study in the Museum afford you such perfect quiet?"

"No, sir; and I must confess that it is a very poor one after yours. You must
have six or seven thousand volumes here."

"Twelve thousand, M. Aronnax. These are the only ties which bind me to the
earth. But I had done with the world on the day when my Nautilus plunged for
the first time beneath the waters. That day I bought my last volumes, my last
pamphlets, my last papers, and from that time I wish to think that men no longer
think or write. These books, Professor, are at your service besides, and you can
make use of them freely."

I thanked Captain Nemo, and went up to the shelves of the library. Works on
science, morals, and literature abounded in every language; but I did not see one
single work on political economy; that subject appeared to be strictly proscribed.
Strange to say, all these books were irregularly arranged, in whatever language
they were written; and this medley proved that the Captain of the Nautilus must
have read indiscriminately the books which he took up by chance.

"Sir," said I to the Captain, "I thank you for having placed this library at my
disposal. It contains treasures of science, and I shall profit by them."

"This room is not only a library," said Captain Nemo, "it is also a smoking-
room."
 "A smoking-room!" I cried. "Then one may smoke on board?"

"Certainly."

"Then, sir, I am forced to believe that you have kept up a communication

with Havannah."

"Not any," answered the Captain. "Accept this cigar, M. Aronnax; and,
though it does not come from Havannah, you will be pleased with it, if you are a
connoisseur."

I took the cigar which was offered me; its shape recalled the London ones,
but it seemed to be made of leaves of gold. I lighted it at a little brazier, which
was supported upon an elegant bronze stem, and drew the first whiffs with the
delight of a lover of smoking who has not smoked for two days.

"It is excellent, but it is not tobacco."

"No!" answered the Captain, "this tobacco comes neither from Havannah nor
from the East. It is a kind of sea-weed, rich in nicotine, with which the sea
provides me, but somewhat sparingly."

At that moment Captain Nemo opened a door which stood opposite to that by
which I had entered the library, and I passed into an immense drawing-room
splendidly lighted.

It was a vast, four-sided room, thirty feet long, eighteen wide, and fifteen
high. A luminous ceiling, decorated with light arabesques, shed a soft clear light
over all the marvels accumulated in this museum. For it was in fact a museum, in
which an intelligent and prodigal hand had gathered all the treasures of nature
and art, with the artistic confusion which distinguishes a painter's studio.

Thirty first-rate pictures, uniformly framed, separated by bright drapery,

ornamented the walls, which were hung with tapestry of severe design. I saw
works of great value, the greater part of which I had admired in the special
collections of Europe, and in the exhibitions of paintings. The several schools of
the old masters were represented by a Madonna of Raphael, a Virgin of
Leonardo da Vinci, a nymph of Corregio, a woman of Titan, an Adoration of
Veronese, an Assumption of Murillo, a portrait of Holbein, a monk of Velasquez,
a martyr of Ribera, a fair of Rubens, two Flemish landscapes of Teniers, three
little "genre" pictures of Gerard Dow, Metsu, and Paul Potter, two specimens of
Gericault and Prudhon, and some sea-pieces of Backhuysen and Vernet.
Amongst the works of modern painters were pictures with the signatures of
Delacroix, Ingres, Decamps, Troyon, Meissonier, Daubigny, etc.; and some
admirable statues in marble and bronze, after the finest antique models, stood
upon pedestals in the corners of this magnificent museum. Amazement, as the
Captain of the Nautilus had predicted, had already begun to take possession of
me.

"Professor," said this strange man, "you must excuse the unceremonious way
in which I receive you, and the disorder of this room."

"Sir," I answered, "without seeking to know who you are, I recognise in you
an artist."

"An amateur, nothing more, sir. Formerly I loved to collect these beautiful
works created by the hand of man. I sought them greedily, and ferreted them out
indefatigably, and I have been able to bring together some objects of great value.
These are my last souvenirs of that world which is dead to me. In my eyes, your
modern artists are already old; they have two or three thousand years of
existence; I confound them in my own mind. Masters have no age."

"And these musicians?" said I, pointing out some works of Weber, Rossini,
Mozart, Beethoven, Haydn, Meyerbeer, Herold, Wagner, Auber, Gounod, and a
number of others, scattered over a large model piano-organ which occupied one
of the panels of the drawing-room.

"These musicians," replied Captain Nemo, "are the contemporaries of

Orpheus; for in the memory of the dead all chronological differences are effaced;
and I am dead, Professor; as much dead as those of your friends who are
sleeping six feet under the earth!"

Captain Nemo was silent, and seemed lost in a profound reverie. I

contemplated him with deep interest, analysing in silence the strange expression
of his countenance. Leaning on his elbow against an angle of a costly mosaic
table, he no longer saw me,—he had forgotten my presence.

I did not disturb this reverie, and continued my observation of the curiosities
which enriched this drawing-room.
 Under elegant glass cases, fixed by copper rivets, were classed and labelled
the most precious productions of the sea which had ever been presented to the
eye of a naturalist. My delight as a professor may be conceived.

The division containing the zoophytes presented the most curious specimens
of the two groups of polypi and echinodermes. In the first group, the tubipores,
were gorgones arranged like a fan, soft sponges of Syria, ises of the Moluccas,
pennatules, an admirable virgularia of the Norwegian seas, variegated
unbellulairae, alcyonariae, a whole series of madrepores, which my master
Milne Edwards has so cleverly classified, amongst which I remarked some
wonderful flabellinae oculinae of the Island of Bourbon, the "Neptune's car" of
the Antilles, superb varieties of corals—in short, every species of those curious
polypi of which entire islands are formed, which will one day become
continents. Of the echinodermes, remarkable for their coating of spines, asteri,
sea-stars, pantacrinae, comatules, asterophons, echini, holothuri, etc.,
represented individually a complete collection of this group.

A somewhat nervous conchyliologist would certainly have fainted before

other more numerous cases, in which were classified the specimens of molluscs.
It was a collection of inestimable value, which time fails me to describe
minutely. Amongst these specimens I will quote from memory only the elegant
royal hammer-fish of the Indian Ocean, whose regular white spots stood out
brightly on a red and brown ground, an imperial spondyle, bright-coloured,
bristling with spines, a rare specimen in the European museums—(I estimated its
value at not less than L1000); a common hammer-fish of the seas of New
Holland, which is only procured with difficulty; exotic buccardia of Senegal;
fragile white bivalve shells, which a breath might shatter like a soap-bubble;
several varieties of the aspirgillum of Java, a kind of calcareous tube, edged with
leafy folds, and much debated by amateurs; a whole series of trochi, some a
greenish-yellow, found in the American seas, others a reddish-brown, natives of
Australian waters; others from the Gulf of Mexico, remarkable for their
imbricated shell; stellari found in the Southern Seas; and last, the rarest of all,
the magnificent spur of New Zealand; and every description of delicate and
fragile shells to which science has given appropriate names.

Apart, in separate compartments, were spread out chaplets of pearls of the

greatest beauty, which reflected the electric light in little sparks of fire; pink
pearls, torn from the pinna-marina of the Red Sea; green pearls of the haliotyde
iris; yellow, blue and black pearls, the curious productions of the divers molluscs
of every ocean, and certain mussels of the water-courses of the North; lastly,
several specimens of inestimable value which had been gathered from the rarest
pintadines. Some of these pearls were larger than a pigeon's egg, and were worth
as much, and more than that which the traveller Tavernier sold to the Shah of
Persia for three millions, and surpassed the one in the possession of the Imaum
of Muscat, which I had believed to be unrivalled in the world.

Therefore, to estimate the value of this collection was simply impossible.

Captain Nemo must have expended millions in the acquirement of these various
specimens, and I was thinking what source he could have drawn from, to have
been able thus to gratify his fancy for collecting, when I was interrupted by these
words:

"You are examining my shells, Professor? Unquestionably they must be

interesting to a naturalist; but for me they have a far greater charm, for I have
collected them all with my own hand, and there is not a sea on the face of the
globe which has escaped my researches."

"I can understand, Captain, the delight of wandering about in the midst of
such riches. You are one of those who have collected their treasures themselves.
No museum in Europe possesses such a collection of the produce of the ocean.
But if I exhaust all my admiration upon it, I shall have none left for the vessel
which carries it. I do not wish to pry into your secrets: but I must confess that
this Nautilus, with the motive power which is confined in it, the contrivances
which enable it to be worked, the powerful agent which propels it, all excite my
curiosity to the highest pitch. I see suspended on the walls of this room
instruments of whose use I am ignorant."

"You will find these same instruments in my own room, Professor, where I
shall have much pleasure in explaining their use to you. But first come and
inspect the cabin which is set apart for your own use. You must see how you will
be accommodated on board the Nautilus."

I followed Captain Nemo who, by one of the doors opening from each panel
of the drawing-room, regained the waist. He conducted me towards the bow, and
there I found, not a cabin, but an elegant room, with a bed, dressing-table, and
several other pieces of excellent furniture.

I could only thank my host.

 "Your room adjoins mine," said he, opening a door, "and mine opens into the
drawing-room that we have just quitted."

I entered the Captain's room: it had a severe, almost a monkish aspect. A

small iron bedstead, a table, some articles for the toilet; the whole lighted by a
skylight. No comforts, the strictest necessaries only.

Captain Nemo pointed to a seat.

"Be so good as to sit down," he said. I seated myself, and he began thus:

CHAPTER XI

ALL BY ELECTRICITY

"Sir," said Captain Nemo, showing me the instruments hanging on the walls
of his room, "here are the contrivances required for the navigation of the
Nautilus. Here, as in the drawing-room, I have them always under my eyes, and
they indicate my position and exact direction in the middle of the ocean. Some
are known to you, such as the thermometer, which gives the internal temperature
of the Nautilus; the barometer, which indicates the weight of the air and foretells
the changes of the weather; the hygrometer, which marks the dryness of the
atmosphere; the storm-glass, the contents of which, by decomposing, announce
the approach of tempests; the compass, which guides my course; the sextant,
which shows the latitude by the altitude of the sun; chronometers, by which I
calculate the longitude; and glasses for day and night, which I use to examine the
points of the horizon, when the Nautilus rises to the surface of the waves."

"These are the usual nautical instruments," I replied, "and I know the use of
them. But these others, no doubt, answer to the particular requirements of the
Nautilus. This dial with movable needle is a manometer, is it not?"

"It is actually a manometer. But by communication with the water, whose

external pressure it indicates, it gives our depth at the same time."
 "And these other instruments, the use of which I cannot guess?"

"Here, Professor, I ought to give you some explanations. Will you be kind
enough to listen to me?"

He was silent for a few moments, then he said:

"There is a powerful agent, obedient, rapid, easy, which conforms to every

use, and reigns supreme on board my vessel. Everything is done by means of it.
It lights, warms it, and is the soul of my mechanical apparatus. This agent is
electricity."

"Electricity?" I cried in surprise.

"Yes, sir."

"Nevertheless, Captain, you possess an extreme rapidity of movement, which

does not agree well with the power of electricity. Until now, its dynamic force
has remained under restraint, and has only been able to produce a small amount
of power."

"Professor," said Captain Nemo, "my electricity is not everybody's. You

know what sea-water is composed of. In a thousand grammes are found 96 1/2
per cent. of water, and about 2 2/3 per cent. of chloride of sodium; then, in a
smaller quantity, chlorides of magnesium and of potassium, bromide of
magnesium, sulphate of magnesia, sulphate and carbonate of lime. You see, then,
that chloride of sodium forms a large part of it. So it is this sodium that I extract
from the sea-water, and of which I compose my ingredients. I owe all to the
ocean; it produces electricity, and electricity gives heat, light, motion, and, in a
word, life to the Nautilus."

"But not the air you breathe?"

"Oh! I could manufacture the air necessary for my consumption, but it is

useless, because I go up to the surface of the water when I please. However, if
electricity does not furnish me with air to breathe, it works at least the powerful
pumps that are stored in spacious reservoirs, and which enable me to prolong at
need, and as long as I will, my stay in the depths of the sea. It gives a uniform
and unintermittent light, which the sun does not. Now look at this clock; it is
electrical, and goes with a regularity that defies the best chronometers. I have
divided it into twenty-four hours, like the Italian clocks, because for me there is
neither night nor day, sun nor moon, but only that factitious light that I take with
me to the bottom of the sea. Look! just now, it is ten o'clock in the morning."

"Exactly."

"Another application of electricity. This dial hanging in front of us indicates

the speed of the Nautilus. An electric thread puts it in communication with the
screw, and the needle indicates the real speed. Look! now we are spinning along
with a uniform speed of fifteen miles an hour."

"It is marvelous! And I see, Captain, you were right to make use of this agent
that takes the place of wind, water, and steam."

"We have not finished, M. Aronnax," said Captain Nemo, rising. "If you will
allow me, we will examine the stern of the Nautilus."

Really, I knew already the anterior part of this submarine boat, of which this
is the exact division, starting from the ship's head: the dining-room, five yards
long, separated from the library by a water-tight partition; the library, five yards
long; the large drawing-room, ten yards long, separated from the Captain's room
by a second water-tight partition; the said room, five yards in length; mine, two
and a half yards; and, lastly a reservoir of air, seven and a half yards, that
extended to the bows. Total length thirty five yards, or one hundred and five feet.
The partitions had doors that were shut hermetically by means of india-rubber
instruments, and they ensured the safety of the Nautilus in case of a leak.

I followed Captain Nemo through the waist, and arrived at the centre of the
boat. There was a sort of well that opened between two partitions. An iron
ladder, fastened with an iron hook to the partition, led to the upper end. I asked
the Captain what the ladder was used for.

"It leads to the small boat," he said.

"What! have you a boat?" I exclaimed, in surprise.

"Of course; an excellent vessel, light and insubmersible, that serves either as
a fishing or as a pleasure boat."

"But then, when you wish to embark, you are obliged to come to the surface
of the water?"

"Not at all. This boat is attached to the upper part of the hull of the Nautilus,
and occupies a cavity made for it. It is decked, quite water-tight, and held
together by solid bolts. This ladder leads to a man-hole made in the hull of the
Nautilus, that corresponds with a similar hole made in the side of the boat. By
this double opening I get into the small vessel. They shut the one belonging to
the Nautilus; I shut the other by means of screw pressure. I undo the bolts, and
the little boat goes up to the surface of the sea with prodigious rapidity. I then
open the panel of the bridge, carefully shut till then; I mast it, hoist my sail, take
my oars, and I'm off."

"But how do you get back on board?"

"I do not come back, M. Aronnax; the Nautilus comes to me."

"By your orders?"

"By my orders. An electric thread connects us. I telegraph to it, and that is
enough."

"Really," I said, astonished at these marvels, "nothing can be more simple."

After having passed by the cage of the staircase that led to the platform, I saw
a cabin six feet long, in which Conseil and Ned Land, enchanted with their
repast, were devouring it with avidity. Then a door opened into a kitchen nine
feet long, situated between the large store-rooms. There electricity, better than
gas itself, did all the cooking. The streams under the furnaces gave out to the
sponges of platina a heat which was regularly kept up and distributed. They also
heated a distilling apparatus, which, by evaporation, furnished excellent
drinkable water. Near this kitchen was a bathroom comfortably furnished, with
hot and cold water taps.

Next to the kitchen was the berth-room of the vessel, sixteen feet long. But
the door was shut, and I could not see the management of it, which might have
given me an idea of the number of men employed on board the Nautilus.

At the bottom was a fourth partition that separated this office from the
engine-room. A door opened, and I found myself in the compartment where
Captain Nemo—certainly an engineer of a very high order—had arranged his
locomotive machinery. This engine-room, clearly lighted, did not measure less
than sixty-five feet in length. It was divided into two parts; the first contained the
materials for producing electricity, and the second the machinery that connected
it with the screw. I examined it with great interest, in order to understand the
machinery of the Nautilus.

"You see," said the Captain, "I use Bunsen's contrivances, not Ruhmkorff's.
Those would not have been powerful enough. Bunsen's are fewer in number, but
strong and large, which experience proves to be the best. The electricity
produced passes forward, where it works, by electro-magnets of great size, on a
system of levers and cog-wheels that transmit the movement to the axle of the
screw. This one, the diameter of which is nineteen feet, and the thread twenty-
three feet, performs about 120 revolutions in a second."

"And you get then?"

"A speed of fifty miles an hour."

"I have seen the Nautilus manoeuvre before the Abraham Lincoln, and I have
my own ideas as to its speed. But this is not enough. We must see where we go.
We must be able to direct it to the right, to the left, above, below. How do you
get to the great depths, where you find an increasing resistance, which is rated by
hundreds of atmospheres? How do you return to the surface of the ocean? And
how do you maintain yourselves in the requisite medium? Am I asking too
much?"

"Not at all, Professor," replied the Captain, with some hesitation; "since you
may never leave this submarine boat. Come into the saloon, it is our usual study,
and there you will learn all you want to know about the Nautilus."
 CHAPTER XII

SOME FIGURES

A moment after we were seated on a divan in the saloon smoking. The

Captain showed me a sketch that gave the plan, section, and elevation of the
Nautilus. Then he began his description in these words:

"Here, M. Aronnax, are the several dimensions of the boat you are in. It is an
elongated cylinder with conical ends. It is very like a cigar in shape, a shape
already adopted in London in several constructions of the same sort. The length
of this cylinder, from stem to stern, is exactly 232 feet, and its maximum breadth
is twenty-six feet. It is not built quite like your long-voyage steamers, but its
lines are sufficiently long, and its curves prolonged enough, to allow the water to
slide off easily, and oppose no obstacle to its passage. These two dimensions
enable you to obtain by a simple calculation the surface and cubic contents of the
Nautilus. Its area measures 6,032 feet; and its contents about 1,500 cubic yards;
that is to say, when completely immersed it displaces 50,000 feet of water, or
weighs 1,500 tons.

"When I made the plans for this submarine vessel, I meant that nine-tenths
should be submerged: consequently it ought only to displace nine-tenths of its
bulk, that is to say, only to weigh that number of tons. I ought not, therefore, to
have exceeded that weight, constructing it on the aforesaid dimensions.

"The Nautilus is composed of two hulls, one inside, the other outside, joined
by T-shaped irons, which render it very strong. Indeed, owing to this cellular
arrangement it resists like a block, as if it were solid. Its sides cannot yield; it
coheres spontaneously, and not by the closeness of its rivets; and its perfect
union of the materials enables it to defy the roughest seas.

"These two hulls are composed of steel plates, whose density is from .7 to .8
that of water. The first is not less than two inches and a half thick and weighs
394 tons. The second envelope, the keel, twenty inches high and ten thick,
weighs only sixty-two tons. The engine, the ballast, the several accessories and
apparatus appendages, the partitions and bulkheads, weigh 961.62 tons. Do you
follow all this?"
 "I do."

"Then, when the Nautilus is afloat under these circumstances, one-tenth is out
of the water. Now, if I have made reservoirs of a size equal to this tenth, or
capable of holding 150 tons, and if I fill them with water, the boat, weighing then
1,507 tons, will be completely immersed. That would happen, Professor. These
reservoirs are in the lower part of the Nautilus. I turn on taps and they fill, and
the vessel sinks that had just been level with the surface."

"Well, Captain, but now we come to the real difficulty. I can understand your
rising to the surface; but, diving below the surface, does not your submarine
contrivance encounter a pressure, and consequently undergo an upward thrust of
one atmosphere for every thirty feet of water, just about fifteen pounds per
square inch?"

"Just so, sir."

"Then, unless you quite fill the Nautilus, I do not see how you can draw it
down to those depths."

"Professor, you must not confound statics with dynamics or you will be
exposed to grave errors. There is very little labour spent in attaining the lower
regions of the ocean, for all bodies have a tendency to sink. When I wanted to
find out the necessary increase of weight required to sink the Nautilus, I had
only to calculate the reduction of volume that sea-water acquires according to
the depth."

"That is evident."

"Now, if water is not absolutely incompressible, it is at least capable of very

slight compression. Indeed, after the most recent calculations this reduction is
only .000436 of an atmosphere for each thirty feet of depth. If we want to sink
3,000 feet, I should keep account of the reduction of bulk under a pressure equal
to that of a column of water of a thousand feet. The calculation is easily verified.
Now, I have supplementary reservoirs capable of holding a hundred tons.
Therefore I can sink to a considerable depth. When I wish to rise to the level of
the sea, I only let off the water, and empty all the reservoirs if I want the
Nautilus to emerge from the tenth part of her total capacity."

I had nothing to object to these reasonings.

 "I admit your calculations, Captain," I replied; "I should be wrong to dispute
them since daily experience confirms them; but I foresee a real difficulty in the
way."

"What, sir?"

"When you are about 1,000 feet deep, the walls of the Nautilus bear a
pressure of 100 atmospheres. If, then, just now you were to empty the
supplementary reservoirs, to lighten the vessel, and to go up to the surface, the
pumps must overcome the pressure of 100 atmospheres, which is 1,500 lbs. per
square inch. From that a power——"

"That electricity alone can give," said the Captain, hastily. "I repeat, sir, that
the dynamic power of my engines is almost infinite. The pumps of the Nautilus
have an enormous power, as you must have observed when their jets of water
burst like a torrent upon the Abraham Lincoln. Besides, I use subsidiary
reservoirs only to attain a mean depth of 750 to 1,000 fathoms, and that with a
view of managing my machines. Also, when I have a mind to visit the depths of
the ocean five or six mlles below the surface, I make use of slower but not less
infallible means."

"What are they, Captain?"

"That involves my telling you how the Nautilus is worked."

"I am impatient to learn."

"To steer this boat to starboard or port, to turn, in a word, following a

horizontal plan, I use an ordinary rudder fixed on the back of the stern-post, and
with one wheel and some tackle to steer by. But I can also make the Nautilus rise
and sink, and sink and rise, by a vertical movement by means of two inclined
planes fastened to its sides, opposite the centre of flotation, planes that move in
every direction, and that are worked by powerful levers from the interior. If the
planes are kept parallel with the boat, it moves horizontally. If slanted, the
Nautilus, according to this inclination, and under the influence of the screw,
either sinks diagonally or rises diagonally as it suits me. And even if I wish to
rise more quickly to the surface, I ship the screw, and the pressure of the water
causes the Nautilus to rise vertically like a balloon filled with hydrogen."

"Bravo, Captain! But how can the steersman follow the route in the middle of
the waters?"

"The steersman is placed in a glazed box, that is raised about the hull of the
Nautilus, and furnished with lenses."

"Are these lenses capable of resisting such pressure?"

"Perfectly. Glass, which breaks at a blow, is, nevertheless, capable of offering

considerable resistance. During some experiments of fishing by electric light in
1864 in the Northern Seas, we saw plates less than a third of an inch thick resist
a pressure of sixteen atmospheres. Now, the glass that I use is not less than thirty
times thicker."

"Granted. But, after all, in order to see, the light must exceed the darkness,
and in the midst of the darkness in the water, how can you see?"

"Behind the steersman's cage is placed a powerful electric reflector, the rays
from which light up the sea for half a mile in front."

"Ah! bravo, bravo, Captain! Now I can account for this phosphorescence in
the supposed narwhal that puzzled us so. I now ask you if the boarding of the
Nautilus and of the Scotia, that has made such a noise, has been the result of a
chance rencontre?"

"Quite accidental, sir. I was sailing only one fathom below the surface of the
water when the shock came. It had no bad result."

"None, sir. But now, about your rencontre with the Abraham Lincoln?"

"Professor, I am sorry for one of the best vessels in the American navy; but
they attacked me, and I was bound to defend myself. I contented myself,
however, with putting the frigate hors de combat; she will not have any difficulty
in getting repaired at the next port."

"Ah, Commander! your Nautilus is certainly a marvellous boat."

"Yes, Professor; and I love it as if it were part of myself. If danger threatens

one of your vessels on the ocean, the first impression is the feeling of an abyss
above and below. On the Nautilus men's hearts never fail them. No defects to be
afraid of, for the double shell is as firm as iron; no rigging to attend to; no sails
for the wind to carry away; no boilers to burst; no fire to fear, for the vessel is
made of iron, not of wood; no coal to run short, for electricity is the only
mechanical agent; no collision to fear, for it alone swims in deep water; no
tempest to brave, for when it dives below the water it reaches absolute
tranquillity. There, sir! that is the perfection of vessels! And if it is true that the
engineer has more confidence in the vessel than the builder, and the builder than
the captain himself, you understand the trust I repose in my Nautilus; for I am at
once captain, builder, and engineer."

"But how could you construct this wonderful Nautilus in secret?"

"Each separate portion, M. Aronnax, was brought from different parts of the
globe."

"But these parts had to be put together and arranged?"

"Professor, I had set up my workshops upon a desert island in the ocean.

There my workmen, that is to say, the brave men that I instructed and educated,
and myself have put together our Nautilus. Then, when the work was finished,
fire destroyed all trace of our proceedings on this island, that I could have
jumped over if I had liked."

"Then the cost of this vessel is great?"

"M. Aronnax, an iron vessel costs L145 per ton. Now the Nautilus weighed
1,500. It came therefore to L67,500, and L80,000 more for fitting it up, and
about L200,000, with the works of art and the collections it contains."

"One last question, Captain Nemo."

"Ask it, Professor."

"You are rich?"

"Immensely rich, sir; and I could, without missing it, pay the national debt of
France."

I stared at the singular person who spoke thus. Was he playing upon my
credulity? The future would decide that.
 CHAPTER XIII

THE BLACK RIVER

The portion of the terrestrial globe which is covered by water is estimated at

upwards of eighty millions of acres. This fluid mass comprises two billions two
hundred and fifty millions of cubic miles, forming a spherical body of a diameter
of sixty leagues, the weight of which would be three quintillions of tons. To
comprehend the meaning of these figures, it is necessary to observe that a
quintillion is to a billion as a billion is to unity; in other words, there are as many
billions in a quintillion as there are units in a billion. This mass of fluid is equal
to about the quantity of water which would be discharged by all the rivers of the
earth in forty thousand years.

During the geological epochs the ocean originally prevailed everywhere.

Then by degrees, in the silurian period, the tops of the mountains began to
appear, the islands emerged, then disappeared in partial deluges, reappeared,
became settled, formed continents, till at length the earth became geographically
arranged, as we see in the present day. The solid had wrested from the liquid
thirty-seven million six hundred and fifty-seven square miles, equal to twelve
billions nine hundred and sixty millions of acres.

The shape of continents allows us to divide the waters into five great
portions: the Arctic or Frozen Ocean, the Antarctic, or Frozen Ocean, the Indian,
the Atlantic, and the Pacific Oceans.

The Pacific Ocean extends from north to south between the two Polar Circles,
and from east to west between Asia and America, over an extent of 145 degrees
of longitude. It is the quietest of seas; its currents are broad and slow, it has
medium tides, and abundant rain. Such was the ocean that my fate destined me
first to travel over under these strange conditions.

"Sir," said Captain Nemo, "we will, if you please, take our bearings and fix
the starting-point of this voyage. It is a quarter to twelve; I will go up again to
the surface."
 The Captain pressed an electric clock three times. The pumps began to drive
the water from the tanks; the needle of the manometer marked by a different
pressure the ascent of the Nautilus, then it stopped.

"We have arrived," said the Captain.

I went to the central staircase which opened on to the platform, clambered up

the iron steps, and found myself on the upper part of the Nautilus.

The platform was only three feet out of water. The front and back of the
Nautilus was of that spindle-shape which caused it justly to be compared to a
cigar. I noticed that its iron plates, slightly overlaying each other, resembled the
shell which clothes the bodies of our large terrestrial reptiles. It explained to me
how natural it was, in spite of all glasses, that this boat should have been taken
for a marine animal.

Toward the middle of the platform the longboat, half buried in the hull of the
vessel, formed a slight excrescence. Fore and aft rose two cages of medium
height with inclined sides, and partly closed by thick lenticular glasses; one
destined for the steersman who directed the Nautilus, the other containing a
brilliant lantern to give light on the road.

The sea was beautiful, the sky pure. Scarcely could the long vehicle feel the
broad undulations of the ocean. A light breeze from the east rippled the surface
of the waters. The horizon, free from fog, made observation easy. Nothing was in
sight. Not a quicksand, not an island. A vast desert.

Captain Nemo, by the help of his sextant, took the altitude of the sun, which
ought also to give the latitude. He waited for some moments till its disc touched
the horizon. Whilst taking observations not a muscle moved, the instrument
could not have been more motionless in a hand of marble.

"Twelve o'clock, sir," said he. "When you like——"

I cast a last look upon the sea, slightly yellowed by the Japanese coast, and
descended to the saloon.

"And now, sir, I leave you to your studies," added the Captain; "our course is
E.N.E., our depth is twenty-six fathoms. Here are maps on a large scale by which
you may follow it. The saloon is at your disposal, and, with your permission, I
will retire." Captain Nemo bowed, and I remained alone, lost in thoughts all
bearing on the commander of the Nautilus.

For a whole hour was I deep in these reflections, seeking to pierce this
mystery so interesting to me. Then my eyes fell upon the vast planisphere spread
upon the table, and I placed my finger on the very spot where the given latitude
and longitude crossed.

The sea has its large rivers like the continents. They are special currents
known by their temperature and their colour. The most remarkable of these is
known by the name of the Gulf Stream. Science has decided on the globe the
direction of five principal currents: one in the North Atlantic, a second in the
South, a third in the North Pacific, a fourth in the South, and a fifth in the
Southern Indian Ocean. It is even probable that a sixth current existed at one
time or another in the Northern Indian Ocean, when the Caspian and Aral Seas
formed but one vast sheet of water.

At this point indicated on the planisphere one of these currents was rolling,
the Kuro-Scivo of the Japanese, the Black River, which, leaving the Gulf of
Bengal, where it is warmed by the perpendicular rays of a tropical sun, crosses
the Straits of Malacca along the coast of Asia, turns into the North Pacific to the
Aleutian Islands, carrying with it trunks of camphor-trees and other indigenous
productions, and edging the waves of the ocean with the pure indigo of its warm
water. It was this current that the Nautilus was to follow. I followed it with my
eye; saw it lose itself in the vastness of the Pacific, and felt myself drawn with it,
when Ned Land and Conseil appeared at the door of the saloon.

My two brave companions remained petrified at the sight of the wonders

spread before them.

"Where are we, where are we?" exclaimed the Canadian. "In the museum at
Quebec?"

"My friends," I answered, making a sign for them to enter, "you are not in
Canada, but on board the Nautilus, fifty yards below the level of the sea."

"But, M. Aronnax," said Ned Land, "can you tell me how many men there are
on board? Ten, twenty, fifty, a hundred?"

"I cannot answer you, Mr. Land; it is better to abandon for a time all idea of
seizing the Nautilus or escaping from it. This ship is a masterpiece of modern
industry, and I should be sorry not to have seen it. Many people would accept the
situation forced upon us, if only to move amongst such wonders. So be quiet and
let us try and see what passes around us."

"See!" exclaimed the harpooner, "but we can see nothing in this iron prison!
We are walking—we are sailing—blindly."

Ned Land had scarcely pronounced these words when all was suddenly
darkness. The luminous ceiling was gone, and so rapidly that my eyes received a
painful impression.

We remained mute, not stirring, and not knowing what surprise awaited us,
whether agreeable or disagreeable. A sliding noise was heard: one would have
said that panels were working at the sides of the Nautilus.

"It is the end of the end!" said Ned Land.

Suddenly light broke at each side of the saloon, through two oblong
openings. The liquid mass appeared vividly lit up by the electric gleam. Two
crystal plates separated us from the sea. At first I trembled at the thought that
this frail partition might break, but strong bands of copper bound them, giving an
almost infinite power of resistance.

The sea was distinctly visible for a mile all round the Nautilus. What a
spectacle! What pen can describe it? Who could paint the effects of the light
through those transparent sheets of water, and the softness of the successive
gradations from the lower to the superior strata of the ocean?

We know the transparency of the sea and that its clearness is far beyond that
of rock-water. The mineral and organic substances which it holds in suspension
heightens its transparency. In certain parts of the ocean at the Antilles, under
seventy-five fathoms of water, can be seen with surprising clearness a bed of
sand. The penetrating power of the solar rays does not seem to cease for a depth
of one hundred and fifty fathoms. But in this middle fluid travelled over by the
Nautilus, the electric brightness was produced even in the bosom of the waves. It
was no longer luminous water, but liquid light.

On each side a window opened into this unexplored abyss. The obscurity of
the saloon showed to advantage the brightness outside, and we looked out as if
this pure crystal had been the glass of an immense aquarium.

"You wished to see, friend Ned; well, you see now."

"Curious! curious!" muttered the Canadian, who, forgetting his ill-temper,

seemed to submit to some irresistible attraction; "and one would come further
than this to admire such a sight!"

"Ah!" thought I to myself, "I understand the life of this man; he has made a
world apart for himself, in which he treasures all his greatest wonders."

For two whole hours an aquatic army escorted the Nautilus. During their
games, their bounds, while rivalling each other in beauty, brightness, and
velocity, I distinguished the green labre; the banded mullet, marked by a double
line of black; the round-tailed goby, of a white colour, with violet spots on the
back; the Japanese scombrus, a beautiful mackerel of these seas, with a blue
body and silvery head; the brilliant azurors, whose name alone defies
description; some banded spares, with variegated fins of blue and yellow; the
woodcocks of the seas, some specimens of which attain a yard in length;
Japanese salamanders, spider lampreys, serpents six feet long, with eyes small
and lively, and a huge mouth bristling with teeth; with many other species.

Our imagination was kept at its height, interjections followed quickly on each
other. Ned named the fish, and Conseil classed them. I was in ecstasies with the
vivacity of their movements and the beauty of their forms. Never had it been
given to me to surprise these animals, alive and at liberty, in their natural
element. I will not mention all the varieties which passed before my dazzled
eyes, all the collection of the seas of China and Japan. These fish, more
numerous than the birds of the air, came, attracted, no doubt, by the brilliant
focus of the electric light.

Suddenly there was daylight in the saloon, the iron panels closed again, and
the enchanting vision disappeared. But for a long time I dreamt on, till my eyes
fell on the instruments hanging on the partition. The compass still showed the
course to be E.N.E., the manometer indicated a pressure of five atmospheres,
equivalent to a depth of twenty five fathoms, and the electric log gave a speed of
fifteen miles an hour. I expected Captain Nemo, but he did not appear. The clock
marked the hour of five.

Ned Land and Conseil returned to their cabin, and I retired to my chamber.
My dinner was ready. It was composed of turtle soup made of the most delicate
hawks bills, of a surmullet served with puff paste (the liver of which, prepared
by itself, was most delicious), and fillets of the emperor-holocanthus, the savour
of which seemed to me superior even to salmon.

I passed the evening reading, writing, and thinking. Then sleep overpowered
me, and I stretched myself on my couch of zostera, and slept profoundly, whilst
the Nautilus was gliding rapidly through the current of the Black River.

CHAPTER XIV

A NOTE OF INVITATION

The next day was the 9th of November. I awoke after a long sleep of twelve
hours. Conseil came, according to custom, to know "how I passed the night," and
to offer his services. He had left his friend the Canadian sleeping like a man who
had never done anything else all his life. I let the worthy fellow chatter as he
pleased, without caring to answer him. I was preoccupied by the absence of the
Captain during our sitting of the day before, and hoping to see him to-day.

As soon as I was dressed I went into the saloon. It was deserted. I plunged
into the study of the shell treasures hidden behind the glasses.

The whole day passed without my being honoured by a visit from Captain
Nemo. The panels of the saloon did not open. Perhaps they did not wish us to
tire of these beautiful things.

The course of the Nautilus was E.N.E., her speed twelve knots, the depth
below the surface between twenty-five and thirty fathoms.

The next day, 10th of November, the same desertion, the same solitude. I did
not see one of the ship's crew: Ned and Conseil spent the greater part of the day
with me. They were astonished at the puzzling absence of the Captain. Was this
singular man ill?—had he altered his intentions with regard to us?
 After all, as Conseil said, we enjoyed perfect liberty, we were delicately and
abundantly fed. Our host kept to his terms of the treaty. We could not complain,
and, indeed, the singularity of our fate reserved such wonderful compensation
for us that we had no right to accuse it as yet.

That day I commenced the journal of these adventures which has enabled me
to relate them with more scrupulous exactitude and minute detail.

11th November, early in the morning. The fresh air spreading over the
interior of the Nautilus told me that we had come to the surface of the ocean to
renew our supply of oxygen. I directed my steps to the central staircase, and
mounted the platform.

It was six o'clock, the weather was cloudy, the sea grey, but calm. Scarcely a
billow. Captain Nemo, whom I hoped to meet, would he be there? I saw no one
but the steersman imprisoned in his glass cage. Seated upon the projection
formed by the hull of the pinnace, I inhaled the salt breeze with delight.

By degrees the fog disappeared under the action of the sun's rays, the radiant
orb rose from behind the eastern horizon. The sea flamed under its glance like a
train of gunpowder. The clouds scattered in the heights were coloured with lively
tints of beautiful shades, and numerous "mare's tails," which betokened wind for
that day. But what was wind to this Nautilus, which tempests could not frighten!

I was admiring this joyous rising of the sun, so gay, and so life-giving, when I
heard steps approaching the platform. I was prepared to salute Captain Nemo,
but it was his second (whom I had already seen on the Captain's first visit) who
appeared. He advanced on the platform, not seeming to see me. With his
powerful glass to his eye, he scanned every point of the horizon with great
attention. This examination over, he approached the panel and pronounced a
sentence in exactly these terms. I have remembered it, for every morning it was
repeated under exactly the same conditions. It was thus worded:

"Nautron respoc lorni virch."

What it meant I could not say.

These words pronounced, the second descended. I thought that the Nautilus
was about to return to its submarine navigation. I regained the panel and returned
to my chamber.
 Five days sped thus, without any change in our situation. Every morning I
mounted the platform. The same phrase was pronounced by the same individual.
But Captain Nemo did not appear.

I had made up my mind that I should never see him again, when, on the 16th
November, on returning to my room with Ned and Conseil, I found upon my
table a note addressed to me. I opened it impatiently. It was written in a bold,
clear hand, the characters rather pointed, recalling the German type. The note
was worded as follows:

TO PROFESSOR ARONNAX, On board the Nautilus. 16th of November, 1867.

Captain Nemo invites Professor Aronnax to a hunting-party, which will take

place to-morrow morning in the forests of the Island of Crespo. He hopes that
nothing will prevent the Professor from being present, and he will with pleasure
see him joined by his companions.

CAPTAIN NEMO, Commander of the Nautilus.

"A hunt!" exclaimed Ned.

"And in the forests of the Island of Crespo!" added Conseil.

"Oh! then the gentleman is going on terra firma?" replied Ned Land.

"That seems to me to be clearly indicated," said I, reading the letter once

more.

"Well, we must accept," said the Canadian. "But once more on dry ground,
we shall know what to do. Indeed, I shall not be sorry to eat a piece of fresh
venison."

Without seeking to reconcile what was contradictory between Captain

Nemo's manifest aversion to islands and continents, and his invitation to hunt in
a forest, I contented myself with replying:
 "Let us first see where the Island of Crespo is."

I consulted the planisphere, and in 32° 40' N. lat. and 157° 50' W. long., I
found a small island, recognised in 1801 by Captain Crespo, and marked in the
ancient Spanish maps as Rocca de la Plata, the meaning of which is The Silver
Rock. We were then about eighteen hundred miles from our starting-point, and
the course of the Nautilus, a little changed, was bringing it back towards the
southeast.

I showed this little rock, lost in the midst of the North Pacific, to my
companions.

"If Captain Nemo does sometimes go on dry ground," said I, "he at least
chooses desert islands."

Ned Land shrugged his shoulders without speaking, and Conseil and he left
me.

After supper, which was served by the steward, mute and impassive, I went to
bed, not without some anxiety.

The next morning, the 17th of November, on awakening, I felt that the
Nautilus was perfectly still. I dressed quickly and entered the saloon.

Captain Nemo was there, waiting for me. He rose, bowed, and asked me if it
was convenient for me to accompany him. As he made no allusion to his absence
during the last eight days, I did not mention it, and simply answered that my
companions and myself were ready to follow him.

We entered the dining-room, where breakfast was served.

"M. Aronnax," said the Captain, "pray, share my breakfast without ceremony;
we will chat as we eat. For, though I promised you a walk in the forest, I did not
undertake to find hotels there. So breakfast as a man who will most likely not
have his dinner till very late."

I did honour to the repast. It was composed of several kinds of fish, and slices
of sea-cucumber, and different sorts of seaweed. Our drink consisted of pure
water, to which the Captain added some drops of a fermented liquor, extracted
by the Kamschatcha method from a seaweed known under the name of
Rhodomenia palmata. Captain Nemo ate at first without saying a word. Then he
began:

"Sir, when I proposed to you to hunt in my submarine forest of Crespo, you

evidently thought me mad. Sir, you should never judge lightly of any man."

"But Captain, believe me——"

"Be kind enough to listen, and you will then see whether you have any cause
to accuse me of folly and contradiction."

"I listen."

"You know as well as I do, Professor, that man can live under water,
providing he carries with him a sufficient supply of breathable air. In submarine
works, the workman, clad in an impervious dress, with his head in a metal
helmet, receives air from above by means of forcing pumps and regulators."

"That is a diving apparatus," said I.

"Just so, but under these conditions the man is not at liberty; he is attached to
the pump which sends him air through an india-rubber tube, and if we were
obliged to be thus held to the Nautilus, we could not go far."

"And the means of getting free?" I asked.

"It is to use the Rouquayrol apparatus, invented by two of your own

countrymen, which I have brought to perfection for my own use, and which will
allow you to risk yourself under these new physiological conditions without any
organ whatever suffering. It consists of a reservoir of thick iron plates, in which I
store the air under a pressure of fifty atmospheres. This reservoir is fixed on the
back by means of braces, like a soldier's knapsack. Its upper part forms a box in
which the air is kept by means of a bellows, and therefore cannot escape unless
at its normal tension. In the Rouquayrol apparatus such as we use, two india
rubber pipes leave this box and join a sort of tent which holds the nose and
mouth; one is to introduce fresh air, the other to let out the foul, and the tongue
closes one or the other according to the wants of the respirator. But I, in
encountering great pressures at the bottom of the sea, was obliged to shut my
head, like that of a diver in a ball of copper; and it is to this ball of copper that
the two pipes, the inspirator and the expirator, open."
 "Perfectly, Captain Nemo; but the air that you carry with you must soon be
used; when it only contains fifteen per cent. of oxygen it is no longer fit to
breathe."

"Right! But I told you, M. Aronnax, that the pumps of the Nautilus allow me
to store the air under considerable pressure, and on those conditions the reservoir
of the apparatus can furnish breathable air for nine or ten hours."

"I have no further objections to make," I answered. "I will only ask you one
thing, Captain—how can you light your road at the bottom of the sea?"

"With the Ruhmkorff apparatus, M. Aronnax; one is carried on the back, the
other is fastened to the waist. It is composed of a Bunsen pile, which I do not
work with bichromate of potash, but with sodium. A wire is introduced which
collects the electricity produced, and directs it towards a particularly made
lantern. In this lantern is a spiral glass which contains a small quantity of
carbonic gas. When the apparatus is at work this gas becomes luminous, giving
out a white and continuous light. Thus provided, I can breathe and I can see."

"Captain Nemo, to all my objections you make such crushing answers that I
dare no longer doubt. But, if I am forced to admit the Rouquayrol and
Ruhmkorff apparatus, I must be allowed some reservations with regard to the
gun I am to carry."

"But it is not a gun for powder," answered the Captain.

"Then it is an air-gun."

"Doubtless! How would you have me manufacture gun powder on board,

without either saltpetre, sulphur, or charcoal?"

"Besides," I added, "to fire under water in a medium eight hundred and fifty-
five times denser than the air, we must conquer very considerable resistance."

"That would be no difficulty. There exist guns, according to Fulton, perfected

in England by Philip Coles and Burley, in France by Furcy, and in Italy by
Landi, which are furnished with a peculiar system of closing, which can fire
under these conditions. But I repeat, having no powder, I use air under great
pressure, which the pumps of the Nautilus furnish abundantly."
 "But this air must be rapidly used?"

"Well, have I not my Rouquayrol reservoir, which can furnish it at need? A

tap is all that is required. Besides M. Aronnax, you must see yourself that, during
our submarine hunt, we can spend but little air and but few balls."

"But it seems to me that in this twilight, and in the midst of this fluid, which
is very dense compared with the atmosphere, shots could not go far, nor easily
prove mortal."

"Sir, on the contrary, with this gun every blow is mortal; and, however lightly
the animal is touched, it falls as if struck by a thunderbolt."

"Why?"

"Because the balls sent by this gun are not ordinary balls, but little cases of
glass. These glass cases are covered with a case of steel, and weighted with a
pellet of lead; they are real Leyden bottles, into which the electricity is forced to
a very high tension. With the slightest shock they are discharged, and the animal,
however strong it may be, falls dead. I must tell you that these cases are size
number four, and that the charge for an ordinary gun would be ten."

"I will argue no longer," I replied, rising from the table. "I have nothing left
me but to take my gun. At all events, I will go where you go."

Captain Nemo then led me aft; and in passing before Ned's and Conseil's
cabin, I called my two companions, who followed promptly. We then came to a
cell near the machinery-room, in which we put on our walking-dress.

CHAPTER XV

A WALK ON THE BOTTOM OF THE SEA

This cell was, to speak correctly, the arsenal and wardrobe of the Nautilus. A
dozen diving apparatuses hung from the partition waiting our use.
 Ned Land, on seeing them, showed evident repugnance to dress himself in
one.

"But, my worthy Ned, the forests of the Island of Crespo are nothing but
submarine forests."

"Good!" said the disappointed harpooner, who saw his dreams of fresh meat
fade away. "And you, M. Aronnax, are you going to dress yourself in those
clothes?"

"There is no alternative, Master Ned."

"As you please, sir," replied the harpooner, shrugging his shoulders; "but, as
for me, unless I am forced, I will never get into one."

"No one will force you, Master Ned," said Captain Nemo.

"Is Conseil going to risk it?" asked Ned.

"I follow my master wherever he goes," replied Conseil.

At the Captain's call two of the ship's crew came to help us dress in these
heavy and impervious clothes, made of india-rubber without seam, and
constructed expressly to resist considerable pressure. One would have thought it
a suit of armour, both supple and resisting. This suit formed trousers and
waistcoat. The trousers were finished off with thick boots, weighted with heavy
leaden soles. The texture of the waistcoat was held together by bands of copper,
which crossed the chest, protecting it from the great pressure of the water, and
leaving the lungs free to act; the sleeves ended in gloves, which in no way
restrained the movement of the hands. There was a vast difference noticeable
between these consummate apparatuses and the old cork breastplates, jackets,
and other contrivances in vogue during the eighteenth century.

Captain Nemo and one of his companions (a sort of Hercules, who must have
possessed great strength), Conseil and myself were soon enveloped in the
dresses. There remained nothing more to be done but to enclose our heads in the
metal box. But, before proceeding to this operation, I asked the Captain's
permission to examine the guns.

One of the Nautilus men gave me a simple gun, the butt end of which, made
of steel, hollow in the centre, was rather large. It served as a reservoir for
compressed air, which a valve, worked by a spring, allowed to escape into a
metal tube. A box of projectiles in a groove in the thickness of the butt end
contained about twenty of these electric balls, which, by means of a spring, were
forced into the barrel of the gun. As soon as one shot was fired, another was
ready.

"Captain Nemo," said I, "this arm is perfect, and easily handled: I only ask to
be allowed to try it. But how shall we gain the bottom of the sea?"

"At this moment, Professor, the Nautilus is stranded in five fathoms, and we
have nothing to do but to start."

"But how shall we get off?"

"You shall see."

Captain Nemo thrust his head into the helmet, Conseil and I did the same, not
without hearing an ironical "Good sport!" from the Canadian. The upper part of
our dress terminated in a copper collar upon which was screwed the metal
helmet. Three holes, protected by thick glass, allowed us to see in all directions,
by simply turning our head in the interior of the head-dress. As soon as it was in
position, the Rouquayrol apparatus on our backs began to act; and, for my part, I
could breathe with ease.

With the Ruhmkorff lamp hanging from my belt, and the gun in my hand, I
was ready to set out. But to speak the truth, imprisoned in these heavy garments,
and glued to the deck by my leaden soles, it was impossible for me to take a
step.

But this state of things was provided for. I felt myself being pushed into a
little room contiguous to the wardrobe room. My companions followed, towed
along in the same way. I heard a water-tight door, furnished with stopper plates,
close upon us, and we were wrapped in profound darkness.

After some minutes, a loud hissing was heard. I felt the cold mount from my
feet to my chest. Evidently from some part of the vessel they had, by means of a
tap, given entrance to the water, which was invading us, and with which the
room was soon filled. A second door cut in the side of the Nautilus then opened.
We saw a faint light. In another instant our feet trod the bottom of the sea.
 And now, how can I retrace the impression left upon me by that walk under
the waters? Words are impotent to relate such wonders! Captain Nemo walked in
front, his companion followed some steps behind. Conseil and I remained near
each other, as if an exchange of words had been possible through our metallic
cases. I no longer felt the weight of my clothing, or of my shoes, of my reservoir
of air, or my thick helmet, in the midst of which my head rattled like an almond
in its shell.

The light, which lit the soil thirty feet below the surface of the ocean,
astonished me by its power. The solar rays shone through the watery mass easily,
and dissipated all colour, and I clearly distinguished objects at a distance of a
hundred and fifty yards. Beyond that the tints darkened into fine gradations of
ultramarine, and faded into vague obscurity. Truly this water which surrounded
me was but another air denser than the terrestrial atmosphere, but almost as
transparent. Above me was the calm surface of the sea. We were walking on
fine, even sand, not wrinkled, as on a flat shore, which retains the impression of
the billows. This dazzling carpet, really a reflector, repelled the rays of the sun
with wonderful intensity, which accounted for the vibration which penetrated
every atom of liquid. Shall I be believed when I say that, at the depth of thirty
feet, I could see as if I was in broad daylight?

For a quarter of an hour I trod on this sand, sown with the impalpable dust of
shells. The hull of the Nautilus, resembling a long shoal, disappeared by degrees;
but its lantern, when darkness should overtake us in the waters, would help to
guide us on board by its distinct rays.

Soon forms of objects outlined in the distance were discernible. I recognised

magnificent rocks, hung with a tapestry of zoophytes of the most beautiful kind,
and I was at first struck by the peculiar effect of this medium.

It was then ten in the morning; the rays of the sun struck the surface of the
waves at rather an oblique angle, and at the touch of their light, decomposed by
refraction as through a prism, flowers, rocks, plants, shells, and polypi were
shaded at the edges by the seven solar colours. It was marvellous, a feast for the
eyes, this complication of coloured tints, a perfect kaleidoscope of green, yellow,
orange, violet, indigo, and blue; in one word, the whole palette of an enthusiastic
colourist! Why could I not communicate to Conseil the lively sensations which
were mounting to my brain, and rival him in expressions of admiration? For
aught I knew, Captain Nemo and his companion might be able to exchange
thoughts by means of signs previously agreed upon. So, for want of better, I
talked to myself; I declaimed in the copper box which covered my head, thereby
expending more air in vain words than was perhaps wise.

Various kinds of isis, clusters of pure tuft-coral, prickly fungi, and anemones
formed a brilliant garden of flowers, decked with their collarettes of blue
tentacles, sea-stars studding the sandy bottom. It was a real grief to me to crush
under my feet the brilliant specimens of molluscs which strewed the ground by
thousands, of hammerheads, donaciae (veritable bounding shells), of staircases,
and red helmet-shells, angel-wings, and many others produced by this
inexhaustible ocean. But we were bound to walk, so we went on, whilst above
our heads waved medusae whose umbrellas of opal or rose-pink, escalloped with
a band of blue, sheltered us from the rays of the sun and fiery pelagiae, which, in
the darkness, would have strewn our path with phosphorescent light.

All these wonders I saw in the space of a quarter of a mile, scarcely stopping,
and following Captain Nemo, who beckoned me on by signs. Soon the nature of
the soil changed; to the sandy plain succeeded an extent of slimy mud which the
Americans call "ooze," composed of equal parts of silicious and calcareous
shells. We then travelled over a plain of seaweed of wild and luxuriant
vegetation. This sward was of close texture, and soft to the feet, and rivalled the
softest carpet woven by the hand of man. But whilst verdure was spread at our
feet, it did not abandon our heads. A light network of marine plants, of that
inexhaustible family of seaweeds of which more than two thousand kinds are
known, grew on the surface of the water.

I noticed that the green plants kept nearer the top of the sea, whilst the red
were at a greater depth, leaving to the black or brown the care of forming
gardens and parterres in the remote beds of the ocean.

We had quitted the Nautilus about an hour and a half. It was near noon; I
knew by the perpendicularity of the sun's rays, which were no longer refracted.
The magical colours disappeared by degrees, and the shades of emerald and
sapphire were effaced. We walked with a regular step, which rang upon the
ground with astonishing intensity; the slightest noise was transmitted with a
quickness to which the ear is unaccustomed on the earth; indeed, water is a
better conductor of sound than air, in the ratio of four to one. At this period the
earth sloped downwards; the light took a uniform tint. We were at a depth of a
hundred and five yards and twenty inches, undergoing a pressure of six
atmospheres.

At this depth I could still see the rays of the sun, though feebly; to their
intense brilliancy had succeeded a reddish twilight, the lowest state between day
and night; but we could still see well enough; it was not necessary to resort to the
Ruhmkorff apparatus as yet. At this moment Captain Nemo stopped; he waited
till I joined him, and then pointed to an obscure mass, looming in the shadow, at
a short distance.

"It is the forest of the Island of Crespo," thought I; and I was not mistaken.

CHAPTER XVI

A SUBMARINE FOREST

We had at last arrived on the borders of this forest, doubtless one of the finest
of Captain Nemo's immense domains. He looked upon it as his own, and
considered he had the same right over it that the first men had in the first days of
the world. And, indeed, who would have disputed with him the possession of
this submarine property? What other hardier pioneer would come, hatchet in
hand, to cut down the dark copses?

This forest was composed of large tree-plants; and the moment we penetrated
under its vast arcades, I was struck by the singular position of their branches—a
position I had not yet observed.

Not an herb which carpeted the ground, not a branch which clothed the trees,
was either broken or bent, nor did they extend horizontally; all stretched up to
the surface of the ocean. Not a filament, not a ribbon, however thin they might
be, but kept as straight as a rod of iron. The fuci and llianas grew in rigid
perpendicular lines, due to the density of the element which had produced them.
Motionless yet, when bent to one side by the hand, they directly resumed their
former position. Truly it was the region of perpendicularity!

I soon accustomed myself to this fantastic position, as well as to the

comparative darkness which surrounded us. The soil of the forest seemed
covered with sharp blocks, difficult to avoid. The submarine flora struck me as
being very perfect, and richer even than it would have been in the arctic or
tropical zones, where these productions are not so plentiful. But for some
minutes I involuntarily confounded the genera, taking animals for plants; and
who would not have been mistaken? The fauna and the flora are too closely
allied in this submarine world.

These plants are self-propagated, and the principle of their existence is in the
water, which upholds and nourishes them. The greater number, instead of leaves,
shoot forth blades of capricious shapes, comprised within a scale of colours pink,
carmine, green, olive, fawn, and brown.

"Curious anomaly, fantastic element!" said an ingenious naturalist, "in which

the animal kingdom blossoms, and the vegetable does not!"

In about an hour Captain Nemo gave the signal to halt; I, for my part, was not
sorry, and we stretched ourselves under an arbour of alariae, the long thin blades
of which stood up like arrows.

This short rest seemed delicious to me; there was nothing wanting but the
charm of conversation; but, impossible to speak, impossible to answer, I only put
my great copper head to Conseil's. I saw the worthy fellow's eyes glistening with
delight, and, to show his satisfaction, he shook himself in his breastplate of air,
in the most comical way in the world.

After four hours of this walking, I was surprised not to find myself dreadfully
hungry. How to account for this state of the stomach I could not tell. But instead
I felt an insurmountable desire to sleep, which happens to all divers. And my
eyes soon closed behind the thick glasses, and I fell into a heavy slumber, which
the movement alone had prevented before. Captain Nemo and his robust
companion, stretched in the clear crystal, set us the example.

How long I remained buried in this drowsiness I cannot judge, but, when I
woke, the sun seemed sinking towards the horizon. Captain Nemo had already
risen, and I was beginning to stretch my limbs, when an unexpected apparition
brought me briskly to my feet.

A few steps off, a monstrous sea-spider, about thirty-eight inches high, was
watching me with squinting eyes, ready to spring upon me. Though my diver's
dress was thick enough to defend me from the bite of this animal, I could not
help shuddering with horror. Conseil and the sailor of the Nautilus awoke at this
moment. Captain Nemo pointed out the hideous crustacean, which a blow from
the butt end of the gun knocked over, and I saw the horrible claws of the monster
writhe in terrible convulsions. This incident reminded me that other animals
more to be feared might haunt these obscure depths, against whose attacks my
diving-dress would not protect me. I had never thought of it before, but I now
resolved to be upon my guard. Indeed, I thought that this halt would mark the
termination of our walk; but I was mistaken, for, instead of returning to the
Nautilus, Captain Nemo continued his bold excursion. The ground was still on
the incline, its declivity seemed to be getting greater, and to be leading us to
greater depths. It must have been about three o'clock when we reached a narrow
valley, between high perpendicular walls, situated about seventy-five fathoms
deep. Thanks to the perfection of our apparatus, we were forty-five fathoms
below the limit which nature seems to have imposed on man as to his submarine
excursions.

I say seventy-five fathoms, though I had no instrument by which to judge the

distance. But I knew that even in the clearest waters the solar rays could not
penetrate further. And accordingly the darkness deepened. At ten paces not an
object was visible. I was groping my way, when I suddenly saw a brilliant white
light. Captain Nemo had just put his electric apparatus into use; his companion
did the same, and Conseil and I followed their example. By turning a screw I
established a communication between the wire and the spiral glass, and the sea,
lit by our four lanterns, was illuminated for a circle of thirty-six yards.

As we walked I thought the light of our Ruhmkorff apparatus could not fail to
draw some inhabitant from its dark couch. But if they did approach us, they at
least kept at a respectful distance from the hunters. Several times I saw Captain
Nemo stop, put his gun to his shoulder, and after some moments drop it and walk
on. At last, after about four hours, this marvellous excursion came to an end. A
wall of superb rocks, in an imposing mass, rose before us, a heap of gigantic
blocks, an enormous, steep granite shore, forming dark grottos, but which
presented no practicable slope; it was the prop of the Island of Crespo. It was the
earth! Captain Nemo stopped suddenly. A gesture of his brought us all to a halt;
and, however desirous I might be to scale the wall, I was obliged to stop. Here
ended Captain Nemo's domains. And he would not go beyond them. Further on
was a portion of the globe he might not trample upon.
 The return began. Captain Nemo had returned to the head of his little band,
directing their course without hesitation. I thought we were not following the
same road to return to the Nautilus. The new road was very steep, and
consequently very painful. We approached the surface of the sea rapidly. But this
return to the upper strata was not so sudden as to cause relief from the pressure
too rapidly, which might have produced serious disorder in our organisation, and
brought on internal lesions, so fatal to divers. Very soon light reappeared and
grew, and, the sun being low on the horizon, the refraction edged the different
objects with a spectral ring. At ten yards and a half deep, we walked amidst a
shoal of little fishes of all kinds, more numerous than the birds of the air, and
also more agile; but no aquatic game worthy of a shot had as yet met our gaze,
when at that moment I saw the Captain shoulder his gun quickly, and follow a
moving object into the shrubs. He fired; I heard a slight hissing, and a creature
fell stunned at some distance from us. It was a magnificent sea-otter, an
enhydrus, the only exclusively marine quadruped. This otter was five feet long,
and must have been very valuable. Its skin, chestnut-brown above and silvery
underneath, would have made one of those beautiful furs so sought after in the
Russian and Chinese markets: the fineness and the lustre of its coat would
certainly fetch L80. I admired this curious mammal, with its rounded head
ornamented with short ears, its round eyes, and white whiskers like those of a
cat, with webbed feet and nails, and tufted tail. This precious animal, hunted and
tracked by fishermen, has now become very rare, and taken refuge chiefly in the
northern parts of the Pacific, or probably its race would soon become extinct.

Captain Nemo's companion took the beast, threw it over his shoulder, and we
continued our journey. For one hour a plain of sand lay stretched before us.
Sometimes it rose to within two yards and some inches of the surface of the
water. I then saw our image clearly reflected, drawn inversely, and above us
appeared an identical group reflecting our movements and our actions; in a
word, like us in every point, except that they walked with their heads downward
and their feet in the air.

Another effect I noticed, which was the passage of thick clouds which formed
and vanished rapidly; but on reflection I understood that these seeming clouds
were due to the varying thickness of the reeds at the bottom, and I could even
see the fleecy foam which their broken tops multiplied on the water, and the
shadows of large birds passing above our heads, whose rapid flight I could
discern on the surface of the sea.
 On this occasion I was witness to one of the finest gun shots which ever made
the nerves of a hunter thrill. A large bird of great breadth of wing, clearly visible,
approached, hovering over us. Captain Nemo's companion shouldered his gun
and fired, when it was only a few yards above the waves. The creature fell
stunned, and the force of its fall brought it within the reach of dexterous hunter's
grasp. It was an albatross of the finest kind.

Our march had not been interrupted by this incident. For two hours we
followed these sandy plains, then fields of algae very disagreeable to cross.
Candidly, I could do no more when I saw a glimmer of light, which, for a half
mile, broke the darkness of the waters. It was the lantern of the Nautilus. Before
twenty minutes were over we should be on board, and I should be able to breathe
with ease, for it seemed that my reservoir supplied air very deficient in oxygen.
But I did not reckon on an accidental meeting which delayed our arrival for
some time.

I had remained some steps behind, when I presently saw Captain Nemo
coming hurriedly towards me. With his strong hand he bent me to the ground, his
companion doing the same to Conseil. At first I knew not what to think of this
sudden attack, but I was soon reassured by seeing the Captain lie down beside
me, and remain immovable.

I was stretched on the ground, just under the shelter of a bush of algae, when,
raising my head, I saw some enormous mass, casting phosphorescent gleams,
pass blusteringly by.

My blood froze in my veins as I recognised two formidable sharks which

threatened us. It was a couple of tintoreas, terrible creatures, with enormous tails
and a dull glassy stare, the phosphorescent matter ejected from holes pierced
around the muzzle. Monstrous brutes! which would crush a whole man in their
iron jaws. I did not know whether Conseil stopped to classify them; for my part,
I noticed their silver bellies, and their huge mouths bristling with teeth, from a
very unscientific point of view, and more as a possible victim than as a
naturalist.

Happily the voracious creatures do not see well. They passed without seeing
us, brushing us with their brownish fins, and we escaped by a miracle from a
danger certainly greater than meeting a tiger full-face in the forest. Half an hour
after, guided by the electric light we reached the Nautilus. The outside door had
been left open, and Captain Nemo closed it as soon as we had entered the first
cell. He then pressed a knob. I heard the pumps working in the midst of the
vessel, I felt the water sinking from around me, and in a few moments the cell
was entirely empty. The inside door then opened, and we entered the vestry.

There our diving-dress was taken off, not without some trouble, and, fairly
worn out from want of food and sleep, I returned to my room, in great wonder at
this surprising excursion at the bottom of the sea.

CHAPTER XVII

FOUR THOUSAND LEAGUES UNDER THE PACIFIC

The next morning, the 18th of November, I had quite recovered from my
fatigues of the day before, and I went up on to the platform, just as the second
lieutenant was uttering his daily phrase.

I was admiring the magnificent aspect of the ocean when Captain Nemo
appeared. He did not seem to be aware of my presence, and began a series of
astronomical observations. Then, when he had finished, he went and leant on the
cage of the watch-light, and gazed abstractedly on the ocean. In the meantime, a
number of the sailors of the Nautilus, all strong and healthy men, had come up
onto the platform. They came to draw up the nets that had been laid all night.
These sailors were evidently of different nations, although the European type
was visible in all of them. I recognised some unmistakable Irishmen, Frenchmen,
some Sclaves, and a Greek, or a Candiote. They were civil, and only used that
odd language among themselves, the origin of which I could not guess, neither
could I question them.

The nets were hauled in. They were a large kind of "chaluts," like those on
the Normandy coasts, great pockets that the waves and a chain fixed in the
smaller meshes kept open. These pockets, drawn by iron poles, swept through
the water, and gathered in everything in their way. That day they brought up
curious specimens from those productive coasts.
 I reckoned that the haul had brought in more than nine hundredweight of fish.
It was a fine haul, but not to be wondered at. Indeed, the nets are let down for
several hours, and enclose in their meshes an infinite variety. We had no lack of
excellent food, and the rapidity of the Nautilus and the attraction of the electric
light could always renew our supply. These several productions of the sea were
immediately lowered through the panel to the steward's room, some to be eaten
fresh, and others pickled.

The fishing ended, the provision of air renewed, I thought that the Nautilus
was about to continue its submarine excursion, and was preparing to return to
my room, when, without further preamble, the Captain turned to me, saying:

"Professor, is not this ocean gifted with real life? It has its tempers and its
gentle moods. Yesterday it slept as we did, and now it has woke after a quiet
night. Look!" he continued, "it wakes under the caresses of the sun. It is going to
renew its diurnal existence. It is an interesting study to watch the play of its
organisation. It has a pulse, arteries, spasms; and I agree with the learned Maury,
who discovered in it a circulation as real as the circulation of blood in animals.

"Yes, the ocean has indeed circulation, and to promote it, the Creator has
caused things to multiply in it—caloric, salt, and animalculae."

When Captain Nemo spoke thus, he seemed altogether changed, and aroused
an extraordinary emotion in me.

"Also," he added, "true existence is there; and I can imagine the foundations
of nautical towns, clusters of submarine houses, which, like the Nautilus, would
ascend every morning to breathe at the surface of the water, free towns,
independent cities. Yet who knows whether some despot——"

Captain Nemo finished his sentence with a violent gesture. Then, addressing
me as if to chase away some sorrowful thought:

"M. Aronnax," he asked, "do you know the depth of the ocean?"

"I only know, Captain, what the principal soundings have taught us."

"Could you tell me them, so that I can suit them to my purpose?"

"These are some," I replied, "that I remember. If I am not mistaken, a depth

of 8,000 yards has been found in the North Atlantic, and 2,500 yards in the
Mediterranean. The most remarkable soundings have been made in the South
Atlantic, near the thirty-fifth parallel, and they gave 12,000 yards, 14,000 yards,
and 15,000 yards. To sum up all, it is reckoned that if the bottom of the sea were
levelled, its mean depth would be about one and three-quarter leagues."

"Well, Professor," replied the Captain, "we shall show you better than that I
hope. As to the mean depth of this part of the Pacific, I tell you it is only 4,000
yards."

Having said this, Captain Nemo went towards the panel, and disappeared
down the ladder. I followed him, and went into the large drawing-room. The
screw was immediately put in motion, and the log gave twenty miles an hour.

During the days and weeks that passed, Captain Nemo was very sparing of
his visits. I seldom saw him. The lieutenant pricked the ship's course regularly
on the chart, so I could always tell exactly the route of the Nautilus.

Nearly every day, for some time, the panels of the drawing-room were
opened, and we were never tired of penetrating the mysteries of the submarine
world.

The general direction of the Nautilus was south-east, and it kept between 100
and 150 yards of depth. One day, however, I do not know why, being drawn
diagonally by means of the inclined planes, it touched the bed of the sea. The
thermometer indicated a temperature of 4.25 (cent.): a temperature that at this
depth seemed common to all latitudes.

At three o'clock in the morning of the 26th of November the Nautilus crossed
the tropic of Cancer at 172° long. On 27th instant it sighted the Sandwich
Islands, where Cook died, February 14, 1779. We had then gone 4,860 leagues
from our starting-point. In the morning, when I went on the platform, I saw two
miles to windward, Hawaii, the largest of the seven islands that form the group. I
saw clearly the cultivated ranges, and the several mountain-chains that run
parallel with the side, and the volcanoes that overtop Mouna-Rea, which rise
5,000 yards above the level of the sea. Besides other things the nets brought up,
were several flabellariae and graceful polypi, that are peculiar to that part of the
ocean. The direction of the Nautilus was still to the south-east. It crossed the
equator December 1, in 142° long.; and on the 4th of the same month, after
crossing rapidly and without anything in particular occurring, we sighted the
Marquesas group. I saw, three miles off, Martin's peak in Nouka-Hiva, the
largest of the group that belongs to France. I only saw the woody mountains
against the horizon, because Captain Nemo did not wish to bring the ship to the
wind. There the nets brought up beautiful specimens of fish: some with azure
fins and tails like gold, the flesh of which is unrivalled; some nearly destitute of
scales, but of exquisite flavour; others, with bony jaws, and yellow-tinged gills,
as good as bonitos; all fish that would be of use to us. After leaving these
charming islands protected by the French flag, from the 4th to the 11th of
December the Nautilus sailed over about 2,000 miles.

During the daytime of the 11th of December I was busy reading in the large
drawing-room. Ned Land and Conseil watched the luminous water through the
half-open panels. The Nautilus was immovable. While its reservoirs were filled,
it kept at a depth of 1,000 yards, a region rarely visited in the ocean, and in
which large fish were seldom seen.

I was then reading a charming book by Jean Mace, The Slaves of the
Stomach, and I was learning some valuable lessons from it, when Conseil
interrupted me.

"Will master come here a moment?" he said, in a curious voice.

"What is the matter, Conseil?"

"I want master to look."

I rose, went, and leaned on my elbows before the panes and watched.

In a full electric light, an enormous black mass, quite immovable, was

suspended in the midst of the waters. I watched it attentively, seeking to find out
the nature of this gigantic cetacean. But a sudden thought crossed my mind. "A
vessel!" I said, half aloud.

"Yes," replied the Canadian, "a disabled ship that has sunk perpendicularly."

Ned Land was right; we were close to a vessel of which the tattered shrouds
still hung from their chains. The keel seemed to be in good order, and it had been
wrecked at most some few hours. Three stumps of masts, broken off about two
feet above the bridge, showed that the vessel had had to sacrifice its masts. But,
lying on its side, it had filled, and it was heeling over to port. This skeleton of
what it had once been was a sad spectacle as it lay lost under the waves, but
sadder still was the sight of the bridge, where some corpses, bound with ropes,
were still lying. I counted five—four men, one of whom was standing at the
helm, and a woman standing by the poop, holding an infant in her arms. She was
quite young. I could distinguish her features, which the water had not
decomposed, by the brilliant light from the Nautilus. In one despairing effort, she
had raised her infant above her head—poor little thing!—whose arms encircled
its mother's neck. The attitude of the four sailors was frightful, distorted as they
were by their convulsive movements, whilst making a last effort to free
themselves from the cords that bound them to the vessel. The steersman alone,
calm, with a grave, clear face, his grey hair glued to his forehead, and his hand
clutching the wheel of the helm, seemed even then to be guiding the three
broken masts through the depths of the ocean.

What a scene! We were dumb; our hearts beat fast before this shipwreck,
taken as it were from life and photographed in its last moments. And I saw
already, coming towards it with hungry eyes, enormous sharks, attracted by the
human flesh.

However, the Nautilus, turning, went round the submerged vessel, and in one
instant I read on the stern—"The Florida, Sunderland."
 CHAPTER XVIII

VANIKORO

This terrible spectacle was the forerunner of the series of maritime

catastrophes that the Nautilus was destined to meet with in its route. As long as it
went through more frequented waters, we often saw the hulls of shipwrecked
vessels that were rotting in the depths, and deeper down cannons, bullets,
anchors, chains, and a thousand other iron materials eaten up by rust. However,
on the 11th of December we sighted the Pomotou Islands, the old "dangerous
group" of Bougainville, that extend over a space of 500 leagues at E.S.E. to
W.N.W., from the Island Ducie to that of Lazareff. This group covers an area of
370 square leagues, and it is formed of sixty groups of islands, among which the
Gambier group is remarkable, over which France exercises sway. These are coral
islands, slowly raised, but continuous, created by the daily work of polypi. Then
this new island will be joined later on to the neighboring groups, and a fifth
continent will stretch from New Zealand and New Caledonia, and from thence to
the Marquesas.

One day, when I was suggesting this theory to Captain Nemo, he replied
coldly:

"The earth does not want new continents, but new men."

Chance had conducted the Nautilus towards the Island of Clermont-Tonnere,

one of the most curious of the group, that was discovered in 1822 by Captain
Bell of the Minerva. I could study now the madreporal system, to which are due
the islands in this ocean.

Madrepores (which must not be mistaken for corals) have a tissue lined with
a calcareous crust, and the modifications of its structure have induced M. Milne
Edwards, my worthy master, to class them into five sections. The animalcule that
the marine polypus secretes live by millions at the bottom of their cells. Their
calcareous deposits become rocks, reefs, and large and small islands. Here they
form a ring, surrounding a little inland lake, that communicates with the sea by
means of gaps. There they make barriers of reefs like those on the coasts of New
Caledonia and the various Pomoton islands. In other places, like those at
Reunion and at Maurice, they raise fringed reefs, high, straight walls, near which
the depth of the ocean is considerable.

Some cable-lengths off the shores of the Island of Clermont I admired the
gigantic work accomplished by these microscopical workers. These walls are
specially the work of those madrepores known as milleporas, porites,
madrepores, and astraeas. These polypi are found particularly in the rough beds
of the sea, near the surface; and consequently it is from the upper part that they
begin their operations, in which they bury themselves by degrees with the debris
of the secretions that support them. Such is, at least, Darwin's theory, who thus
explains the formation of the atolls, a superior theory (to my mind) to that given
of the foundation of the madreporical works, summits of mountains or
volcanoes, that are submerged some feet below the level of the sea.

I could observe closely these curious walls, for perpendicularly they were
more than 300 yards deep, and our electric sheets lighted up this calcareous
matter brilliantly. Replying to a question Conseil asked me as to the time these
colossal barriers took to be raised, I astonished him much by telling him that
learned men reckoned it about the eighth of an inch in a hundred years.

Towards evening Clermont-Tonnerre was lost in the distance, and the route of
the Nautilus was sensibly changed. After having crossed the tropic of Capricorn
in 135° longitude, it sailed W.N.W., making again for the tropical zone.
Although the summer sun was very strong, we did not suffer from heat, for at
fifteen or twenty fathoms below the surface, the temperature did not rise above
from ten to twelve degrees.

On 15th of December, we left to the east the bewitching group of the

Societies and the graceful Tahiti, queen of the Pacific. I saw in the morning,
some miles to the windward, the elevated summits of the island. These waters
furnished our table with excellent fish, mackerel, bonitos, and some varieties of
a sea-serpent.

On the 25th of December the Nautilus sailed into the midst of the New
Hebrides, discovered by Quiros in 1606, and that Bougainville explored in 1768,
and to which Cook gave its present name in 1773. This group is composed
principally of nine large islands, that form a band of 120 leagues N.N.S. to
S.S.W., between 15° and 2° S. lat., and 164 deg. and 168° long. We passed
tolerably near to the Island of Aurou, that at noon looked like a mass of green
woods, surmounted by a peak of great height.
 That day being Christmas Day, Ned Land seemed to regret sorely the non-
celebration of "Christmas," the family fete of which Protestants are so fond. I
had not seen Captain Nemo for a week, when, on the morning of the 27th, he
came into the large drawing-room, always seeming as if he had seen you five
minutes before. I was busily tracing the route of the Nautilus on the planisphere.
The Captain came up to me, put his finger on one spot on the chart, and said this
single word.

"Vanikoro."

The effect was magical! It was the name of the islands on which La Perouse
had been lost! I rose suddenly.

"The Nautilus has brought us to Vanikoro?" I asked.

"Yes, Professor," said the Captain.

"And I can visit the celebrated islands where the Boussole and the Astrolabe
struck?"

"If you like, Professor."

"When shall we be there?"

"We are there now."

Followed by Captain Nemo, I went up on to the platform, and greedily

scanned the horizon.

To the N.E. two volcanic islands emerged of unequal size, surrounded by a

coral reef that measured forty miles in circumference. We were close to
Vanikoro, really the one to which Dumont d'Urville gave the name of Isle de la
Recherche, and exactly facing the little harbour of Vanou, situated in 16° 4' S.
lat., and 164° 32' E. long. The earth seemed covered with verdure from the shore
to the summits in the interior, that were crowned by Mount Kapogo, 476 feet
high. The Nautilus, having passed the outer belt of rocks by a narrow strait,
found itself among breakers where the sea was from thirty to forty fathoms deep.
Under the verdant shade of some mangroves I perceived some savages, who
appeared greatly surprised at our approach. In the long black body, moving
between wind and water, did they not see some formidable cetacean that they
regarded with suspicion?

Just then Captain Nemo asked me what I knew about the wreck of La
Perouse.

"Only what everyone knows, Captain," I replied.

"And could you tell me what everyone knows about it?" he inquired,
ironically.

"Easily."

I related to him all that the last works of Dumont d'Urville had made known
—works from which the following is a brief account.

La Perouse, and his second, Captain de Langle, were sent by Louis XVI, in
1785, on a voyage of circumnavigation. They embarked in the corvettes
Boussole and the Astrolabe, neither of which were again heard of. In 1791, the
French Government, justly uneasy as to the fate of these two sloops, manned two
large merchantmen, the Recherche and the Esperance, which left Brest the 28th
of September under the command of Bruni d'Entrecasteaux.

Two months after, they learned from Bowen, commander of the Albemarle,
that the debris of shipwrecked vessels had been seen on the coasts of New
Georgia. But D'Entrecasteaux, ignoring this communication—rather uncertain,
besides—directed his course towards the Admiralty Islands, mentioned in a
report of Captain Hunter's as being the place where La Perouse was wrecked.

They sought in vain. The Esperance and the Recherche passed before
Vanikoro without stopping there, and, in fact, this voyage was most disastrous,
as it cost D'Entrecasteaux his life, and those of two of his lieutenants, besides
several of his crew.

Captain Dillon, a shrewd old Pacific sailor, was the first to find unmistakable
traces of the wrecks. On the 15th of May, 1824, his vessel, the St. Patrick, passed
close to Tikopia, one of the New Hebrides. There a Lascar came alongside in a
canoe, sold him the handle of a sword in silver that bore the print of characters
engraved on the hilt. The Lascar pretended that six years before, during a stay at
Vanikoro, he had seen two Europeans that belonged to some vessels that had run
aground on the reefs some years ago.
 Dillon guessed that he meant La Perouse, whose disappearance had troubled
the whole world. He tried to get on to Vanikoro, where, according to the Lascar,
he would find numerous debris of the wreck, but winds and tides prevented him.

Dillon returned to Calcutta. There he interested the Asiatic Society and the
Indian Company in his discovery. A vessel, to which was given the name of the
Recherche, was put at his disposal, and he set out, 23rd January, 1827,
accompanied by a French agent.

The Recherche, after touching at several points in the Pacific, cast anchor
before Vanikoro, 7th July, 1827, in that same harbour of Vanou where the
Nautilus was at this time.

There it collected numerous relics of the wreck—iron utensils, anchors,

pulley-strops, swivel-guns, an 18 lb. shot, fragments of astronomical
instruments, a piece of crown work, and a bronze clock, bearing this inscription
—"Bazin m'a fait," the mark of the foundry of the arsenal at Brest about 1785.
There could be no further doubt.

Dillon, having made all inquiries, stayed in the unlucky place till October.
Then he quitted Vanikoro, and directed his course towards New Zealand; put
into Calcutta, 7th April, 1828, and returned to France, where he was warmly
welcomed by Charles X.

But at the same time, without knowing Dillon's movements, Dumont

d'Urville had already set out to find the scene of the wreck. And they had learned
from a whaler that some medals and a cross of St. Louis had been found in the
hands of some savages of Louisiade and New Caledonia. Dumont d'Urville,
commander of the Astrolabe, had then sailed, and two months after Dillon had
left Vanikoro he put into Hobart Town. There he learned the results of Dillon's
inquiries, and found that a certain James Hobbs, second lieutenant of the Union
of Calcutta, after landing on an island situated 8° 18' S. lat., and 156° 30' E.
long., had seen some iron bars and red stuffs used by the natives of these parts.
Dumont d'Urville, much perplexed, and not knowing how to credit the reports of
low-class journals, decided to follow Dillon's track.

On the 10th of February, 1828, the Astrolabe appeared off Tikopia, and took
as guide and interpreter a deserter found on the island; made his way to
Vanikoro, sighted it on the 12th inst., lay among the reefs until the 14th, and not
until the 20th did he cast anchor within the barrier in the harbour of Vanou.

On the 23rd, several officers went round the island and brought back some
unimportant trifles. The natives, adopting a system of denials and evasions,
refused to take them to the unlucky place. This ambiguous conduct led them to
believe that the natives had ill-treated the castaways, and indeed they seemed to
fear that Dumont d'Urville had come to avenge La Perouse and his unfortunate
crew.

However, on the 26th, appeased by some presents, and understanding that

they had no reprisals to fear, they led M. Jacquireot to the scene of the wreck.

There, in three or four fathoms of water, between the reefs of Pacou and
Vanou, lay anchors, cannons, pigs of lead and iron, embedded in the limy
concretions. The large boat and the whaler belonging to the Astrolabe were sent
to this place, and, not without some difficulty, their crews hauled up an anchor
weighing 1,800 lbs., a brass gun, some pigs of iron, and two copper swivel-guns.

Dumont d'Urville, questioning the natives, learned too that La Perouse, after
losing both his vessels on the reefs of this island, had constructed a smaller boat,
only to be lost a second time. Where, no one knew.

But the French Government, fearing that Dumont d'Urville was not
acquainted with Dillon's movements, had sent the sloop Bayonnaise,
commanded by Legoarant de Tromelin, to Vanikoro, which had been stationed
on the west coast of America. The Bayonnaise cast her anchor before Vanikoro
some months after the departure of the Astrolabe, but found no new document;
but stated that the savages had respected the monument to La Perouse. That is
the substance of what I told Captain Nemo.

"So," he said, "no one knows now where the third vessel perished that was
constructed by the castaways on the island of Vanikoro?"

"No one knows."

Captain Nemo said nothing, but signed to me to follow him into the large
saloon. The Nautilus sank several yards below the waves, and the panels were
opened.

I hastened to the aperture, and under the crustations of coral, covered with
fungi, syphonules, alcyons, madrepores, through myriads of charming fish—
girelles, glyphisidri, pompherides, diacopes, and holocentres—I recognised
certain debris that the drags had not been able to tear up—iron stirrups, anchors,
cannons, bullets, capstan fittings, the stem of a ship, all objects clearly proving
the wreck of some vessel, and now carpeted with living flowers. While I was
looking on this desolate scene, Captain Nemo said, in a sad voice:

"Commander La Perouse set out 7th December, 1785, with his vessels La
Boussole and the Astrolabe. He first cast anchor at Botany Bay, visited the
Friendly Isles, New Caledonia, then directed his course towards Santa Cruz, and
put into Namouka, one of the Hapai group. Then his vessels struck on the
unknown reefs of Vanikoro. The Boussole, which went first, ran aground on the
southerly coast. The Astrolabe went to its help, and ran aground too. The first
vessel was destroyed almost immediately. The second, stranded under the wind,
resisted some days. The natives made the castaways welcome. They installed
themselves in the island, and constructed a smaller boat with the debris of the
two large ones. Some sailors stayed willingly at Vanikoro; the others, weak and
ill, set out with La Perouse. They directed their course towards the Solomon
Islands, and there perished, with everything, on the westerly coast of the chief
island of the group, between Capes Deception and Satisfaction."

"How do you know that?"

"By this, that I found on the spot where was the last wreck."

Captain Nemo showed me a tin-plate box, stamped with the French arms, and
corroded by the salt water. He opened it, and I saw a bundle of papers, yellow
but still readable.

They were the instructions of the naval minister to Commander La Perouse,

annotated in the margin in Louis XVI's handwriting.

"Ah! it is a fine death for a sailor!" said Captain Nemo, at last. "A coral tomb
makes a quiet grave; and I trust that I and my comrades will find no other."
 CHAPTER XIX

TORRES STRAITS
During the night of the 27th or 28th of December, the Nautilus left the shores
of Vanikoro with great speed. Her course was south-westerly, and in three days
she had gone over the 750 leagues that separated it from La Perouse's group and
the south-east point of Papua.

Early on the 1st of January, 1863, Conseil joined me on the platform.

"Master, will you permit me to wish you a happy New Year?"

"What! Conseil; exactly as if I was at Paris in my study at the Jardin des

Plantes? Well, I accept your good wishes, and thank you for them. Only, I will
ask you what you mean by a `Happy New Year' under our circumstances? Do
you mean the year that will bring us to the end of our imprisonment, or the year
that sees us continue this strange voyage?"

"Really, I do not know how to answer, master. We are sure to see curious
things, and for the last two months we have not had time for dullness. The last
marvel is always the most astonishing; and, if we continue this progression, I do
not know how it will end. It is my opinion that we shall never again see the like.
I think then, with no offence to master, that a happy year would be one in which
we could see everything."

On 2nd January we had made 11,340 miles, or 5,250 French leagues, since
our starting-point in the Japan Seas. Before the ship's head stretched the
dangerous shores of the coral sea, on the north-east coast of Australia. Our boat
lay along some miles from the redoubtable bank on which Cook's vessel was
lost, 10th June, 1770. The boat in which Cook was struck on a rock, and, if it did
not sink, it was owing to a piece of coral that was broken by the shock, and fixed
itself in the broken keel.

I had wished to visit the reef, 360 leagues long, against which the sea, always
rough, broke with great violence, with a noise like thunder. But just then the
inclined planes drew the Nautilus down to a great depth, and I could see nothing
of the high coral walls. I had to content myself with the different specimens of
fish brought up by the nets. I remarked, among others, some germons, a species
of mackerel as large as a tunny, with bluish sides, and striped with transverse
bands, that disappear with the animal's life.

These fish followed us in shoals, and furnished us with very delicate food.
We took also a large number of gilt-heads, about one and a half inches long,
tasting like dorys; and flying pyrapeds like submarine swallows, which, in dark
nights, light alternately the air and water with their phosphorescent light. Among
the molluscs and zoophytes, I found in the meshes of the net several species of
alcyonarians, echini, hammers, spurs, dials, cerites, and hyalleae. The flora was
represented by beautiful floating seaweeds, laminariae, and macrocystes,
impregnated with the mucilage that transudes through their pores; and among
which I gathered an admirable Nemastoma Geliniarois, that was classed among
the natural curiosities of the museum.

Two days after crossing the coral sea, 4th January, we sighted the Papuan
coasts. On this occasion, Captain Nemo informed me that his intention was to
get into the Indian Ocean by the Strait of Torres. His communication ended
there.

The Torres Straits are nearly thirty-four leagues wide; but they are obstructed
by an innumerable quantity of islands, islets, breakers, and rocks, that make its
navigation almost impracticable; so that Captain Nemo took all needful
precautions to cross them. The Nautilus, floating betwixt wind and water, went
at a moderate pace. Her screw, like a cetacean's tail, beat the waves slowly.

Profiting by this, I and my two companions went up on to the deserted

platform. Before us was the steersman's cage, and I expected that Captain Nemo
was there directing the course of the Nautilus. I had before me the excellent
charts of the Straits of Torres, and I consulted them attentively. Round the
Nautilus the sea dashed furiously. The course of the waves, that went from
south-east to north-west at the rate of two and a half miles, broke on the coral
that showed itself here and there.

"This is a bad sea!" remarked Ned Land.

"Detestable indeed, and one that does not suit a boat like the Nautilus."

"The Captain must be very sure of his route, for I see there pieces of coral
that would do for its keel if it only touched them slightly."
 Indeed the situation was dangerous, but the Nautilus seemed to slide like
magic off these rocks. It did not follow the routes of the Astrolabe and the Zelee
exactly, for they proved fatal to Dumont d'Urville. It bore more northwards,
coasted the Islands of Murray, and came back to the south-west towards
Cumberland Passage. I thought it was going to pass it by, when, going back to
north-west, it went through a large quantity of islands and islets little known,
towards the Island Sound and Canal Mauvais.

I wondered if Captain Nemo, foolishly imprudent, would steer his vessel into
that pass where Dumont d'Urville's two corvettes touched; when, swerving
again, and cutting straight through to the west, he steered for the Island of
Gilboa.

It was then three in the afternoon. The tide began to recede, being quite full.
The Nautilus approached the island, that I still saw, with its remarkable border of
screw-pines. He stood off it at about two miles distant. Suddenly a shock
overthrew me. The Nautilus just touched a rock, and stayed immovable, laying
lightly to port side.

When I rose, I perceived Captain Nemo and his lieutenant on the platform.
They were examining the situation of the vessel, and exchanging words in their
incomprehensible dialect.

She was situated thus: Two miles, on the starboard side, appeared Gilboa,
stretching from north to west like an immense arm. Towards the south and east
some coral showed itself, left by the ebb. We had run aground, and in one of
those seas where the tides are middling—a sorry matter for the floating of the
Nautilus. However, the vessel had not suffered, for her keel was solidly joined.
But, if she could neither glide off nor move, she ran the risk of being for ever
fastened to these rocks, and then Captain Nemo's submarine vessel would be
done for.

I was reflecting thus, when the Captain, cool and calm, always master of
himself, approached me.

"An accident?" I asked.

"No; an incident."

"But an incident that will oblige you perhaps to become an inhabitant of this
land from which you flee?"

Captain Nemo looked at me curiously, and made a negative gesture, as much

as to say that nothing would force him to set foot on terra firma again. Then he
said:

"Besides, M. Aronnax, the Nautilus is not lost; it will carry you yet into the
midst of the marvels of the ocean. Our voyage is only begun, and I do not wish
to be deprived so soon of the honour of your company."

"However, Captain Nemo," I replied, without noticing the ironical turn of his
phrase, "the Nautilus ran aground in open sea. Now the tides are not strong in the
Pacific; and, if you cannot lighten the Nautilus, I do not see how it will be
reinflated."

"The tides are not strong in the Pacific: you are right there, Professor; but in
Torres Straits one finds still a difference of a yard and a half between the level of
high and low seas. To-day is 4th January, and in five days the moon will be full.
Now, I shall be very much astonished if that satellite does not raise these masses
of water sufficiently, and render me a service that I should be indebted to her
for."

Having said this, Captain Nemo, followed by his lieutenant, redescended to

the interior of the Nautilus. As to the vessel, it moved not, and was immovable,
as if the coralline polypi had already walled it up with their in destructible
cement.

"Well, sir?" said Ned Land, who came up to me after the departure of the
Captain.

"Well, friend Ned, we will wait patiently for the tide on the 9th instant; for it
appears that the moon will have the goodness to put it off again."

"Really?"

"Really."

"And this Captain is not going to cast anchor at all since the tide will
suffice?" said Conseil, simply.
 The Canadian looked at Conseil, then shrugged his shoulders.

"Sir, you may believe me when I tell you that this piece of iron will navigate
neither on nor under the sea again; it is only fit to be sold for its weight. I think,
therefore, that the time has come to part company with Captain Nemo."

"Friend Ned, I do not despair of this stout Nautilus, as you do; and in four
days we shall know what to hold to on the Pacific tides. Besides, flight might be
possible if we were in sight of the English or Provencal coast; but on the Papuan
shores, it is another thing; and it will be time enough to come to that extremity if
the Nautilus does not recover itself again, which I look upon as a grave event."

"But do they know, at least, how to act circumspectly? There is an island; on

that island there are trees; under those trees, terrestrial animals, bearers of cutlets
and roast beef, to which I would willingly give a trial."

"In this, friend Ned is right," said Conseil, "and I agree with him. Could not
master obtain permission from his friend Captain Nemo to put us on land, if only
so as not to lose the habit of treading on the solid parts of our planet?"

"I can ask him, but he will refuse."

"Will master risk it?" asked Conseil, "and we shall know how to rely upon the
Captain's amiability."

To my great surprise, Captain Nemo gave me the permission I asked for, and
he gave it very agreeably, without even exacting from me a promise to return to
the vessel; but flight across New Guinea might be very perilous, and I should not
have counselled Ned Land to attempt it. Better to be a prisoner on board the
Nautilus than to fall into the hands of the natives.

At eight o'clock, armed with guns and hatchets, we got off the Nautilus. The
sea was pretty calm; a slight breeze blew on land. Conseil and I rowing, we sped
along quickly, and Ned steered in the straight passage that the breakers left
between them. The boat was well handled, and moved rapidly.

Ned Land could not restrain his joy. He was like a prisoner that had escaped
from prison, and knew not that it was necessary to re-enter it.

"Meat! We are going to eat some meat; and what meat!" he replied. "Real
game! no, bread, indeed."

"I do not say that fish is not good; we must not abuse it; but a piece of fresh
venison, grilled on live coals, will agreeably vary our ordinary course."

"Glutton!" said Conseil, "he makes my mouth water."

"It remains to be seen," I said, "if these forests are full of game, and if the
game is not such as will hunt the hunter himself."

"Well said, M. Aronnax," replied the Canadian, whose teeth seemed

sharpened like the edge of a hatchet; "but I will eat tiger—loin of tiger—if there
is no other quadruped on this island."

"Friend Ned is uneasy about it," said Conseil.

"Whatever it may be," continued Ned Land, "every animal with four paws
without feathers, or with two paws without feathers, will be saluted by my first
shot."

"Very well! Master Land's imprudences are beginning."

"Never fear, M. Aronnax," replied the Canadian; "I do not want twenty-five
minutes to offer you a dish, of my sort."

At half-past eight the Nautilus boat ran softly aground on a heavy sand, after
having happily passed the coral reef that surrounds the Island of Gilboa.

CHAPTER XX

A FEW DAYS ON LAND

I was much impressed on touching land. Ned Land tried the soil with his feet,
as if to take possession of it. However, it was only two months before that we
had become, according to Captain Nemo, "passengers on board the Nautilus,"
but, in reality, prisoners of its commander.
 In a few minutes we were within musket-shot of the coast. The whole horizon
was hidden behind a beautiful curtain of forests. Enormous trees, the trunks of
which attained a height of 200 feet, were tied to each other by garlands of
bindweed, real natural hammocks, which a light breeze rocked. They were
mimosas, figs, hibisci, and palm trees, mingled together in profusion; and under
the shelter of their verdant vault grew orchids, leguminous plants, and ferns.

But, without noticing all these beautiful specimens of Papuan flora, the
Canadian abandoned the agreeable for the useful. He discovered a coco-tree,
beat down some of the fruit, broke them, and we drunk the milk and ate the nut
with a satisfaction that protested against the ordinary food on the Nautilus.

"Excellent!" said Ned Land.

"Exquisite!" replied Conseil.

"And I do not think," said the Canadian, "that he would object to our
introducing a cargo of coco-nuts on board."

"I do not think he would, but he would not taste them."

"So much the worse for him," said Conseil.

"And so much the better for us," replied Ned Land. "There will be more for
us."

"One word only, Master Land," I said to the harpooner, who was beginning to
ravage another coco-nut tree. "Coco-nuts are good things, but before filling the
canoe with them it would be wise to reconnoitre and see if the island does not
produce some substance not less useful. Fresh vegetables would be welcome on
board the Nautilus."

"Master is right," replied Conseil; "and I propose to reserve three places in

our vessel, one for fruits, the other for vegetables, and the third for the venison,
of which I have not yet seen the smallest specimen."

"Conseil, we must not despair," said the Canadian.

"Let us continue," I returned, "and lie in wait. Although the island seems
uninhabited, it might still contain some individuals that would be less hard than
we on the nature of game."

"Ho! ho!" said Ned Land, moving his jaws significantly.

"Well, Ned!" said Conseil.

"My word!" returned the Canadian, "I begin to understand the charms of
anthropophagy."

"Ned! Ned! what are you saying? You, a man-eater? I should not feel safe
with you, especially as I share your cabin. I might perhaps wake one day to find
myself half devoured."

"Friend Conseil, I like you much, but not enough to eat you unnecessarily."

"I would not trust you," replied Conseil. "But enough. We must absolutely
bring down some game to satisfy this cannibal, or else one of these fine
mornings, master will find only pieces of his servant to serve him."

While we were talking thus, we were penetrating the sombre arches of the
forest, and for two hours we surveyed it in all directions.

Chance rewarded our search for eatable vegetables, and one of the most
useful products of the tropical zones furnished us with precious food that we
missed on board. I would speak of the bread-fruit tree, very abundant in the
island of Gilboa; and I remarked chiefly the variety destitute of seeds, which
bears in Malaya the name of "rima."

Ned Land knew these fruits well. He had already eaten many during his
numerous voyages, and he knew how to prepare the eatable substance.
Moreover, the sight of them excited him, and he could contain himself no longer.

"Master," he said, "I shall die if I do not taste a little of this bread-fruit pie."

"Taste it, friend Ned—taste it as you want. We are here to make experiments
—make them."

"It won't take long," said the Canadian.

And, provided with a lentil, he lighted a fire of dead wood that crackled
joyously. During this time, Conseil and I chose the best fruits of the bread-fruit.
Some had not then attained a sufficient degree of maturity; and their thick skin
covered a white but rather fibrous pulp. Others, the greater number yellow and
gelatinous, waited only to be picked.

These fruits enclosed no kernel. Conseil brought a dozen to Ned Land, who
placed them on a coal fire, after having cut them in thick slices, and while doing
this repeating:

"You will see, master, how good this bread is. More so when one has been
deprived of it so long. It is not even bread," added he, "but a delicate pastry. You
have eaten none, master?"

"No, Ned."

"Very well, prepare yourself for a juicy thing. If you do not come for more, I
am no longer the king of harpooners."

After some minutes, the part of the fruits that was exposed to the fire was
completely roasted. The interior looked like a white pasty, a sort of soft crumb,
the flavour of which was like that of an artichoke.

It must be confessed this bread was excellent, and I ate of it with great relish.

"What time is it now?" asked the Canadian.

"Two o'clock at least," replied Conseil.

"How time flies on firm ground!" sighed Ned Land.

"Let us be off," replied Conseil.

We returned through the forest, and completed our collection by a raid upon
the cabbage-palms, that we gathered from the tops of the trees, little beans that I
recognised as the "abrou" of the Malays, and yams of a superior quality.

We were loaded when we reached the boat. But Ned Land did not find his
provisions sufficient. Fate, however, favoured us. Just as we were pushing off, he
perceived several trees, from twenty-five to thirty feet high, a species of palm-
tree.
 At last, at five o'clock in the evening, loaded with our riches, we quitted the
shore, and half an hour after we hailed the Nautilus. No one appeared on our
arrival. The enormous iron-plated cylinder seemed deserted. The provisions
embarked, I descended to my chamber, and after supper slept soundly.

The next day, 6th January, nothing new on board. Not a sound inside, not a
sign of life. The boat rested along the edge, in the same place in which we had
left it. We resolved to return to the island. Ned Land hoped to be more fortunate
than on the day before with regard to the hunt, and wished to visit another part of
the forest.

At dawn we set off. The boat, carried on by the waves that flowed to shore,
reached the island in a few minutes.

We landed, and, thinking that it was better to give in to the Canadian, we

followed Ned Land, whose long limbs threatened to distance us. He wound up
the coast towards the west: then, fording some torrents, he gained the high plain
that was bordered with admirable forests. Some kingfishers were rambling along
the water-courses, but they would not let themselves be approached. Their
circumspection proved to me that these birds knew what to expect from bipeds
of our species, and I concluded that, if the island was not inhabited, at least
human beings occasionally frequented it.

After crossing a rather large prairie, we arrived at the skirts of a little wood
that was enlivened by the songs and flight of a large number of birds.

"There are only birds," said Conseil.

"But they are eatable," replied the harpooner.

"I do not agree with you, friend Ned, for I see only parrots there."

"Friend Conseil," said Ned, gravely, "the parrot is like pheasant to those who
have nothing else."

"And," I added, "this bird, suitably prepared, is worth knife and fork."

Indeed, under the thick foliage of this wood, a world of parrots were flying
from branch to branch, only needing a careful education to speak the human
language. For the moment, they were chattering with parrots of all colours, and
grave cockatoos, who seemed to meditate upon some philosophical problem,
whilst brilliant red lories passed like a piece of bunting carried away by the
breeze, papuans, with the finest azure colours, and in all a variety of winged
things most charming to behold, but few eatable.

However, a bird peculiar to these lands, and which has never passed the limits
of the Arrow and Papuan islands, was wanting in this collection. But fortune
reserved it for me before long.

After passing through a moderately thick copse, we found a plain obstructed

with bushes. I saw then those magnificent birds, the disposition of whose long
feathers obliges them to fly against the wind. Their undulating flight, graceful
aerial curves, and the shading of their colours, attracted and charmed one's looks.
I had no trouble in recognising them.

"Birds of paradise!" I exclaimed.

The Malays, who carry on a great trade in these birds with the Chinese, have
several means that we could not employ for taking them. Sometimes they put
snares on the top of high trees that the birds of paradise prefer to frequent.
Sometimes they catch them with a viscous birdlime that paralyses their
movements. They even go so far as to poison the fountains that the birds
generally drink from. But we were obliged to fire at them during flight, which
gave us few chances to bring them down; and, indeed, we vainly exhausted one
half our ammunition.

About eleven o'clock in the morning, the first range of mountains that form
the centre of the island was traversed, and we had killed nothing. Hunger drove
us on. The hunters had relied on the products of the chase, and they were wrong.
Happily Conseil, to his great surprise, made a double shot and secured breakfast.
He brought down a white pigeon and a wood-pigeon, which, cleverly plucked
and suspended from a skewer, was roasted before a red fire of dead wood. While
these interesting birds were cooking, Ned prepared the fruit of the bread-tree.
Then the wood-pigeons were devoured to the bones, and declared excellent. The
nutmeg, with which they are in the habit of stuffing their crops, flavours their
flesh and renders it delicious eating.

"Now, Ned, what do you miss now?"

"Some four-footed game, M. Aronnax. All these pigeons are only side-dishes
and trifles; and until I have killed an animal with cutlets I shall not be content."

"Nor I, Ned, if I do not catch a bird of paradise."

"Let us continue hunting," replied Conseil. "Let us go towards the sea. We

have arrived at the first declivities of the mountains, and I think we had better
regain the region of forests."

That was sensible advice, and was followed out. After walking for one hour
we had attained a forest of sago-trees. Some inoffensive serpents glided away
from us. The birds of paradise fled at our approach, and truly I despaired of
getting near one when Conseil, who was walking in front, suddenly bent down,
uttered a triumphal cry, and came back to me bringing a magnificent specimen.

"Ah! bravo, Conseil!"

"Master is very good."

"No, my boy; you have made an excellent stroke. Take one of these living
birds, and carry it in your hand."

"If master will examine it, he will see that I have not deserved great merit."

"Why, Conseil?"

"Because this bird is as drunk as a quail."

"Drunk!"

"Yes, sir; drunk with the nutmegs that it devoured under the nutmeg-tree,
under which I found it. See, friend Ned, see the monstrous effects of
intemperance!"

"By Jove!" exclaimed the Canadian, "because I have drunk gin for two
months, you must needs reproach me!"

However, I examined the curious bird. Conseil was right. The bird, drunk
with the juice, was quite powerless. It could not fly; it could hardly walk.

This bird belonged to the most beautiful of the eight species that are found in
Papua and in the neighbouring islands. It was the "large emerald bird, the most
rare kind." It measured three feet in length. Its head was comparatively small, its
eyes placed near the opening of the beak, and also small. But the shades of
colour were beautiful, having a yellow beak, brown feet and claws, nut-coloured
wings with purple tips, pale yellow at the back of the neck and head, and
emerald colour at the throat, chestnut on the breast and belly. Two horned,
downy nets rose from below the tail, that prolonged the long light feathers of
admirable fineness, and they completed the whole of this marvellous bird, that
the natives have poetically named the "bird of the sun."

But if my wishes were satisfied by the possession of the bird of paradise, the
Canadian's were not yet. Happily, about two o'clock, Ned Land brought down a
magnificent hog; from the brood of those the natives call "bari-outang." The
animal came in time for us to procure real quadruped meat, and he was well
received. Ned Land was very proud of his shot. The hog, hit by the electric ball,
fell stone dead. The Canadian skinned and cleaned it properly, after having taken
half a dozen cutlets, destined to furnish us with a grilled repast in the evening.
Then the hunt was resumed, which was still more marked by Ned and Conseil's
exploits.

Indeed, the two friends, beating the bushes, roused a herd of kangaroos that
fled and bounded along on their elastic paws. But these animals did not take to
flight so rapidly but what the electric capsule could stop their course.

"Ah, Professor!" cried Ned Land, who was carried away by the delights of
the chase, "what excellent game, and stewed, too! What a supply for the
Nautilus! Two! three! five down! And to think that we shall eat that flesh, and
that the idiots on board shall not have a crumb!"

I think that, in the excess of his joy, the Canadian, if he had not talked so
much, would have killed them all. But he contented himself with a single dozen
of these interesting marsupians. These animals were small. They were a species
of those "kangaroo rabbits" that live habitually in the hollows of trees, and
whose speed is extreme; but they are moderately fat, and furnish, at least,
estimable food. We were very satisfied with the results of the hunt. Happy Ned
proposed to return to this enchanting island the next day, for he wished to
depopulate it of all the eatable quadrupeds. But he had reckoned without his
host.
 At six o'clock in the evening we had regained the shore; our boat was moored
to the usual place. The Nautilus, like a long rock, emerged from the waves two
miles from the beach. Ned Land, without waiting, occupied himself about the
important dinner business. He understood all about cooking well. The "bari-
outang," grilled on the coals, soon scented the air with a delicious odour.

Indeed, the dinner was excellent. Two wood-pigeons completed this

extraordinary menu. The sago pasty, the artocarpus bread, some mangoes, half a
dozen pineapples, and the liquor fermented from some coco-nuts, overjoyed us. I
even think that my worthy companions' ideas had not all the plainness desirable.

"Suppose we do not return to the Nautilus this evening?" said Conseil.

"Suppose we never return?" added Ned Land.

Just then a stone fell at our feet and cut short the harpooner's proposition.

CHAPTER XXI

CAPTAIN NEMO'S THUNDERBOLT

We looked at the edge of the forest without rising, my hand stopping in the
action of putting it to my mouth, Ned Land's completing its office.

"Stones do not fall from the sky," remarked Conseil, "or they would merit the
name aerolites."

A second stone, carefully aimed, that made a savoury pigeon's leg fall from
Conseil's hand, gave still more weight to his observation. We all three arose,
shouldered our guns, and were ready to reply to any attack.

"Are they apes?" cried Ned Land.

"Very nearly—they are savages."

"To the boat!" I said, hurrying to the sea.

 It was indeed necessary to beat a retreat, for about twenty natives armed with
bows and slings appeared on the skirts of a copse that masked the horizon to the
right, hardly a hundred steps from us.

Our boat was moored about sixty feet from us. The savages approached us,
not running, but making hostile demonstrations. Stones and arrows fell thickly.

Ned Land had not wished to leave his provisions; and, in spite of his
imminent danger, his pig on one side and kangaroos on the other, he went
tolerably fast. In two minutes we were on the shore. To load the boat with
provisions and arms, to push it out to sea, and ship the oars, was the work of an
instant. We had not gone two cable-lengths, when a hundred savages, howling
and gesticulating, entered the water up to their waists. I watched to see if their
apparition would attract some men from the Nautilus on to the platform. But no.
The enormous machine, lying off, was absolutely deserted.

Twenty minutes later we were on board. The panels were open. After making
the boat fast, we entered into the interior of the Nautilus.

I descended to the drawing-room, from whence I heard some chords. Captain

Nemo was there, bending over his organ, and plunged in a musical ecstasy.

"Captain!"

He did not hear me.

"Captain!" I said, touching his hand.

He shuddered, and, turning round, said, "Ah! it is you, Professor? Well, have
you had a good hunt, have you botanised successfully?"

"Yes Captain; but we have unfortunately brought a troop of bipeds, whose

vicinity troubles me."

"What bipeds?"

"Savages."

"Savages!" he echoed, ironically. "So you are astonished, Professor, at having

set foot on a strange land and finding savages? Savages! where are there not
any? Besides, are they worse than others, these whom you call savages?"

"But Captain——"

"How many have you counted?"

"A hundred at least."

"M. Aronnax," replied Captain Nemo, placing his fingers on the organ stops,
"when all the natives of Papua are assembled on this shore, the Nautilus will
have nothing to fear from their attacks."

The Captain's fingers were then running over the keys of the instrument, and
I remarked that he touched only the black keys, which gave his melodies an
essentially Scotch character. Soon he had forgotten my presence, and had
plunged into a reverie that I did not disturb. I went up again on to the platform:
night had already fallen; for, in this low latitude, the sun sets rapidly and without
twilight. I could only see the island indistinctly; but the numerous fires, lighted
on the beach, showed that the natives did not think of leaving it. I was alone for
several hours, sometimes thinking of the natives—but without any dread of
them, for the imperturbable confidence of the Captain was catching—sometimes
forgetting them to admire the splendours of the night in the tropics. My
remembrances went to France in the train of those zodiacal stars that would
shine in some hours' time. The moon shone in the midst of the constellations of
the zenith.

The night slipped away without any mischance, the islanders frightened no
doubt at the sight of a monster aground in the bay. The panels were open, and
would have offered an easy access to the interior of the Nautilus.

At six o'clock in the morning of the 8th January I went up on to the platform.
The dawn was breaking. The island soon showed itself through the dissipating
fogs, first the shore, then the summits.

The natives were there, more numerous than on the day before—five or six
hundred perhaps—some of them, profiting by the low water, had come on to the
coral, at less than two cable-lengths from the Nautilus. I distinguished them
easily; they were true Papuans, with athletic figures, men of good race, large
high foreheads, large, but not broad and flat, and white teeth. Their woolly hair,
with a reddish tinge, showed off on their black shining bodies like those of the
Nubians. From the lobes of their ears, cut and distended, hung chaplets of bones.
Most of these savages were naked. Amongst them, I remarked some women,
dressed from the hips to knees in quite a crinoline of herbs, that sustained a
vegetable waistband. Some chiefs had ornamented their necks with a crescent
and collars of glass beads, red and white; nearly all were armed with bows,
arrows, and shields and carried on their shoulders a sort of net containing those
round stones which they cast from their slings with great skill. One of these
chiefs, rather near to the Nautilus, examined it attentively. He was, perhaps, a
"mado" of high rank, for he was draped in a mat of banana-leaves, notched
round the edges, and set off with brilliant colours.

I could easily have knocked down this native, who was within a short length;
but I thought that it was better to wait for real hostile demonstrations. Between
Europeans and savages, it is proper for the Europeans to parry sharply, not to
attack.

During low water the natives roamed about near the Nautilus, but were not
troublesome; I heard them frequently repeat the word "Assai," and by their
gestures I understood that they invited me to go on land, an invitation that I
declined.

So that, on that day, the boat did not push off, to the great displeasure of
Master Land, who could not complete his provisions.

This adroit Canadian employed his time in preparing the viands and meat that
he had brought off the island. As for the savages, they returned to the shore
about eleven o'clock in the morning, as soon as the coral tops began to disappear
under the rising tide; but I saw their numbers had increased considerably on the
shore. Probably they came from the neighbouring islands, or very likely from
Papua. However, I had not seen a single native canoe. Having nothing better to
do, I thought of dragging these beautiful limpid waters, under which I saw a
profusion of shells, zoophytes, and marine plants. Moreover, it was the last day
that the Nautilus would pass in these parts, if it float in open sea the next day,
according to Captain Nemo's promise.

I therefore called Conseil, who brought me a little light drag, very like those
for the oyster fishery. Now to work! For two hours we fished unceasingly, but
without bringing up any rarities. The drag was filled with midas-ears, harps,
melames, and particularly the most beautiful hammers I have ever seen. We also
brought up some sea-slugs, pearl-oysters, and a dozen little turtles that were
reserved for the pantry on board.

But just when I expected it least, I put my hand on a wonder, I might say a
natural deformity, very rarely met with. Conseil was just dragging, and his net
came up filled with divers ordinary shells, when, all at once, he saw me plunge
my arm quickly into the net, to draw out a shell, and heard me utter a cry.

"What is the matter, sir?" he asked in surprise. "Has master been bitten?"

"No, my boy; but I would willingly have given a finger for my discovery."

"What discovery?"

"This shell," I said, holding up the object of my triumph.

"It is simply an olive porphyry, genus olive, order of the pectinibranchidae,

class of gasteropods, sub-class mollusca."

"Yes, Conseil; but, instead of being rolled from right to left, this olive turns
from left to right."

"Is it possible?"

"Yes, my boy; it is a left shell."

Shells are all right-handed, with rare exceptions; and, when by chance their
spiral is left, amateurs are ready to pay their weight in gold.

Conseil and I were absorbed in the contemplation of our treasure, and I was
promising myself to enrich the museum with it, when a stone unfortunately
thrown by a native struck against, and broke, the precious object in Conseil's
hand. I uttered a cry of despair! Conseil took up his gun, and aimed at a savage
who was poising his sling at ten yards from him. I would have stopped him, but
his blow took effect and broke the bracelet of amulets which encircled the arm of
the savage.

"Conseil!" cried I. "Conseil!"

"Well, sir! do you not see that the cannibal has commenced the attack?"
 "A shell is not worth the life of a man," said I.

"Ah! the scoundrel!" cried Conseil; "I would rather he had broken my
shoulder!"

Conseil was in earnest, but I was not of his opinion. However, the situation
had changed some minutes before, and we had not perceived. A score of canoes
surrounded the Nautilus. These canoes, scooped out of the trunk of a tree, long,
narrow, well adapted for speed, were balanced by means of a long bamboo pole,
which floated on the water. They were managed by skilful, half-naked paddlers,
and I watched their advance with some uneasiness. It was evident that these
Papuans had already had dealings with the Europeans and knew their ships. But
this long iron cylinder anchored in the bay, without masts or chimneys, what
could they think of it? Nothing good, for at first they kept at a respectful
distance. However, seeing it motionless, by degrees they took courage, and
sought to familiarise themselves with it. Now this familiarity was precisely what
it was necessary to avoid. Our arms, which were noiseless, could only produce a
moderate effect on the savages, who have little respect for aught but blustering
things. The thunderbolt without the reverberations of thunder would frighten
man but little, though the danger lies in the lightning, not in the noise.

At this moment the canoes approached the Nautilus, and a shower of arrows
alighted on her.

I went down to the saloon, but found no one there. I ventured to knock at the
door that opened into the Captain's room. "Come in," was the answer.

I entered, and found Captain Nemo deep in algebraical calculations of x and

other quantities.

"I am disturbing you," said I, for courtesy's sake.

"That is true, M. Aronnax," replied the Captain; "but I think you have serious
reasons for wishing to see me?"

"Very grave ones; the natives are surrounding us in their canoes, and in a few
minutes we shall certainly be attacked by many hundreds of savages."

"Ah!" said Captain Nemo quietly, "they are come with their canoes?"
 "Yes, sir."

"Well, sir, we must close the hatches."

"Exactly, and I came to say to you——"

"Nothing can be more simple," said Captain Nemo. And, pressing an electric
button, he transmitted an order to the ship's crew.

"It is all done, sir," said he, after some moments. "The pinnace is ready, and
the hatches are closed. You do not fear, I imagine, that these gentlemen could
stave in walls on which the balls of your frigate have had no effect?"

"No, Captain; but a danger still exists."

"What is that, sir?"

"It is that to-morrow, at about this hour, we must open the hatches to renew
the air of the Nautilus. Now, if, at this moment, the Papuans should occupy the
platform, I do not see how you could prevent them from entering."

"Then, sir, you suppose that they will board us?"

"I am certain of it."

"Well, sir, let them come. I see no reason for hindering them. After all, these
Papuans are poor creatures, and I am unwilling that my visit to the island should
cost the life of a single one of these wretches."

Upon that I was going away; But Captain Nemo detained me, and asked me
to sit down by him. He questioned me with interest about our excursions on
shore, and our hunting; and seemed not to understand the craving for meat that
possessed the Canadian. Then the conversation turned on various subjects, and,
without being more communicative, Captain Nemo showed himself more
amiable.

Amongst other things, we happened to speak of the situation of the Nautilus,

run aground in exactly the same spot in this strait where Dumont d'Urville was
nearly lost. Apropos of this:
 "This D'Urville was one of your great sailors," said the Captain to me, "one
of your most intelligent navigators. He is the Captain Cook of you Frenchmen.
Unfortunate man of science, after having braved the icebergs of the South Pole,
the coral reefs of Oceania, the cannibals of the Pacific, to perish miserably in a
railway train! If this energetic man could have reflected during the last moments
of his life, what must have been uppermost in his last thoughts, do you
suppose?"

So speaking, Captain Nemo seemed moved, and his emotion gave me a better
opinion of him. Then, chart in hand, we reviewed the travels of the French
navigator, his voyages of circumnavigation, his double detention at the South
Pole, which led to the discovery of Adelaide and Louis Philippe, and fixing the
hydrographical bearings of the principal islands of Oceania.

"That which your D'Urville has done on the surface of the seas," said Captain
Nemo, "that have I done under them, and more easily, more completely than he.
The Astrolabe and the Zelee, incessantly tossed about by the hurricane, could not
be worth the Nautilus, quiet repository of labour that she is, truly motionless in
the midst of the waters.

"To-morrow," added the Captain, rising, "to-morrow, at twenty minutes to

three p.m., the Nautilus shall float, and leave the Strait of Torres uninjured."

Having curtly pronounced these words, Captain Nemo bowed slightly. This
was to dismiss me, and I went back to my room.

There I found Conseil, who wished to know the result of my interview with
the Captain.

"My boy," said I, "when I feigned to believe that his Nautilus was threatened
by the natives of Papua, the Captain answered me very sarcastically. I have but
one thing to say to you: Have confidence in him, and go to sleep in peace."

"Have you no need of my services, sir?"

"No, my friend. What is Ned Land doing?"

"If you will excuse me, sir," answered Conseil, "friend Ned is busy making a
kangaroo-pie which will be a marvel."
 I remained alone and went to bed, but slept indifferently. I heard the noise of
the savages, who stamped on the platform, uttering deafening cries. The night
passed thus, without disturbing the ordinary repose of the crew. The presence of
these cannibals affected them no more than the soldiers of a masked battery care
for the ants that crawl over its front.

At six in the morning I rose. The hatches had not been opened. The inner air
was not renewed, but the reservoirs, filled ready for any emergency, were now
resorted to, and discharged several cubic feet of oxygen into the exhausted
atmosphere of the Nautilus.

I worked in my room till noon, without having seen Captain Nemo, even for
an instant. On board no preparations for departure were visible.

I waited still some time, then went into the large saloon. The clock marked
half-past two. In ten minutes it would be high-tide: and, if Captain Nemo had not
made a rash promise, the Nautilus would be immediately detached. If not, many
months would pass ere she could leave her bed of coral.

However, some warning vibrations began to be felt in the vessel. I heard the
keel grating against the rough calcareous bottom of the coral reef.

At five-and-twenty minutes to three, Captain Nemo appeared in the saloon.

"We are going to start," said he.

"Ah!" replied I.

"I have given the order to open the hatches."

"And the Papuans?"

"The Papuans?" answered Captain Nemo, slightly shrugging his shoulders.

"Will they not come inside the Nautilus?"

"How?"

"Only by leaping over the hatches you have opened."

 "M. Aronnax," quietly answered Captain Nemo, "they will not enter the
hatches of the Nautilus in that way, even if they were open."

I looked at the Captain.

"You do not understand?" said he.

"Hardly."

"Well, come and you will see."

I directed my steps towards the central staircase. There Ned Land and Conseil
were slyly watching some of the ship's crew, who were opening the hatches,
while cries of rage and fearful vociferations resounded outside.

The port lids were pulled down outside. Twenty horrible faces appeared. But
the first native who placed his hand on the stair-rail, struck from behind by some
invisible force, I know not what, fled, uttering the most fearful cries and making
the wildest contortions.

Ten of his companions followed him. They met with the same fate.

Conseil was in ecstasy. Ned Land, carried away by his violent instincts,
rushed on to the staircase. But the moment he seized the rail with both hands, he,
in his turn, was overthrown.

"I am struck by a thunderbolt," cried he, with an oath.

This explained all. It was no rail; but a metallic cable charged with electricity
from the deck communicating with the platform. Whoever touched it felt a
powerful shock—and this shock would have been mortal if Captain Nemo had
discharged into the conductor the whole force of the current. It might truly be
said that between his assailants and himself he had stretched a network of
electricity which none could pass with impunity.

Meanwhile, the exasperated Papuans had beaten a retreat paralysed with

terror. As for us, half laughing, we consoled and rubbed the unfortunate Ned
Land, who swore like one possessed.

But at this moment the Nautilus, raised by the last waves of the tide, quitted
her coral bed exactly at the fortieth minute fixed by the Captain. Her screw
swept the waters slowly and majestically. Her speed increased gradually, and,
sailing on the surface of the ocean, she quitted safe and sound the dangerous
passes of the Straits of Torres.

CHAPTER XXII

"AEGRI SOMNIA"

The following day 10th January, the Nautilus continued her course between
two seas, but with such remarkable speed that I could not estimate it at less than
thirty-five miles an hour. The rapidity of her screw was such that I could neither
follow nor count its revolutions. When I reflected that this marvellous electric
agent, after having afforded motion, heat, and light to the Nautilus, still protected
her from outward attack, and transformed her into an ark of safety which no
profane hand might touch without being thunderstricken, my admiration was
unbounded, and from the structure it extended to the engineer who had called it
into existence.

Our course was directed to the west, and on the 11th of January we doubled
Cape Wessel, situation in 135° long. and 10° S. lat., which forms the east point
of the Gulf of Carpentaria. The reefs were still numerous, but more equalised,
and marked on the chart with extreme precision. The Nautilus easily avoided the
breakers of Money to port and the Victoria reefs to starboard, placed at 130°
long. and on the 10th parallel, which we strictly followed.

On the 13th of January, Captain Nemo arrived in the Sea of Timor, and
recognised the island of that name in 122° long.

From this point the direction of the Nautilus inclined towards the south-west.
Her head was set for the Indian Ocean. Where would the fancy of Captain Nemo
carry us next? Would he return to the coast of Asia or would he approach again
the shores of Europe? Improbable conjectures both, to a man who fled from
inhabited continents. Then would he descend to the south? Was he going to
double the Cape of Good Hope, then Cape Horn, and finally go as far as the
Antarctic pole? Would he come back at last to the Pacific, where his Nautilus
could sail free and independently? Time would show.

After having skirted the sands of Cartier, of Hibernia, Seringapatam, and

Scott, last efforts of the solid against the liquid element, on the 14th of January
we lost sight of land altogether. The speed of the Nautilus was considerably
abated, and with irregular course she sometimes swam in the bosom of the
waters, sometimes floated on their surface.

During this period of the voyage, Captain Nemo made some interesting
experiments on the varied temperature of the sea, in different beds. Under
ordinary conditions these observations are made by means of rather complicated
instruments, and with somewhat doubtful results, by means of thermometrical
sounding-leads, the glasses often breaking under the pressure of the water, or an
apparatus grounded on the variations of the resistance of metals to the electric
currents. Results so obtained could not be correctly calculated. On the contrary,
Captain Nemo went himself to test the temperature in the depths of the sea, and
his thermometer, placed in communication with the different sheets of water,
gave him the required degree immediately and accurately.

It was thus that, either by overloading her reservoirs or by descending

obliquely by means of her inclined planes, the Nautilus successively attained the
depth of three, four, five, seven, nine, and ten thousand yards, and the definite
result of this experience was that the sea preserved an average temperature of
four degrees and a half at a depth of five thousand fathoms under all latitudes.

On the 16th of January, the Nautilus seemed becalmed only a few yards
beneath the surface of the waves. Her electric apparatus remained inactive and
her motionless screw left her to drift at the mercy of the currents. I supposed that
the crew was occupied with interior repairs, rendered necessary by the violence
of the mechanical movements of the machine.

My companions and I then witnessed a curious spectacle. The hatches of the

saloon were open, and, as the beacon light of the Nautilus was not in action, a
dim obscurity reigned in the midst of the waters. I observed the state of the sea,
under these conditions, and the largest fish appeared to me no more than scarcely
defined shadows, when the Nautilus found herself suddenly transported into full
light. I thought at first that the beacon had been lighted, and was casting its
electric radiance into the liquid mass. I was mistaken, and after a rapid survey
perceived my error.

The Nautilus floated in the midst of a phosphorescent bed which, in this

obscurity, became quite dazzling. It was produced by myriads of luminous
animalculae, whose brilliancy was increased as they glided over the metallic hull
of the vessel. I was surprised by lightning in the midst of these luminous sheets,
as though they had been rivulets of lead melted in an ardent furnace or metallic
masses brought to a white heat, so that, by force of contrast, certain portions of
light appeared to cast a shade in the midst of the general ignition, from which all
shade seemed banished. No; this was not the calm irradiation of our ordinary
lightning. There was unusual life and vigour: this was truly living light!

In reality, it was an infinite agglomeration of coloured infusoria, of veritable

globules of jelly, provided with a threadlike tentacle, and of which as many as
twenty-five thousand have been counted in less than two cubic half-inches of
water.

During several hours the Nautilus floated in these brilliant waves, and our
admiration increased as we watched the marine monsters disporting themselves
like salamanders. I saw there in the midst of this fire that burns not the swift and
elegant porpoise (the indefatigable clown of the ocean), and some swordfish ten
feet long, those prophetic heralds of the hurricane whose formidable sword
would now and then strike the glass of the saloon. Then appeared the smaller
fish, the balista, the leaping mackerel, wolf-thorn-tails, and a hundred others
which striped the luminous atmosphere as they swam. This dazzling spectacle
was enchanting! Perhaps some atmospheric condition increased the intensity of
this phenomenon. Perhaps some storm agitated the surface of the waves. But at
this depth of some yards, the Nautilus was unmoved by its fury and reposed
peacefully in still water.

So we progressed, incessantly charmed by some new marvel. The days

passed rapidly away, and I took no account of them. Ned, according to habit,
tried to vary the diet on board. Like snails, we were fixed to our shells, and I
declare it is easy to lead a snail's life.

Thus this life seemed easy and natural, and we thought no longer of the life
we led on land; but something happened to recall us to the strangeness of our
situation.
 On the 18th of January, the Nautilus was in 105° long. and 15° S. lat. The
weather was threatening, the sea rough and rolling. There was a strong east
wind. The barometer, which had been going down for some days, foreboded a
coming storm. I went up on to the platform just as the second lieutenant was
taking the measure of the horary angles, and waited, according to habit till the
daily phrase was said. But on this day it was exchanged for another phrase not
less incomprehensible. Almost directly, I saw Captain Nemo appear with a glass,
looking towards the horizon.

For some minutes he was immovable, without taking his eye off the point of
observation. Then he lowered his glass and exchanged a few words with his
lieutenant. The latter seemed to be a victim to some emotion that he tried in vain
to repress. Captain Nemo, having more command over himself, was cool. He
seemed, too, to be making some objections to which the lieutenant replied by
formal assurances. At least I concluded so by the difference of their tones and
gestures. For myself, I had looked carefully in the direction indicated without
seeing anything. The sky and water were lost in the clear line of the horizon.

However, Captain Nemo walked from one end of the platform to the other,
without looking at me, perhaps without seeing me. His step was firm, but less
regular than usual. He stopped sometimes, crossed his arms, and observed the
sea. What could he be looking for on that immense expanse?

The Nautilus was then some hundreds of miles from the nearest coast.

The lieutenant had taken up the glass and examined the horizon steadfastly,
going and coming, stamping his foot and showing more nervous agitation than
his superior officer. Besides, this mystery must necessarily be solved, and before
long; for, upon an order from Captain Nemo, the engine, increasing its
propelling power, made the screw turn more rapidly.
 Just then the lieutenant drew the Captain's attention again. The latter stopped
walking and directed his glass towards the place indicated. He looked long. I felt
very much puzzled, and descended to the drawing-room, and took out an
excellent telescope that I generally used. Then, leaning on the cage of the watch-
light that jutted out from the front of the platform, set myself to look over all the
line of the sky and sea.

But my eye was no sooner applied to the glass than it was quickly snatched
out of my hands.

I turned round. Captain Nemo was before me, but I did not know him. His
face was transfigured. His eyes flashed sullenly; his teeth were set; his stiff body,
clenched fists, and head shrunk between his shoulders, betrayed the violent
agitation that pervaded his whole frame. He did not move. My glass, fallen from
his hands, had rolled at his feet.

Had I unwittingly provoked this fit of anger? Did this incomprehensible

person imagine that I had discovered some forbidden secret? No; I was not the
object of this hatred, for he was not looking at me; his eye was steadily fixed
upon the impenetrable point of the horizon. At last Captain Nemo recovered
himself. His agitation subsided. He addressed some words in a foreign language
to his lieutenant, then turned to me. "M. Aronnax," he said, in rather an
imperious tone, "I require you to keep one of the conditions that bind you to
me."

"What is it, Captain?"

"You must be confined, with your companions, until I think fit to release
you."

"You are the master," I replied, looking steadily at him. "But may I ask you
one question?"

"None, sir."

There was no resisting this imperious command, it would have been useless. I
went down to the cabin occupied by Ned Land and Conseil, and told them the
Captain's determination. You may judge how this communication was received
by the Canadian.
 But there was not time for altercation. Four of the crew waited at the door,
and conducted us to that cell where we had passed our first night on board the
Nautilus.

Ned Land would have remonstrated, but the door was shut upon him.

"Will master tell me what this means?" asked Conseil.

I told my companions what had passed. They were as much astonished as I,

and equally at a loss how to account for it.

Meanwhile, I was absorbed in my own reflections, and could think of nothing

but the strange fear depicted in the Captain's countenance. I was utterly at a loss
to account for it, when my cogitations were disturbed by these words from Ned
Land:

"Hallo! breakfast is ready."

And indeed the table was laid. Evidently Captain Nemo had given this order
at the same time that he had hastened the speed of the Nautilus.

"Will master permit me to make a recommendation?" asked Conseil.

"Yes, my boy."

"Well, it is that master breakfasts. It is prudent, for we do not know what may
happen."

"You are right, Conseil."

"Unfortunately," said Ned Land, "they have only given us the ship's fare."

"Friend Ned," asked Conseil, "what would you have said if the breakfast had
been entirely forgotten?"

This argument cut short the harpooner's recriminations.

We sat down to table. The meal was eaten in silence.

Just then the luminous globe that lighted the cell went out, and left us in total
darkness. Ned Land was soon asleep, and what astonished me was that Conseil
went off into a heavy slumber. I was thinking what could have caused his
irresistible drowsiness, when I felt my brain becoming stupefied. In spite of my
efforts to keep my eyes open, they would close. A painful suspicion seized me.
Evidently soporific substances had been mixed with the food we had just taken.
Imprisonment was not enough to conceal Captain Nemo's projects from us, sleep
was more necessary. I then heard the panels shut. The undulations of the sea,
which caused a slight rolling motion, ceased. Had the Nautilus quitted the
surface of the ocean? Had it gone back to the motionless bed of water? I tried to
resist sleep. It was impossible. My breathing grew weak. I felt a mortal cold
freeze my stiffened and half-paralysed limbs. My eye lids, like leaden caps, fell
over my eyes. I could not raise them; a morbid sleep, full of hallucinations,
bereft me of my being. Then the visions disappeared, and left me in complete
insensibility.

CHAPTER XXIII

THE CORAL KINGDOM

The next day I woke with my head singularly clear. To my great surprise, I
was in my own room. My companions, no doubt, had been reinstated in their
cabin, without having perceived it any more than I. Of what had passed during
the night they were as ignorant as I was, and to penetrate this mystery I only
reckoned upon the chances of the future.

I then thought of quitting my room. Was I free again or a prisoner? Quite

free. I opened the door, went to the half-deck, went up the central stairs. The
panels, shut the evening before, were open. I went on to the platform.

Ned Land and Conseil waited there for me. I questioned them; they knew
nothing. Lost in a heavy sleep in which they had been totally unconscious, they
had been astonished at finding themselves in their cabin.

As for the Nautilus, it seemed quiet and mysterious as ever. It floated on the
surface of the waves at a moderate pace. Nothing seemed changed on board.
 The second lieutenant then came on to the platform, and gave the usual order
below.

As for Captain Nemo, he did not appear.

Of the people on board, I only saw the impassive steward, who served me
with his usual dumb regularity.

About two o'clock, I was in the drawing-room, busied in arranging my notes,

when the Captain opened the door and appeared. I bowed. He made a slight
inclination in return, without speaking. I resumed my work, hoping that he
would perhaps give me some explanation of the events of the preceding night.
He made none. I looked at him. He seemed fatigued; his heavy eyes had not
been refreshed by sleep; his face looked very sorrowful. He walked to and fro,
sat down and got up again, took a chance book, put it down, consulted his
instruments without taking his habitual notes, and seemed restless and uneasy.
At last, he came up to me, and said:

"Are you a doctor, M. Aronnax?"

I so little expected such a question that I stared some time at him without
answering.

"Are you a doctor?" he repeated. "Several of your colleagues have studied

medicine."

"Well," said I, "I am a doctor and resident surgeon to the hospital. I practised
several years before entering the museum."

"Very well, sir."

My answer had evidently satisfied the Captain. But, not knowing what he
would say next, I waited for other questions, reserving my answers according to
circumstances.

"M. Aronnax, will you consent to prescribe for one of my men?" he asked.

"Is he ill?"

"Yes."
 "I am ready to follow you."

"Come, then."

I own my heart beat, I do not know why. I saw certain connection between
the illness of one of the crew and the events of the day before; and this mystery
interested me at least as much as the sick man.

Captain Nemo conducted me to the poop of the Nautilus, and took me into a
cabin situated near the sailors' quarters.

There, on a bed, lay a man about forty years of age, with a resolute
expression of countenance, a true type of an Anglo-Saxon.

I leant over him. He was not only ill, he was wounded. His head, swathed in
bandages covered with blood, lay on a pillow. I undid the bandages, and the
wounded man looked at me with his large eyes and gave no sign of pain as I did
it. It was a horrible wound. The skull, shattered by some deadly weapon, left the
brain exposed, which was much injured. Clots of blood had formed in the
bruised and broken mass, in colour like the dregs of wine.

There was both contusion and suffusion of the brain. His breathing was slow,
and some spasmodic movements of the muscles agitated his face. I felt his pulse.
It was intermittent. The extremities of the body were growing cold already, and I
saw death must inevitably ensue. After dressing the unfortunate man's wounds, I
readjusted the bandages on his head, and turned to Captain Nemo.

"What caused this wound?" I asked.

"What does it signify?" he replied, evasively. "A shock has broken one of the
levers of the engine, which struck myself. But your opinion as to his state?"

I hesitated before giving it.

"You may speak," said the Captain. "This man does not understand French."

I gave a last look at the wounded man.

"He will be dead in two hours."

 "Can nothing save him?"

"Nothing."

Captain Nemo's hand contracted, and some tears glistened in his eyes, which
I thought incapable of shedding any.

For some moments I still watched the dying man, whose life ebbed slowly.
His pallor increased under the electric light that was shed over his death-bed. I
looked at his intelligent forehead, furrowed with premature wrinkles, produced
probably by misfortune and sorrow. I tried to learn the secret of his life from the
last words that escaped his lips.

"You can go now, M. Aronnax," said the Captain.

I left him in the dying man's cabin, and returned to my room much affected
by this scene. During the whole day, I was haunted by uncomfortable suspicions,
and at night I slept badly, and between my broken dreams I fancied I heard
distant sighs like the notes of a funeral psalm. Were they the prayers of the dead,
murmured in that language that I could not understand?

The next morning I went on to the bridge. Captain Nemo was there before
me. As soon as he perceived me he came to me.

"Professor, will it be convenient to you to make a submarine excursion to-

day?"

"With my companions?" I asked.

"If they like."

"We obey your orders, Captain."

"Will you be so good then as to put on your cork jackets?"

It was not a question of dead or dying. I rejoined Ned Land and Conseil, and
told them of Captain Nemo's proposition. Conseil hastened to accept it, and this
time the Canadian seemed quite willing to follow our example.

It was eight o'clock in the morning. At half-past eight we were equipped for
this new excursion, and provided with two contrivances for light and breathing.
The double door was open; and, accompanied by Captain Nemo, who was
followed by a dozen of the crew, we set foot, at a depth of about thirty feet, on
the solid bottom on which the Nautilus rested.

A slight declivity ended in an uneven bottom, at fifteen fathoms depth. This

bottom differed entirely from the one I had visited on my first excursion under
the waters of the Pacific Ocean. Here, there was no fine sand, no submarine
prairies, no sea-forest. I immediately recognised that marvellous region in
which, on that day, the Captain did the honours to us. It was the coral kingdom.

The light produced a thousand charming varieties, playing in the midst of the
branches that were so vividly coloured. I seemed to see the membraneous and
cylindrical tubes tremble beneath the undulation of the waters. I was tempted to
gather their fresh petals, ornamented with delicate tentacles, some just blown,
the others budding, while a small fish, swimming swiftly, touched them slightly,
like flights of birds. But if my hand approached these living flowers, these
animated, sensitive plants, the whole colony took alarm. The white petals re-
entered their red cases, the flowers faded as I looked, and the bush changed into
a block of stony knobs.

Chance had thrown me just by the most precious specimens of the zoophyte.
This coral was more valuable than that found in the Mediterranean, on the coasts
of France, Italy and Barbary. Its tints justified the poetical names of "Flower of
Blood," and "Froth of Blood," that trade has given to its most beautiful
productions. Coral is sold for L20 per ounce; and in this place the watery beds
would make the fortunes of a company of coral-divers. This precious matter,
often confused with other polypi, formed then the inextricable plots called
"macciota," and on which I noticed several beautiful specimens of pink coral.

But soon the bushes contract, and the arborisations increase. Real petrified
thickets, long joints of fantastic architecture, were disclosed before us. Captain
Nemo placed himself under a dark gallery, where by a slight declivity we
reached a depth of a hundred yards. The light from our lamps produced
sometimes magical effects, following the rough outlines of the natural arches
and pendants disposed like lustres, that were tipped with points of fire.

At last, after walking two hours, we had attained a depth of about three
hundred yards, that is to say, the extreme limit on which coral begins to form.
But there was no isolated bush, nor modest brushwood, at the bottom of lofty
trees. It was an immense forest of large mineral vegetations, enormous petrified
trees, united by garlands of elegant sea-bindweed, all adorned with clouds and
reflections. We passed freely under their high branches, lost in the shade of the
waves.

Captain Nemo had stopped. I and my companions halted, and, turning round,
I saw his men were forming a semi-circle round their chief. Watching attentively,
I observed that four of them carried on their shoulders an object of an oblong
shape.

We occupied, in this place, the centre of a vast glade surrounded by the lofty
foliage of the submarine forest. Our lamps threw over this place a sort of clear
twilight that singularly elongated the shadows on the ground. At the end of the
glade the darkness increased, and was only relieved by little sparks reflected by
the points of coral.

Ned Land and Conseil were near me. We watched, and I thought I was going
to witness a strange scene. On observing the ground, I saw that it was raised in
certain places by slight excrescences encrusted with limy deposits, and disposed
with a regularity that betrayed the hand of man.

In the midst of the glade, on a pedestal of rocks roughly piled up, stood a
cross of coral that extended its long arms that one might have thought were made
of petrified blood. Upon a sign from Captain Nemo one of the men advanced;
and at some feet from the cross he began to dig a hole with a pickaxe that he
took from his belt. I understood all! This glade was a cemetery, this hole a tomb,
this oblong object the body of the man who had died in the night! The Captain
and his men had come to bury their companion in this general resting-place, at
the bottom of this inaccessible ocean!

The grave was being dug slowly; the fish fled on all sides while their retreat
was being thus disturbed; I heard the strokes of the pickaxe, which sparkled
when it hit upon some flint lost at the bottom of the waters. The hole was soon
large and deep enough to receive the body. Then the bearers approached; the
body, enveloped in a tissue of white linen, was lowered into the damp grave.
Captain Nemo, with his arms crossed on his breast, and all the friends of him
who had loved them, knelt in prayer.
 The grave was then filled in with the rubbish taken from the ground, which
formed a slight mound. When this was done, Captain Nemo and his men rose;
then, approaching the grave, they knelt again, and all extended their hands in
sign of a last adieu. Then the funeral procession returned to the Nautilus, passing
under the arches of the forest, in the midst of thickets, along the coral bushes,
and still on the ascent. At last the light of the ship appeared, and its luminous
track guided us to the Nautilus. At one o'clock we had returned.

As soon as I had changed my clothes I went up on to the platform, and, a prey

to conflicting emotions, I sat down near the binnacle. Captain Nemo joined me. I
rose and said to him:

"So, as I said he would, this man died in the night?"

"Yes, M. Aronnax."

"And he rests now, near his companions, in the coral cemetery?"

"Yes, forgotten by all else, but not by us. We dug the grave, and the polypi
undertake to seal our dead for eternity." And, burying his face quickly in his
hands, he tried in vain to suppress a sob. Then he added: "Our peaceful cemetery
is there, some hundred feet below the surface of the waves."

"Your dead sleep quietly, at least, Captain, out of the reach of sharks."

"Yes, sir, of sharks and men," gravely replied the Captain.

 PART TWO

CHAPTER I

THE INDIAN OCEAN

We now come to the second part of our journey under the sea. The first ended
with the moving scene in the coral cemetery which left such a deep impression
on my mind. Thus, in the midst of this great sea, Captain Nemo's life was
passing, even to his grave, which he had prepared in one of its deepest abysses.
There, not one of the ocean's monsters could trouble the last sleep of the crew of
the Nautilus, of those friends riveted to each other in death as in life. "Nor any
man, either," had added the Captain. Still the same fierce, implacable defiance
towards human society!

I could no longer content myself with the theory which satisfied Conseil.

That worthy fellow persisted in seeing in the Commander of the Nautilus one
of those unknown savants who return mankind contempt for indifference. For
him, he was a misunderstood genius who, tired of earth's deceptions, had taken
refuge in this inaccessible medium, where he might follow his instincts freely.
To my mind, this explains but one side of Captain Nemo's character. Indeed, the
mystery of that last night during which we had been chained in prison, the sleep,
and the precaution so violently taken by the Captain of snatching from my eyes
the glass I had raised to sweep the horizon, the mortal wound of the man, due to
an unaccountable shock of the Nautilus, all put me on a new track. No; Captain
Nemo was not satisfied with shunning man. His formidable apparatus not only
suited his instinct of freedom, but perhaps also the design of some terrible
retaliation.

At this moment nothing is clear to me; I catch but a glimpse of light amidst
all the darkness, and I must confine myself to writing as events shall dictate.
 That day, the 24th of January, 1868, at noon, the second officer came to take
the altitude of the sun. I mounted the platform, lit a cigar, and watched the
operation. It seemed to me that the man did not understand French; for several
times I made remarks in a loud voice, which must have drawn from him some
involuntary sign of attention, if he had understood them; but he remained
undisturbed and dumb.

As he was taking observations with the sextant, one of the sailors of the
Nautilus (the strong man who had accompanied us on our first submarine
excursion to the Island of Crespo) came to clean the glasses of the lantern. I
examined the fittings of the apparatus, the strength of which was increased a
hundredfold by lenticular rings, placed similar to those in a lighthouse, and
which projected their brilliance in a horizontal plane. The electric lamp was
combined in such a way as to give its most powerful light. Indeed, it was
produced in vacuo, which insured both its steadiness and its intensity. This
vacuum economised the graphite points between which the luminous arc was
developed—an important point of economy for Captain Nemo, who could not
easily have replaced them; and under these conditions their waste was
imperceptible. When the Nautilus was ready to continue its submarine journey, I
went down to the saloon. The panel was closed, and the course marked direct
west.

We were furrowing the waters of the Indian Ocean, a vast liquid plain, with a
surface of 1,200,000,000 of acres, and whose waters are so clear and transparent
that any one leaning over them would turn giddy. The Nautilus usually floated
between fifty and a hundred fathoms deep. We went on so for some days. To
anyone but myself, who had a great love for the sea, the hours would have
seemed long and monotonous; but the daily walks on the platform, when I
steeped myself in the reviving air of the ocean, the sight of the rich waters
through the windows of the saloon, the books in the library, the compiling of my
memoirs, took up all my time, and left me not a moment of ennui or weariness.

For some days we saw a great number of aquatic birds, sea-mews or gulls.
Some were cleverly killed and, prepared in a certain way, made very acceptable
water-game. Amongst large-winged birds, carried a long distance from all lands
and resting upon the waves from the fatigue of their flight, I saw some
magnificent albatrosses, uttering discordant cries like the braying of an ass, and
birds belonging to the family of the long-wings.
 As to the fish, they always provoked our admiration when we surprised the
secrets of their aquatic life through the open panels. I saw many kinds which I
never before had a chance of observing.

I shall notice chiefly ostracions peculiar to the Red Sea, the Indian Ocean,
and that part which washes the coast of tropical America. These fishes, like the
tortoise, the armadillo, the sea-hedgehog, and the Crustacea, are protected by a
breastplate which is neither chalky nor stony, but real bone. In some it takes the
form of a solid triangle, in others of a solid quadrangle. Amongst the triangular I
saw some an inch and a half in length, with wholesome flesh and a delicious
flavour; they are brown at the tail, and yellow at the fins, and I recommend their
introduction into fresh water, to which a certain number of sea-fish easily
accustom themselves. I would also mention quadrangular ostracions, having on
the back four large tubercles; some dotted over with white spots on the lower
part of the body, and which may be tamed like birds; trigons provided with
spikes formed by the lengthening of their bony shell, and which, from their
strange gruntings, are called "seapigs"; also dromedaries with large humps in the
shape of a cone, whose flesh is very tough and leathery.

I now borrow from the daily notes of Master Conseil. "Certain fish of the
genus petrodon peculiar to those seas, with red backs and white chests, which
are distinguished by three rows of longitudinal filaments; and some electrical,
seven inches long, decked in the liveliest colours. Then, as specimens of other
kinds, some ovoides, resembling an egg of a dark brown colour, marked with
white bands, and without tails; diodons, real sea-porcupines, furnished with
spikes, and capable of swelling in such a way as to look like cushions bristling
with darts; hippocampi, common to every ocean; some pegasi with lengthened
snouts, which their pectoral fins, being much elongated and formed in the shape
of wings, allow, if not to fly, at least to shoot into the air; pigeon spatulae, with
tails covered with many rings of shell; macrognathi with long jaws, an excellent
fish, nine inches long, and bright with most agreeable colours; pale-coloured
calliomores, with rugged heads; and plenty of chaetpdons, with long and tubular
muzzles, which kill insects by shooting them, as from an air-gun, with a single
drop of water. These we may call the flycatchers of the seas.

"In the eighty-ninth genus of fishes, classed by Lacepede, belonging to the

second lower class of bony, characterised by opercules and bronchial
membranes, I remarked the scorpaena, the head of which is furnished with
spikes, and which has but one dorsal fin; these creatures are covered, or not, with
little shells, according to the sub-class to which they belong. The second sub-
class gives us specimens of didactyles fourteen or fifteen inches in length, with
yellow rays, and heads of a most fantastic appearance. As to the first sub-class, it
gives several specimens of that singular looking fish appropriately called a
'seafrog,' with large head, sometimes pierced with holes, sometimes swollen with
protuberances, bristling with spikes, and covered with tubercles; it has irregular
and hideous horns; its body and tail are covered with callosities; its sting makes
a dangerous wound; it is both repugnant and horrible to look at."

From the 21st to the 23rd of January the Nautilus went at the rate of two
hundred and fifty leagues in twenty-four hours, being five hundred and forty
miles, or twenty-two miles an hour. If we recognised so many different varieties
of fish, it was because, attracted by the electric light, they tried to follow us; the
greater part, however, were soon distanced by our speed, though some kept their
place in the waters of the Nautilus for a time. The morning of the 24th, in 12° 5'
S. lat., and 94° 33' long., we observed Keeling Island, a coral formation, planted
with magnificent cocos, and which had been visited by Mr. Darwin and Captain
Fitzroy. The Nautilus skirted the shores of this desert island for a little distance.
Its nets brought up numerous specimens of polypi and curious shells of
mollusca. Some precious productions of the species of delphinulae enriched the
treasures of Captain Nemo, to which I added an astraea punctifera, a kind of
parasite polypus often found fixed to a shell.

Soon Keeling Island disappeared from the horizon, and our course was
directed to the north-west in the direction of the Indian Peninsula.

From Keeling Island our course was slower and more variable, often taking
us into great depths. Several times they made use of the inclined planes, which
certain internal levers placed obliquely to the waterline. In that way we went
about two miles, but without ever obtaining the greatest depths of the Indian Sea,
which soundings of seven thousand fathoms have never reached. As to the
temperature of the lower strata, the thermometer invariably indicated 4° above
zero. I only observed that in the upper regions the water was always colder in the
high levels than at the surface of the sea.

On the 25th of January the ocean was entirely deserted; the Nautilus passed
the day on the surface, beating the waves with its powerful screw and making
them rebound to a great height. Who under such circumstances would not have
taken it for a gigantic cetacean? Three parts of this day I spent on the platform. I
watched the sea. Nothing on the horizon, till about four o'clock a steamer
running west on our counter. Her masts were visible for an instant, but she could
not see the Nautilus, being too low in the water. I fancied this steamboat
belonged to the P.O. Company, which runs from Ceylon to Sydney, touching at
King George's Point and Melbourne.

At five o'clock in the evening, before that fleeting twilight which binds night
to day in tropical zones, Conseil and I were astonished by a curious spectacle.

It was a shoal of argonauts travelling along on the surface of the ocean. We

could count several hundreds. They belonged to the tubercle kind which are
peculiar to the Indian seas.

These graceful molluscs moved backwards by means of their locomotive

tube, through which they propelled the water already drawn in. Of their eight
tentacles, six were elongated, and stretched out floating on the water, whilst the
other two, rolled up flat, were spread to the wing like a light sail. I saw their
spiral-shaped and fluted shells, which Cuvier justly compares to an elegant skiff.
A boat indeed! It bears the creature which secretes it without its adhering to it.

For nearly an hour the Nautilus floated in the midst of this shoal of molluscs.
Then I know not what sudden fright they took. But as if at a signal every sail was
furled, the arms folded, the body drawn in, the shells turned over, changing their
centre of gravity, and the whole fleet disappeared under the waves. Never did the
ships of a squadron manoeuvre with more unity.

At that moment night fell suddenly, and the reeds, scarcely raised by the
breeze, lay peaceably under the sides of the Nautilus.

The next day, 26th of January, we cut the equator at the eighty-second
meridian and entered the northern hemisphere. During the day a formidable
troop of sharks accompanied us, terrible creatures, which multiply in these seas
and make them very dangerous. They were "cestracio philippi" sharks, with
brown backs and whitish bellies, armed with eleven rows of teeth—eyed sharks
—their throat being marked with a large black spot surrounded with white like
an eye. There were also some Isabella sharks, with rounded snouts marked with
dark spots. These powerful creatures often hurled themselves at the windows of
the saloon with such violence as to make us feel very insecure. At such times
Ned Land was no longer master of himself. He wanted to go to the surface and
harpoon the monsters, particularly certain smooth-hound sharks, whose mouth is
studded with teeth like a mosaic; and large tiger-sharks nearly six yards long, the
last named of which seemed to excite him more particularly. But the Nautilus,
accelerating her speed, easily left the most rapid of them behind.

The 27th of January, at the entrance of the vast Bay of Bengal, we met
repeatedly a forbidding spectacle, dead bodies floating on the surface of the
water. They were the dead of the Indian villages, carried by the Ganges to the
level of the sea, and which the vultures, the only undertakers of the country, had
not been able to devour. But the sharks did not fail to help them at their funeral
work.

About seven o'clock in the evening, the Nautilus, half-immersed, was sailing
in a sea of milk. At first sight the ocean seemed lactified. Was it the effect of the
lunar rays? No; for the moon, scarcely two days old, was still lying hidden under
the horizon in the rays of the sun. The whole sky, though lit by the sidereal rays,
seemed black by contrast with the whiteness of the waters.

Conseil could not believe his eyes, and questioned me as to the cause of this
strange phenomenon. Happily I was able to answer him.

"It is called a milk sea," I explained. "A large extent of white wavelets often
to be seen on the coasts of Amboyna, and in these parts of the sea."

"But, sir," said Conseil, "can you tell me what causes such an effect? for I
suppose the water is not really turned into milk."

"No, my boy; and the whiteness which surprises you is caused only by the
presence of myriads of infusoria, a sort of luminous little worm, gelatinous and
without colour, of the thickness of a hair, and whose length is not more than
seven-thousandths of an inch. These insects adhere to one another sometimes for
several leagues."

"Several leagues!" exclaimed Conseil.

"Yes, my boy; and you need not try to compute the number of these infusoria.
You will not be able, for, if I am not mistaken, ships have floated on these milk
seas for more than forty miles."

Towards midnight the sea suddenly resumed its usual colour; but behind us,
even to the limits of the horizon, the sky reflected the whitened waves, and for a
long time seemed impregnated with the vague glimmerings of an aurora borealis.

CHAPTER II

A NOVEL PROPOSAL OF CAPTAIN NEMO'S

On the 28th of February, when at noon the Nautilus came to the surface of the
sea, in 9° 4' N. lat., there was land in sight about eight miles to westward. The
first thing I noticed was a range of mountains about two thousand feet high, the
shapes of which were most capricious. On taking the bearings, I knew that we
were nearing the island of Ceylon, the pearl which hangs from the lobe of the
Indian Peninsula.

Captain Nemo and his second appeared at this moment. The Captain glanced
at the map. Then turning to me, said:

"The Island of Ceylon, noted for its pearl-fisheries. Would you like to visit
one of them, M. Aronnax?"

"Certainly, Captain."

"Well, the thing is easy. Though, if we see the fisheries, we shall not see the
fishermen. The annual exportation has not yet begun. Never mind, I will give
orders to make for the Gulf of Manaar, where we shall arrive in the night."

The Captain said something to his second, who immediately went out. Soon
the Nautilus returned to her native element, and the manometer showed that she
was about thirty feet deep.

"Well, sir," said Captain Nemo, "you and your companions shall visit the
Bank of Manaar, and if by chance some fisherman should be there, we shall see
him at work."

"Agreed, Captain!"
 "By the bye, M. Aronnax you are not afraid of sharks?"

"Sharks!" exclaimed I.

This question seemed a very hard one.

"Well?" continued Captain Nemo.

"I admit, Captain, that I am not yet very familiar with that kind of fish."

"We are accustomed to them," replied Captain Nemo, "and in time you will
be too. However, we shall be armed, and on the road we may be able to hunt
some of the tribe. It is interesting. So, till to-morrow, sir, and early."

This said in a careless tone, Captain Nemo left the saloon. Now, if you were
invited to hunt the bear in the mountains of Switzerland, what would you say?

"Very well! to-morrow we will go and hunt the bear." If you were asked to
hunt the lion in the plains of Atlas, or the tiger in the Indian jungles, what would
you say?

"Ha! ha! it seems we are going to hunt the tiger or the lion!" But when you
are invited to hunt the shark in its natural element, you would perhaps reflect
before accepting the invitation. As for myself, I passed my hand over my
forehead, on which stood large drops of cold perspiration. "Let us reflect," said I,
"and take our time. Hunting otters in submarine forests, as we did in the Island
of Crespo, will pass; but going up and down at the bottom of the sea, where one
is almost certain to meet sharks, is quite another thing! I know well that in
certain countries, particularly in the Andaman Islands, the negroes never hesitate
to attack them with a dagger in one hand and a running noose in the other; but I
also know that few who affront those creatures ever return alive. However, I am
not a negro, and if I were I think a little hesitation in this case would not be ill-
timed."

At this moment Conseil and the Canadian entered, quite composed, and even
joyous. They knew not what awaited them.

"Faith, sir," said Ned Land, "your Captain Nemo—the devil take him!—has
just made us a very pleasant offer."
 "Ah!" said I, "you know?"

"If agreeable to you, sir," interrupted Conseil, "the commander of the

Nautilus has invited us to visit the magnificent Ceylon fisheries to-morrow, in
your company; he did it kindly, and behaved like a real gentleman."

"He said nothing more?"

"Nothing more, sir, except that he had already spoken to you of this little
walk."

"Sir," said Conseil, "would you give us some details of the pearl fishery?"

"As to the fishing itself," I asked, "or the incidents, which?"

"On the fishing," replied the Canadian; "before entering upon the ground, it is
as well to know something about it."

"Very well; sit down, my friends, and I will teach you."

Ned and Conseil seated themselves on an ottoman, and the first thing the
Canadian asked was:

"Sir, what is a pearl?"

"My worthy Ned," I answered, "to the poet, a pearl is a tear of the sea; to the
Orientals, it is a drop of dew solidified; to the ladies, it is a jewel of an oblong
shape, of a brilliancy of mother-of-pearl substance, which they wear on their
fingers, their necks, or their ears; for the chemist it is a mixture of phosphate and
carbonate of lime, with a little gelatine; and lastly, for naturalists, it is simply a
morbid secretion of the organ that produces the mother-of-pearl amongst certain
bivalves."

"Branch of molluscs," said Conseil.

"Precisely so, my learned Conseil; and, amongst these testacea the earshell,
the tridacnae, the turbots, in a word, all those which secrete mother-of-pearl, that
is, the blue, bluish, violet, or white substance which lines the interior of their
shells, are capable of producing pearls."
 "Mussels too?" asked the Canadian.

"Yes, mussels of certain waters in Scotland, Wales, Ireland, Saxony,

Bohemia, and France."

"Good! For the future I shall pay attention," replied the Canadian.

"But," I continued, "the particular mollusc which secretes the pearl is the
pearl-oyster, the meleagrina margaritiferct, that precious pintadine. The pearl is
nothing but a nacreous formation, deposited in a globular form, either adhering
to the oyster shell, or buried in the folds of the creature. On the shell it is fast; in
the flesh it is loose; but always has for a kernel a small hard substance, may be a
barren egg, may be a grain of sand, around which the pearly matter deposits
itself year after year successively, and by thin concentric layers."

"Are many pearls found in the same oyster?" asked Conseil.

"Yes, my boy. Some are a perfect casket. One oyster has been mentioned,
though I allow myself to doubt it, as having contained no less than a hundred and
fifty sharks."

"A hundred and fifty sharks!" exclaimed Ned Land.

"Did I say sharks?" said I hurriedly. "I meant to say a hundred and fifty
pearls. Sharks would not be sense."

"Certainly not," said Conseil; "but will you tell us now by what means they
extract these pearls?"

"They proceed in various ways. When they adhere to the shell, the fishermen
often pull them off with pincers; but the most common way is to lay the oysters
on mats of the seaweed which covers the banks. Thus they die in the open air;
and at the end of ten days they are in a forward state of decomposition. They are
then plunged into large reservoirs of sea-water; then they are opened and
washed."

"The price of these pearls varies according to their size?" asked Conseil.

"Not only according to their size," I answered, "but also according to their
shape, their water (that is, their colour), and their lustre: that is, that bright and
diapered sparkle which makes them so charming to the eye. The most beautiful
are called virgin pearls, or paragons. They are formed alone in the tissue of the
mollusc, are white, often opaque, and sometimes have the transparency of an
opal; they are generally round or oval. The round are made into bracelets, the
oval into pendants, and, being more precious, are sold singly. Those adhering to
the shell of the oyster are more irregular in shape, and are sold by weight. Lastly,
in a lower order are classed those small pearls known under the name of seed-
pearls; they are sold by measure, and are especially used in embroidery for
church ornaments."

"But," said Conseil, "is this pearl-fishery dangerous?"

"No," I answered, quickly; "particularly if certain precautions are taken."

"What does one risk in such a calling?" said Ned Land, "the swallowing of
some mouthfuls of sea-water?"

"As you say, Ned. By the bye," said I, trying to take Captain Nemo's careless
tone, "are you afraid of sharks, brave Ned?"

"I!" replied the Canadian; "a harpooner by profession? It is my trade to make

light of them."

"But," said I, "it is not a question of fishing for them with an iron-swivel,
hoisting them into the vessel, cutting off their tails with a blow of a chopper,
ripping them up, and throwing their heart into the sea!"

"Then, it is a question of——"

"Precisely."

"In the water?"

"In the water."

"Faith, with a good harpoon! You know, sir, these sharks are ill-fashioned
beasts. They turn on their bellies to seize you, and in that time——"

Ned Land had a way of saying "seize" which made my blood run cold.
 "Well, and you, Conseil, what do you think of sharks?"

"Me!" said Conseil. "I will be frank, sir."

"So much the better," thought I.

"If you, sir, mean to face the sharks, I do not see why your faithful servant
should not face them with you."

CHAPTER III

A PEARL OF TEN MILLIONS

The next morning at four o'clock I was awakened by the steward whom
Captain Nemo had placed at my service. I rose hurriedly, dressed, and went into
the saloon.

Captain Nemo was awaiting me.

"M. Aronnax," said he, "are you ready to start?"

"I am ready."

"Then please to follow me."

"And my companions, Captain?"

"They have been told and are waiting."

"Are we not to put on our diver's dresses?" asked I.

"Not yet. I have not allowed the Nautilus to come too near this coast, and we
are some distance from the Manaar Bank; but the boat is ready, and will take us
to the exact point of disembarking, which will save us a long way. It carries our
diving apparatus, which we will put on when we begin our submarine journey."
 Captain Nemo conducted me to the central staircase, which led on the
platform. Ned and Conseil were already there, delighted at the idea of the
"pleasure party" which was preparing. Five sailors from the Nautilus, with their
oars, waited in the boat, which had been made fast against the side.

The night was still dark. Layers of clouds covered the sky, allowing but few
stars to be seen. I looked on the side where the land lay, and saw nothing but a
dark line enclosing three parts of the horizon, from south-west to north west. The
Nautilus, having returned during the night up the western coast of Ceylon, was
now west of the bay, or rather gulf, formed by the mainland and the Island of
Manaar. There, under the dark waters, stretched the pintadine bank, an
inexhaustible field of pearls, the length of which is more than twenty miles.

Captain Nemo, Ned Land, Conseil, and I took our places in the stern of the
boat. The master went to the tiller; his four companions leaned on their oars, the
painter was cast off, and we sheered off.

The boat went towards the south; the oarsmen did not hurry. I noticed that
their strokes, strong in the water, only followed each other every ten seconds,
according to the method generally adopted in the navy. Whilst the craft was
running by its own velocity, the liquid drops struck the dark depths of the waves
crisply like spats of melted lead. A little billow, spreading wide, gave a slight roll
to the boat, and some samphire reeds flapped before it.

We were silent. What was Captain Nemo thinking of? Perhaps of the land he
was approaching, and which he found too near to him, contrary to the Canadian's
opinion, who thought it too far off. As to Conseil, he was merely there from
curiosity.

About half-past five the first tints on the horizon showed the upper line of
coast more distinctly. Flat enough in the east, it rose a little to the south. Five
miles still lay between us, and it was indistinct owing to the mist on the water. At
six o'clock it became suddenly daylight, with that rapidity peculiar to tropical
regions, which know neither dawn nor twilight. The solar rays pierced the
curtain of clouds, piled up on the eastern horizon, and the radiant orb rose
rapidly. I saw land distinctly, with a few trees scattered here and there. The boat
neared Manaar Island, which was rounded to the south. Captain Nemo rose from
his seat and watched the sea.
 At a sign from him the anchor was dropped, but the chain scarcely ran, for it
was little more than a yard deep, and this spot was one of the highest points of
the bank of pintadines.

"Here we are, M. Aronnax," said Captain Nemo. "You see that enclosed bay?
Here, in a month will be assembled the numerous fishing boats of the exporters,
and these are the waters their divers will ransack so boldly. Happily, this bay is
well situated for that kind of fishing. It is sheltered from the strongest winds; the
sea is never very rough here, which makes it favourable for the diver's work. We
will now put on our dresses, and begin our walk."

I did not answer, and, while watching the suspected waves, began with the
help of the sailors to put on my heavy sea-dress. Captain Nemo and my
companions were also dressing. None of the Nautilus men were to accompany us
on this new excursion.

Soon we were enveloped to the throat in india-rubber clothing; the air

apparatus fixed to our backs by braces. As to the Ruhmkorff apparatus, there was
no necessity for it. Before putting my head into the copper cap, I had asked the
question of the Captain.

"They would be useless," he replied. "We are going to no great depth, and the
solar rays will be enough to light our walk. Besides, it would not be prudent to
carry the electric light in these waters; its brilliancy might attract some of the
dangerous inhabitants of the coast most inopportunely."

As Captain Nemo pronounced these words, I turned to Conseil and Ned

Land. But my two friends had already encased their heads in the metal cap, and
they could neither hear nor answer.

One last question remained to ask of Captain Nemo.

"And our arms?" asked I; "our guns?"

"Guns! What for? Do not mountaineers attack the bear with a dagger in their
hand, and is not steel surer than lead? Here is a strong blade; put it in your belt,
and we start."

I looked at my companions; they were armed like us, and, more than that,
Ned Land was brandishing an enormous harpoon, which he had placed in the
boat before leaving the Nautilus.

Then, following the Captain's example, I allowed myself to be dressed in the

heavy copper helmet, and our reservoirs of air were at once in activity. An
instant after we were landed, one after the other, in about two yards of water
upon an even sand. Captain Nemo made a sign with his hand, and we followed
him by a gentle declivity till we disappeared under the waves.

Over our feet, like coveys of snipe in a bog, rose shoals of fish, of the genus
monoptera, which have no other fins but their tail. I recognized the Javanese, a
real serpent two and a half feet long, of a livid colour underneath, and which
might easily be mistaken for a conger eel if it were not for the golden stripes on
its side. In the genus stromateus, whose bodies are very flat and oval, I saw some
of the most brilliant colours, carrying their dorsal fin like a scythe; an excellent
eating fish, which, dried and pickled, is known by the name of Karawade; then
some tranquebars, belonging to the genus apsiphoroides, whose body is covered
with a shell cuirass of eight longitudinal plates.

The heightening sun lit the mass of waters more and more. The soil changed
by degrees. To the fine sand succeeded a perfect causeway of boulders, covered
with a carpet of molluscs and zoophytes. Amongst the specimens of these
branches I noticed some placenae, with thin unequal shells, a kind of ostracion
peculiar to the Red Sea and the Indian Ocean; some orange lucinae with rounded
shells; rockfish three feet and a half long, which raised themselves under the
waves like hands ready to seize one. There were also some panopyres, slightly
luminous; and lastly, some oculines, like magnificent fans, forming one of the
richest vegetations of these seas.

In the midst of these living plants, and under the arbours of the hydrophytes,
were layers of clumsy articulates, particularly some raninae, whose carapace
formed a slightly rounded triangle; and some horrible looking parthenopes.

At about seven o'clock we found ourselves at last surveying the oyster-banks

on which the pearl-oysters are reproduced by millions.

Captain Nemo pointed with his hand to the enormous heap of oysters; and I
could well understand that this mine was inexhaustible, for Nature's creative
power is far beyond man's instinct of destruction. Ned Land, faithful to his
instinct, hastened to fill a net which he carried by his side with some of the finest
specimens. But we could not stop. We must follow the Captain, who seemed to
guide him self by paths known only to himself. The ground was sensibly rising,
and sometimes, on holding up my arm, it was above the surface of the sea. Then
the level of the bank would sink capriciously. Often we rounded high rocks
scarped into pyramids. In their dark fractures huge crustacea, perched upon their
high claws like some war-machine, watched us with fixed eyes, and under our
feet crawled various kinds of annelides.

At this moment there opened before us a large grotto dug in a picturesque

heap of rocks and carpeted with all the thick warp of the submarine flora. At first
it seemed very dark to me. The solar rays seemed to be extinguished by
successive gradations, until its vague transparency became nothing more than
drowned light. Captain Nemo entered; we followed. My eyes soon accustomed
themselves to this relative state of darkness. I could distinguish the arches
springing capriciously from natural pillars, standing broad upon their granite
base, like the heavy columns of Tuscan architecture. Why had our
incomprehensible guide led us to the bottom of this submarine crypt? I was soon
to know. After descending a rather sharp declivity, our feet trod the bottom of a
kind of circular pit. There Captain Nemo stopped, and with his hand indicated an
object I had not yet perceived. It was an oyster of extraordinary dimensions, a
gigantic tridacne, a goblet which could have contained a whole lake of holy-
water, a basin the breadth of which was more than two yards and a half, and
consequently larger than that ornamenting the saloon of the Nautilus. I
approached this extraordinary mollusc. It adhered by its filaments to a table of
granite, and there, isolated, it developed itself in the calm waters of the grotto. I
estimated the weight of this tridacne at 600 lb. Such an oyster would contain 30
lb. of meat; and one must have the stomach of a Gargantua to demolish some
dozens of them.

Captain Nemo was evidently acquainted with the existence of this bivalve,
and seemed to have a particular motive in verifying the actual state of this
tridacne. The shells were a little open; the Captain came near and put his dagger
between to prevent them from closing; then with his hand he raised the
membrane with its fringed edges, which formed a cloak for the creature. There,
between the folded plaits, I saw a loose pearl, whose size equalled that of a coco-
nut. Its globular shape, perfect clearness, and admirable lustre made it altogether
a jewel of inestimable value. Carried away by my curiosity, I stretched out my
hand to seize it, weigh it, and touch it; but the Captain stopped me, made a sign
of refusal, and quickly withdrew his dagger, and the two shells closed suddenly. I
then understood Captain Nemo's intention. In leaving this pearl hidden in the
mantle of the tridacne he was allowing it to grow slowly. Each year the
secretions of the mollusc would add new concentric circles. I estimated its value
at L500,000 at least.

After ten minutes Captain Nemo stopped suddenly. I thought he had halted
previously to returning. No; by a gesture he bade us crouch beside him in a deep
fracture of the rock, his hand pointed to one part of the liquid mass, which I
watched attentively.

About five yards from me a shadow appeared, and sank to the ground. The
disquieting idea of sharks shot through my mind, but I was mistaken; and once
again it was not a monster of the ocean that we had anything to do with.

It was a man, a living man, an Indian, a fisherman, a poor devil who, I

suppose, had come to glean before the harvest. I could see the bottom of his
canoe anchored some feet above his head. He dived and went up successively. A
stone held between his feet, cut in the shape of a sugar loaf, whilst a rope
fastened him to his boat, helped him to descend more rapidly. This was all his
apparatus. Reaching the bottom, about five yards deep, he went on his knees and
filled his bag with oysters picked up at random. Then he went up, emptied it,
pulled up his stone, and began the operation once more, which lasted thirty
seconds.

The diver did not see us. The shadow of the rock hid us from sight. And how
should this poor Indian ever dream that men, beings like himself, should be there
under the water watching his movements and losing no detail of the fishing?
Several times he went up in this way, and dived again. He did not carry away
more than ten at each plunge, for he was obliged to pull them from the bank to
which they adhered by means of their strong byssus. And how many of those
oysters for which he risked his life had no pearl in them! I watched him closely;
his manoeuvres were regular; and for the space of half an hour no danger
appeared to threaten him.

I was beginning to accustom myself to the sight of this interesting fishing,

when suddenly, as the Indian was on the ground, I saw him make a gesture of
terror, rise, and make a spring to return to the surface of the sea.

I understood his dread. A gigantic shadow appeared just above the

unfortunate diver. It was a shark of enormous size advancing diagonally, his eyes
on fire, and his jaws open. I was mute with horror and unable to move.

The voracious creature shot towards the Indian, who threw himself on one
side to avoid the shark's fins; but not its tail, for it struck his chest and stretched
him on the ground.

This scene lasted but a few seconds: the shark returned, and, turning on his
back, prepared himself for cutting the Indian in two, when I saw Captain Nemo
rise suddenly, and then, dagger in hand, walk straight to the monster, ready to
fight face to face with him. The very moment the shark was going to snap the
unhappy fisherman in two, he perceived his new adversary, and, turning over,
made straight towards him.

I can still see Captain Nemo's position. Holding himself well together, he
waited for the shark with admirable coolness; and, when it rushed at him, threw
himself on one side with wonderful quickness, avoiding the shock, and burying
his dagger deep into its side. But it was not all over. A terrible combat ensued.

The shark had seemed to roar, if I might say so. The blood rushed in torrents
from its wound. The sea was dyed red, and through the opaque liquid I could
distinguish nothing more. Nothing more until the moment when, like lightning, I
saw the undaunted Captain hanging on to one of the creature's fins, struggling, as
it were, hand to hand with the monster, and dealing successive blows at his
enemy, yet still unable to give a decisive one.

The shark's struggles agitated the water with such fury that the rocking
threatened to upset me.

I wanted to go to the Captain's assistance, but, nailed to the spot with horror, I
could not stir.

I saw the haggard eye; I saw the different phases of the fight. The Captain fell
to the earth, upset by the enormous mass which leant upon him. The shark's jaws
opened wide, like a pair of factory shears, and it would have been all over with
the Captain; but, quick as thought, harpoon in hand, Ned Land rushed towards
the shark and struck it with its sharp point.

The waves were impregnated with a mass of blood. They rocked under the
shark's movements, which beat them with indescribable fury. Ned Land had not
missed his aim. It was the monster's death-rattle. Struck to the heart, it struggled
in dreadful convulsions, the shock of which overthrew Conseil.

But Ned Land had disentangled the Captain, who, getting up without any
wound, went straight to the Indian, quickly cut the cord which held him to his
stone, took him in his arms, and, with a sharp blow of his heel, mounted to the
surface.

We all three followed in a few seconds, saved by a miracle, and reached the
fisherman's boat.

Captain Nemo's first care was to recall the unfortunate man to life again. I did
not think he could succeed. I hoped so, for the poor creature's immersion was not
long; but the blow from the shark's tail might have been his death-blow.

Happily, with the Captain's and Conseil's sharp friction, I saw consciousness
return by degrees. He opened his eyes. What was his surprise, his terror even, at
seeing four great copper heads leaning over him! And, above all, what must he
have thought when Captain Nemo, drawing from the pocket of his dress a bag of
pearls, placed it in his hand! This munificent charity from the man of the waters
to the poor Cingalese was accepted with a trembling hand. His wondering eyes
showed that he knew not to what super-human beings he owed both fortune and
life.

At a sign from the Captain we regained the bank, and, following the road
already traversed, came in about half an hour to the anchor which held the canoe
of the Nautilus to the earth.

Once on board, we each, with the help of the sailors, got rid of the heavy
copper helmet.

Captain Nemo's first word was to the Canadian.

"Thank you, Master Land," said he.

"It was in revenge, Captain," replied Ned Land. "I owed you that."

A ghastly smile passed across the Captain's lips, and that was all.

"To the Nautilus," said he.

 The boat flew over the waves. Some minutes after we met the shark's dead
body floating. By the black marking of the extremity of its fins, I recognised the
terrible melanopteron of the Indian Seas, of the species of shark so properly
called. It was more than twenty-five feet long; its enormous mouth occupied
one-third of its body. It was an adult, as was known by its six rows of teeth
placed in an isosceles triangle in the upper jaw.

Whilst I was contemplating this inert mass, a dozen of these voracious beasts
appeared round the boat; and, without noticing us, threw themselves upon the
dead body and fought with one another for the pieces.

At half-past eight we were again on board the Nautilus. There I reflected on

the incidents which had taken place in our excursion to the Manaar Bank.

Two conclusions I must inevitably draw from it—one bearing upon the
unparalleled courage of Captain Nemo, the other upon his devotion to a human
being, a representative of that race from which he fled beneath the sea. Whatever
he might say, this strange man had not yet succeeded in entirely crushing his
heart.

When I made this observation to him, he answered in a slightly moved tone:

"That Indian, sir, is an inhabitant of an oppressed country; and I am still, and

shall be, to my last breath, one of them!"

CHAPTER IV

THE RED SEA

In the course of the day of the 29th of January, the island of Ceylon
disappeared under the horizon, and the Nautilus, at a speed of twenty miles an
hour, slid into the labyrinth of canals which separate the Maldives from the
Laccadives. It coasted even the Island of Kiltan, a land originally coraline,
discovered by Vasco da Gama in 1499, and one of the nineteen principal islands
of the Laccadive Archipelago, situated between 10° and 14° 30' N. lat., and 69°
50' 72" E. long.

We had made 16,220 miles, or 7,500 (French) leagues from our starting-point
in the Japanese Seas.

The next day (30th January), when the Nautilus went to the surface of the
ocean there was no land in sight. Its course was N.N.E., in the direction of the
Sea of Oman, between Arabia and the Indian Peninsula, which serves as an
outlet to the Persian Gulf. It was evidently a block without any possible egress.
Where was Captain Nemo taking us to? I could not say. This, however, did not
satisfy the Canadian, who that day came to me asking where we were going.

"We are going where our Captain's fancy takes us, Master Ned."

"His fancy cannot take us far, then," said the Canadian. "The Persian Gulf has
no outlet: and, if we do go in, it will not be long before we are out again."

"Very well, then, we will come out again, Master Land; and if, after the
Persian Gulf, the Nautilus would like to visit the Red Sea, the Straits of Bab-el-
mandeb are there to give us entrance."

"I need not tell you, sir," said Ned Land, "that the Red Sea is as much closed
as the Gulf, as the Isthmus of Suez is not yet cut; and, if it was, a boat as
mysterious as ours would not risk itself in a canal cut with sluices. And again,
the Red Sea is not the road to take us back to Europe."

"But I never said we were going back to Europe."

"What do you suppose, then?"

"I suppose that, after visiting the curious coasts of Arabia and Egypt, the
Nautilus will go down the Indian Ocean again, perhaps cross the Channel of
Mozambique, perhaps off the Mascarenhas, so as to gain the Cape of Good
Hope."

"And once at the Cape of Good Hope?" asked the Canadian, with peculiar
emphasis.

"Well, we shall penetrate into that Atlantic which we do not yet know. Ah!
friend Ned, you are getting tired of this journey under the sea; you are surfeited
with the incessantly varying spectacle of submarine wonders. For my part, I shall
be sorry to see the end of a voyage which it is given to so few men to make."

For four days, till the 3rd of February, the Nautilus scoured the Sea of Oman,
at various speeds and at various depths. It seemed to go at random, as if
hesitating as to which road it should follow, but we never passed the Tropic of
Cancer.

In quitting this sea we sighted Muscat for an instant, one of the most
important towns of the country of Oman. I admired its strange aspect,
surrounded by black rocks upon which its white houses and forts stood in relief.
I saw the rounded domes of its mosques, the elegant points of its minarets, its
fresh and verdant terraces. But it was only a vision! The Nautilus soon sank
under the waves of that part of the sea.

We passed along the Arabian coast of Mahrah and Hadramaut, for a distance
of six miles, its undulating line of mountains being occasionally relieved by
some ancient ruin. The 5th of February we at last entered the Gulf of Aden, a
perfect funnel introduced into the neck of Bab-el-mandeb, through which the
Indian waters entered the Red Sea.

The 6th of February, the Nautilus floated in sight of Aden, perched upon a
promontory which a narrow isthmus joins to the mainland, a kind of inaccessible
Gibraltar, the fortifications of which were rebuilt by the English after taking
possession in 1839. I caught a glimpse of the octagon minarets of this town,
which was at one time the richest commercial magazine on the coast.

I certainly thought that Captain Nemo, arrived at this point, would back out
again; but I was mistaken, for he did no such thing, much to my surprise.

The next day, the 7th of February, we entered the Straits of Bab-el-mandeb,
the name of which, in the Arab tongue, means The Gate of Tears.

To twenty miles in breadth, it is only thirty-two in length. And for the

Nautilus, starting at full speed, the crossing was scarcely the work of an hour.
But I saw nothing, not even the Island of Perim, with which the British
Government has fortified the position of Aden. There were too many English or
French steamers of the line of Suez to Bombay, Calcutta to Melbourne, and from
Bourbon to the Mauritius, furrowing this narrow passage, for the Nautilus to
venture to show itself. So it remained prudently below. At last about noon, we
were in the waters of the Red Sea.

I would not even seek to understand the caprice which had decided Captain
Nemo upon entering the gulf. But I quite approved of the Nautilus entering it. Its
speed was lessened: sometimes it kept on the surface, sometimes it dived to
avoid a vessel, and thus I was able to observe the upper and lower parts of this
curious sea.

The 8th of February, from the first dawn of day, Mocha came in sight, now a
ruined town, whose walls would fall at a gunshot, yet which shelters here and
there some verdant date-trees; once an important city, containing six public
markets, and twenty-six mosques, and whose walls, defended by fourteen forts,
formed a girdle of two miles in circumference.

The Nautilus then approached the African shore, where the depth of the sea
was greater. There, between two waters clear as crystal, through the open panels
we were allowed to contemplate the beautiful bushes of brilliant coral and large
blocks of rock clothed with a splendid fur of green variety of sites and
landscapes along these sandbanks and algae and fuci. What an indescribable
spectacle, and what variety of sites and landscapes along these sandbanks and
volcanic islands which bound the Libyan coast! But where these shrubs appeared
in all their beauty was on the eastern coast, which the Nautilus soon gained. It
was on the coast of Tehama, for there not only did this display of zoophytes
flourish beneath the level of the sea, but they also formed picturesque
interlacings which unfolded themselves about sixty feet above the surface, more
capricious but less highly coloured than those whose freshness was kept up by
the vital power of the waters.

What charming hours I passed thus at the window of the saloon! What new
specimens of submarine flora and fauna did I admire under the brightness of our
electric lantern!

The 9th of February the Nautilus floated in the broadest part of the Red Sea,
which is comprised between Souakin, on the west coast, and Komfidah, on the
east coast, with a diameter of ninety miles.

That day at noon, after the bearings were taken, Captain Nemo mounted the
platform, where I happened to be, and I was determined not to let him go down
again without at least pressing him regarding his ulterior projects. As soon as he
saw me he approached and graciously offered me a cigar.

"Well, sir, does this Red Sea please you? Have you sufficiently observed the
wonders it covers, its fishes, its zoophytes, its parterres of sponges, and its
forests of coral? Did you catch a glimpse of the towns on its borders?"

"Yes, Captain Nemo," I replied; "and the Nautilus is wonderfully fitted for
such a study. Ah! it is an intelligent boat!"

"Yes, sir, intelligent and invulnerable. It fears neither the terrible tempests of
the Red Sea, nor its currents, nor its sandbanks."

"Certainly," said I, "this sea is quoted as one of the worst, and in the time of
the ancients, if I am not mistaken, its reputation was detestable."

"Detestable, M. Aronnax. The Greek and Latin historians do not speak

favourably of it, and Strabo says it is very dangerous during the Etesian winds
and in the rainy season. The Arabian Edrisi portrays it under the name of the
Gulf of Colzoum, and relates that vessels perished there in great numbers on the
sandbanks and that no one would risk sailing in the night. It is, he pretends, a sea
subject to fearful hurricanes, strewn with inhospitable islands, and `which offers
nothing good either on its surface or in its depths.'"

"One may see," I replied, "that these historians never sailed on board the
Nautilus."

"Just so," replied the Captain, smiling; "and in that respect moderns are not
more advanced than the ancients. It required many ages to find out the
mechanical power of steam. Who knows if, in another hundred years, we may
not see a second Nautilus? Progress is slow, M. Aronnax."

"It is true," I answered; "your boat is at least a century before its time,
perhaps an era. What a misfortune that the secret of such an invention should die
with its inventor!"

Captain Nemo did not reply. After some minutes' silence he continued:

"You were speaking of the opinions of ancient historians upon the dangerous
navigation of the Red Sea."
 "It is true," said I; "but were not their fears exaggerated?"

"Yes and no, M. Aronnax," replied Captain Nemo, who seemed to know the
Red Sea by heart. "That which is no longer dangerous for a modern vessel, well
rigged, strongly built, and master of its own course, thanks to obedient steam,
offered all sorts of perils to the ships of the ancients. Picture to yourself those
first navigators venturing in ships made of planks sewn with the cords of the
palmtree, saturated with the grease of the seadog, and covered with powdered
resin! They had not even instruments wherewith to take their bearings, and they
went by guess amongst currents of which they scarcely knew anything. Under
such conditions shipwrecks were, and must have been, numerous. But in our
time, steamers running between Suez and the South Seas have nothing more to
fear from the fury of this gulf, in spite of contrary trade-winds. The captain and
passengers do not prepare for their departure by offering propitiatory sacrifices;
and, on their return, they no longer go ornamented with wreaths and gilt fillets to
thank the gods in the neighbouring temple."

"I agree with you," said I; "and steam seems to have killed all gratitude in the
hearts of sailors. But, Captain, since you seem to have especially studied this
sea, can you tell me the origin of its name?"

"There exist several explanations on the subject, M. Aronnax. Would you like
to know the opinion of a chronicler of the fourteenth century?"

"Willingly."

"This fanciful writer pretends that its name was given to it after the passage
of the Israelites, when Pharaoh perished in the waves which closed at the voice
of Moses."

"A poet's explanation, Captain Nemo," I replied; "but I cannot content myself
with that. I ask you for your personal opinion."
 "Here it is, M. Aronnax. According to my idea, we must see in this
appellation of the Red Sea a translation of the Hebrew word `Edom'; and if the
ancients gave it that name, it was on account of the particular colour of its
waters."

"But up to this time I have seen nothing but transparent waves and without
any particular colour."

"Very likely; but as we advance to the bottom of the gulf, you will see this
singular appearance. I remember seeing the Bay of Tor entirely red, like a sea of
blood."

"And you attribute this colour to the presence of a microscopic seaweed?"

"Yes."

"So, Captain Nemo, it is not the first time you have overrun the Red Sea on
board the Nautilus?"

"No, sir."

"As you spoke a while ago of the passage of the Israelites and of the
catastrophe to the Egyptians, I will ask whether you have met with the traces
under the water of this great historical fact?"

"No, sir; and for a good reason."

"What is it?"

"It is that the spot where Moses and his people passed is now so blocked up
with sand that the camels can barely bathe their legs there. You can well
understand that there would not be water enough for my Nautilus."

"And the spot?" I asked.

"The spot is situated a little above the Isthmus of Suez, in the arm which
formerly made a deep estuary, when the Red Sea extended to the Salt Lakes.
Now, whether this passage were miraculous or not, the Israelites, nevertheless,
crossed there to reach the Promised Land, and Pharaoh's army perished precisely
on that spot; and I think that excavations made in the middle of the sand would
bring to light a large number of arms and instruments of Egyptian origin."

"That is evident," I replied; "and for the sake of archaeologists let us hope
that these excavations will be made sooner or later, when new towns are
established on the isthmus, after the construction of the Suez Canal; a canal,
however, very useless to a vessel like the Nautilus."

"Very likely; but useful to the whole world," said Captain Nemo. "The
ancients well understood the utility of a communication between the Red Sea
and the Mediterranean for their commercial affairs: but they did not think of
digging a canal direct, and took the Nile as an intermediate. Very probably the
canal which united the Nile to the Red Sea was begun by Sesostris, if we may
believe tradition. One thing is certain, that in the year 615 before Jesus Christ,
Necos undertook the works of an alimentary canal to the waters of the Nile
across the plain of Egypt, looking towards Arabia. It took four days to go up this
canal, and it was so wide that two triremes could go abreast. It was carried on by
Darius, the son of Hystaspes, and probably finished by Ptolemy II. Strabo saw it
navigated: but its decline from the point of departure, near Bubastes, to the Red
Sea was so slight that it was only navigable for a few months in the year. This
canal answered all commercial purposes to the age of Antonius, when it was
abandoned and blocked up with sand. Restored by order of the Caliph Omar, it
was definitely destroyed in 761 or 762 by Caliph Al-Mansor, who wished to
prevent the arrival of provisions to Mohammed-ben-Abdallah, who had revolted
against him. During the expedition into Egypt, your General Bonaparte
discovered traces of the works in the Desert of Suez; and, surprised by the tide,
he nearly perished before regaining Hadjaroth, at the very place where Moses
had encamped three thousand years before him."

"Well, Captain, what the ancients dared not undertake, this junction between
the two seas, which will shorten the road from Cadiz to India, M. Lesseps has
succeeded in doing; and before long he will have changed Africa into an
immense island."

"Yes, M. Aronnax; you have the right to be proud of your countryman. Such
a man brings more honour to a nation than great captains. He began, like so
many others, with disgust and rebuffs; but he has triumphed, for he has the
genius of will. And it is sad to think that a work like that, which ought to have
been an international work and which would have sufficed to make a reign
illustrious, should have succeeded by the energy of one man. All honour to M.
Lesseps!"

"Yes! honour to the great citizen," I replied, surprised by the manner in which
Captain Nemo had just spoken.

"Unfortunately," he continued, "I cannot take you through the Suez Canal;
but you will be able to see the long jetty of Port Said after to-morrow, when we
shall be in the Mediterranean."

"The Mediterranean!" I exclaimed.

"Yes, sir; does that astonish you?"

"What astonishes me is to think that we shall be there the day after to-
morrow."

"Indeed?"

"Yes, Captain, although by this time I ought to have accustomed myself to be

surprised at nothing since I have been on board your boat."

"But the cause of this surprise?"

"Well! it is the fearful speed you will have to put on the Nautilus, if the day
after to-morrow she is to be in the Mediterranean, having made the round of
Africa, and doubled the Cape of Good Hope!"

"Who told you that she would make the round of Africa and double the Cape
of Good Hope, sir?"

"Well, unless the Nautilus sails on dry land, and passes above the isthmus
——"

"Or beneath it, M. Aronnax."

"Beneath it?"

"Certainly," replied Captain Nemo quietly. "A long time ago Nature made
under this tongue of land what man has this day made on its surface."
 "What! such a passage exists?"

"Yes; a subterranean passage, which I have named the Arabian Tunnel. It

takes us beneath Suez and opens into the Gulf of Pelusium."

"But this isthmus is composed of nothing but quick sands?"

"To a certain depth. But at fifty-five yards only there is a solid layer of rock."

"Did you discover this passage by chance?" I asked more and more surprised.

"Chance and reasoning, sir; and by reasoning even more than by chance. Not
only does this passage exist, but I have profited by it several times. Without that
I should not have ventured this day into the impassable Red Sea. I noticed that in
the Red Sea and in the Mediterranean there existed a certain number of fishes of
a kind perfectly identical. Certain of the fact, I asked myself was it possible that
there was no communication between the two seas? If there was, the
subterranean current must necessarily run from the Red Sea to the
Mediterranean, from the sole cause of difference of level. I caught a large
number of fishes in the neighbourhood of Suez. I passed a copper ring through
their tails, and threw them back into the sea. Some months later, on the coast of
Syria, I caught some of my fish ornamented with the ring. Thus the
communication between the two was proved. I then sought for it with my
Nautilus; I discovered it, ventured into it, and before long, sir, you too will have
passed through my Arabian tunnel!"

CHAPTER V

THE ARABIAN TUNNEL

That same evening, in 21° 30' N. lat., the Nautilus floated on the surface of
the sea, approaching the Arabian coast. I saw Djeddah, the most important
counting-house of Egypt, Syria, Turkey, and India. I distinguished clearly
enough its buildings, the vessels anchored at the quays, and those whose draught
of water obliged them to anchor in the roads. The sun, rather low on the horizon,
struck full on the houses of the town, bringing out their whiteness. Outside, some
wooden cabins, and some made of reeds, showed the quarter inhabited by the
Bedouins. Soon Djeddah was shut out from view by the shadows of night, and
the Nautilus found herself under water slightly phosphorescent.

The next day, the 10th of February, we sighted several ships running to
windward. The Nautilus returned to its submarine navigation; but at noon, when
her bearings were taken, the sea being deserted, she rose again to her waterline.

Accompanied by Ned and Conseil, I seated myself on the platform. The coast
on the eastern side looked like a mass faintly printed upon a damp fog.

We were leaning on the sides of the pinnace, talking of one thing and another,
when Ned Land, stretching out his hand towards a spot on the sea, said:

"Do you see anything there, sir?"

"No, Ned," I replied; "but I have not your eyes, you know."

"Look well," said Ned, "there, on the starboard beam, about the height of the
lantern! Do you not see a mass which seems to move?"

"Certainly," said I, after close attention; "I see something like a long black
body on the top of the water."

And certainly before long the black object was not more than a mile from us.
It looked like a great sandbank deposited in the open sea. It was a gigantic
dugong!

Ned Land looked eagerly. His eyes shone with covetousness at the sight of
the animal. His hand seemed ready to harpoon it. One would have thought he
was awaiting the moment to throw himself into the sea and attack it in its
element.

At this instant Captain Nemo appeared on the platform. He saw the dugong,
understood the Canadian's attitude, and, addressing him, said:

"If you held a harpoon just now, Master Land, would it not burn your hand?"

"Just so, sir."

 "And you would not be sorry to go back, for one day, to your trade of a
fisherman and to add this cetacean to the list of those you have already killed?"

"I should not, sir."

"Well, you can try."

"Thank you, sir," said Ned Land, his eyes flaming.

"Only," continued the Captain, "I advise you for your own sake not to miss
the creature."

"Is the dugong dangerous to attack?" I asked, in spite of the Canadian's shrug
of the shoulders.

"Yes," replied the Captain; "sometimes the animal turns upon its assailants
and overturns their boat. But for Master Land this danger is not to be feared. His
eye is prompt, his arm sure."

At this moment seven men of the crew, mute and immovable as ever,
mounted the platform. One carried a harpoon and a line similar to those
employed in catching whales. The pinnace was lifted from the bridge, pulled
from its socket, and let down into the sea. Six oarsmen took their seats, and the
coxswain went to the tiller. Ned, Conseil, and I went to the back of the boat.

"You are not coming, Captain?" I asked.

"No, sir; but I wish you good sport."

The boat put off, and, lifted by the six rowers, drew rapidly towards the
dugong, which floated about two miles from the Nautilus.

Arrived some cables-length from the cetacean, the speed slackened, and the
oars dipped noiselessly into the quiet waters. Ned Land, harpoon in hand, stood
in the fore part of the boat. The harpoon used for striking the whale is generally
attached to a very long cord which runs out rapidly as the wounded creature
draws it after him. But here the cord was not more than ten fathoms long, and the
extremity was attached to a small barrel which, by floating, was to show the
course the dugong took under the water.
 I stood and carefully watched the Canadian's adversary. This dugong, which
also bears the name of the halicore, closely resembles the manatee; its oblong
body terminated in a lengthened tail, and its lateral fins in perfect fingers. Its
difference from the manatee consisted in its upper jaw, which was armed with
two long and pointed teeth which formed on each side diverging tusks.

This dugong which Ned Land was preparing to attack was of colossal
dimensions; it was more than seven yards long. It did not move, and seemed to
be sleeping on the waves, which circumstance made it easier to capture.

The boat approached within six yards of the animal. The oars rested on the
rowlocks. I half rose. Ned Land, his body thrown a little back, brandished the
harpoon in his experienced hand.

Suddenly a hissing noise was heard, and the dugong disappeared. The
harpoon, although thrown with great force; had apparently only struck the water.

"Curse it!" exclaimed the Canadian furiously; "I have missed it!"

"No," said I; "the creature is wounded—look at the blood; but your weapon
has not stuck in his body."

"My harpoon! my harpoon!" cried Ned Land.

The sailors rowed on, and the coxswain made for the floating barrel. The
harpoon regained, we followed in pursuit of the animal.

The latter came now and then to the surface to breathe. Its wound had not
weakened it, for it shot onwards with great rapidity.

The boat, rowed by strong arms, flew on its track. Several times it
approached within some few yards, and the Canadian was ready to strike, but the
dugong made off with a sudden plunge, and it was impossible to reach it.

Imagine the passion which excited impatient Ned Land! He hurled at the
unfortunate creature the most energetic expletives in the English tongue. For my
part, I was only vexed to see the dugong escape all our attacks.

We pursued it without relaxation for an hour, and I began to think it would

prove difficult to capture, when the animal, possessed with the perverse idea of
vengeance of which he had cause to repent, turned upon the pinnace and assailed
us in its turn.

This manoeuvre did not escape the Canadian.

"Look out!" he cried.

The coxswain said some words in his outlandish tongue, doubtless warning
the men to keep on their guard.

The dugong came within twenty feet of the boat, stopped, sniffed the air
briskly with its large nostrils (not pierced at the extremity, but in the upper part
of its muzzle). Then, taking a spring, he threw himself upon us.

The pinnace could not avoid the shock, and half upset, shipped at least two
tons of water, which had to be emptied; but, thanks to the coxswain, we caught it
sideways, not full front, so we were not quite overturned. While Ned Land,
clinging to the bows, belaboured the gigantic animal with blows from his
harpoon, the creature's teeth were buried in the gunwale, and it lifted the whole
thing out of the water, as a lion does a roebuck. We were upset over one another,
and I know not how the adventure would have ended, if the Canadian, still
enraged with the beast, had not struck it to the heart.

I heard its teeth grind on the iron plate, and the dugong disappeared, carrying
the harpoon with him. But the barrel soon returned to the surface, and shortly
after the body of the animal, turned on its back. The boat came up with it, took it
in tow, and made straight for the Nautilus.

It required tackle of enormous strength to hoist the dugong on to the

platform. It weighed 10,000 lb.

The next day, 11th February, the larder of the Nautilus was enriched by some
more delicate game. A flight of sea-swallows rested on the Nautilus. It was a
species of the Sterna nilotica, peculiar to Egypt; its beak is black, head grey and
pointed, the eye surrounded by white spots, the back, wings, and tail of a greyish
colour, the belly and throat white, and claws red. They also took some dozen of
Nile ducks, a wild bird of high flavour, its throat and upper part of the head
white with black spots.

About five o'clock in the evening we sighted to the north the Cape of Ras-
Mohammed. This cape forms the extremity of Arabia Petraea, comprised
between the Gulf of Suez and the Gulf of Acabah.

The Nautilus penetrated into the Straits of Jubal, which leads to the Gulf of
Suez. I distinctly saw a high mountain, towering between the two gulfs of Ras-
Mohammed. It was Mount Horeb, that Sinai at the top of which Moses saw God
face to face.

At six o'clock the Nautilus, sometimes floating, sometimes immersed, passed

some distance from Tor, situated at the end of the bay, the waters of which
seemed tinted with red, an observation already made by Captain Nemo. Then
night fell in the midst of a heavy silence, sometimes broken by the cries of the
pelican and other night-birds, and the noise of the waves breaking upon the
shore, chafing against the rocks, or the panting of some far-off steamer beating
the waters of the Gulf with its noisy paddles.

From eight to nine o'clock the Nautilus remained some fathoms under the
water. According to my calculation we must have been very near Suez. Through
the panel of the saloon I saw the bottom of the rocks brilliantly lit up by our
electric lamp. We seemed to be leaving the Straits behind us more and more.

At a quarter-past nine, the vessel having returned to the surface, I mounted

the platform. Most impatient to pass through Captain Nemo's tunnel, I could not
stay in one place, so came to breathe the fresh night air.

Soon in the shadow I saw a pale light, half discoloured by the fog, shining
about a mile from us.

"A floating lighthouse!" said someone near me.

I turned, and saw the Captain.

"It is the floating light of Suez," he continued. "It will not be long before we
gain the entrance of the tunnel."

"The entrance cannot be easy?"

"No, sir; for that reason I am accustomed to go into the steersman's cage and
myself direct our course. And now, if you will go down, M. Aronnax, the
Nautilus is going under the waves, and will not return to the surface until we
have passed through the Arabian Tunnel."

Captain Nemo led me towards the central staircase; half way down he opened
a door, traversed the upper deck, and landed in the pilot's cage, which it may be
remembered rose at the extremity of the platform. It was a cabin measuring six
feet square, very much like that occupied by the pilot on the steamboats of the
Mississippi or Hudson. In the midst worked a wheel, placed vertically, and
caught to the tiller-rope, which ran to the back of the Nautilus. Four light-ports
with lenticular glasses, let in a groove in the partition of the cabin, allowed the
man at the wheel to see in all directions.

This cabin was dark; but soon my eyes accustomed themselves to the
obscurity, and I perceived the pilot, a strong man, with his hands resting on the
spokes of the wheel. Outside, the sea appeared vividly lit up by the lantern,
which shed its rays from the back of the cabin to the other extremity of the
platform.

"Now," said Captain Nemo, "let us try to make our passage."

Electric wires connected the pilot's cage with the machinery room, and from
there the Captain could communicate simultaneously to his Nautilus the
direction and the speed. He pressed a metal knob, and at once the speed of the
screw diminished.

I looked in silence at the high straight wall we were running by at this

moment, the immovable base of a massive sandy coast. We followed it thus for
an hour only some few yards off.

Captain Nemo did not take his eye from the knob, suspended by its two
concentric circles in the cabin. At a simple gesture, the pilot modified the course
of the Nautilus every instant.

I had placed myself at the port-scuttle, and saw some magnificent

substructures of coral, zoophytes, seaweed, and fucus, agitating their enormous
claws, which stretched out from the fissures of the rock.

At a quarter-past ten, the Captain himself took the helm. A large gallery,
black and deep, opened before us. The Nautilus went boldly into it. A strange
roaring was heard round its sides. It was the waters of the Red Sea, which the
incline of the tunnel precipitated violently towards the Mediterranean. The
Nautilus went with the torrent, rapid as an arrow, in spite of the efforts of the
machinery, which, in order to offer more effective resistance, beat the waves
with reversed screw.

On the walls of the narrow passage I could see nothing but brilliant rays,
straight lines, furrows of fire, traced by the great speed, under the brilliant
electric light. My heart beat fast.

At thirty-five minutes past ten, Captain Nemo quitted the helm, and, turning
to me, said:

"The Mediterranean!"

In less than twenty minutes, the Nautilus, carried along by the torrent, had
passed through the Isthmus of Suez.

CHAPTER VI

THE GRECIAN ARCHIPELAGO

The next day, the 12th of February, at the dawn of day, the Nautilus rose to
the surface. I hastened on to the platform. Three miles to the south the dim
outline of Pelusium was to be seen. A torrent had carried us from one sea to
another. About seven o'clock Ned and Conseil joined me.

"Well, Sir Naturalist," said the Canadian, in a slightly jovial tone, "and the
Mediterranean?"

"We are floating on its surface, friend Ned."

"What!" said Conseil, "this very night."

"Yes, this very night; in a few minutes we have passed this impassable
isthmus."

"I do not believe it," replied the Canadian.

 "Then you are wrong, Master Land," I continued; "this low coast which
rounds off to the south is the Egyptian coast. And you who have such good eyes,
Ned, you can see the jetty of Port Said stretching into the sea."

The Canadian looked attentively.

"Certainly you are right, sir, and your Captain is a first-rate man. We are in
the Mediterranean. Good! Now, if you please, let us talk of our own little affair,
but so that no one hears us."

I saw what the Canadian wanted, and, in any case, I thought it better to let
him talk, as he wished it; so we all three went and sat down near the lantern,
where we were less exposed to the spray of the blades.

"Now, Ned, we listen; what have you to tell us?"

"What I have to tell you is very simple. We are in Europe; and before Captain
Nemo's caprices drag us once more to the bottom of the Polar Seas, or lead us
into Oceania, I ask to leave the Nautilus."

I wished in no way to shackle the liberty of my companions, but I certainly

felt no desire to leave Captain Nemo.

Thanks to him, and thanks to his apparatus, I was each day nearer the
completion of my submarine studies; and I was rewriting my book of submarine
depths in its very element. Should I ever again have such an opportunity of
observing the wonders of the ocean? No, certainly not! And I could not bring
myself to the idea of abandoning the Nautilus before the cycle of investigation
was accomplished.

"Friend Ned, answer me frankly, are you tired of being on board? Are you
sorry that destiny has thrown us into Captain Nemo's hands?"

The Canadian remained some moments without answering. Then, crossing

his arms, he said:

"Frankly, I do not regret this journey under the seas. I shall be glad to have
made it; but, now that it is made, let us have done with it. That is my idea."

"It will come to an end, Ned."

 "Where and when?"

"Where I do not know—when I cannot say; or, rather, I suppose it will end
when these seas have nothing more to teach us."

"Then what do you hope for?" demanded the Canadian.

"That circumstances may occur as well six months hence as now by which
we may and ought to profit."

"Oh!" said Ned Land, "and where shall we be in six months, if you please, Sir
Naturalist?"

"Perhaps in China; you know the Nautilus is a rapid traveller. It goes through
water as swallows through the air, or as an express on the land. It does not fear
frequented seas; who can say that it may not beat the coasts of France, England,
or America, on which flight may be attempted as advantageously as here."

"M. Aronnax," replied the Canadian, "your arguments are rotten at the
foundation. You speak in the future, `We shall be there! we shall be here!' I
speak in the present, `We are here, and we must profit by it.'"

Ned Land's logic pressed me hard, and I felt myself beaten on that ground. I
knew not what argument would now tell in my favour.

"Sir," continued Ned, "let us suppose an impossibility: if Captain Nemo

should this day offer you your liberty; would you accept it?"

"I do not know," I answered.

"And if," he added, "the offer made you this day was never to be renewed,
would you accept it?"

"Friend Ned, this is my answer. Your reasoning is against me. We must not
rely on Captain Nemo's good-will. Common prudence forbids him to set us at
liberty. On the other side, prudence bids us profit by the first opportunity to leave
the Nautilus."

"Well, M. Aronnax, that is wisely said."

 "Only one observation—just one. The occasion must be serious, and our first
attempt must succeed; if it fails, we shall never find another, and Captain Nemo
will never forgive us."

"All that is true," replied the Canadian. "But your observation applies equally
to all attempts at flight, whether in two years' time, or in two days'. But the
question is still this: If a favourable opportunity presents itself, it must be
seized."

"Agreed! And now, Ned, will you tell me what you mean by a favourable
opportunity?"

"It will be that which, on a dark night, will bring the Nautilus a short distance
from some European coast."

"And you will try and save yourself by swimming?"

"Yes, if we were near enough to the bank, and if the vessel was floating at the
time. Not if the bank was far away, and the boat was under the water."

"And in that case?"

"In that case, I should seek to make myself master of the pinnace. I know
how it is worked. We must get inside, and the bolts once drawn, we shall come
to the surface of the water, without even the pilot, who is in the bows, perceiving
our flight."

"Well, Ned, watch for the opportunity; but do not forget that a hitch will ruin
us."

"I will not forget, sir."

"And now, Ned, would you like to know what I think of your project?"

"Certainly, M. Aronnax."

"Well, I think—I do not say I hope—I think that this favourable opportunity
will never present itself."

"Why not?"
 "Because Captain Nemo cannot hide from himself that we have not given up
all hope of regaining our liberty, and he will be on his guard, above all, in the
seas and in the sight of European coasts."

"We shall see," replied Ned Land, shaking his head determinedly.

"And now, Ned Land," I added, "let us stop here. Not another word on the
subject. The day that you are ready, come and let us know, and we will follow
you. I rely entirely upon you."

Thus ended a conversation which, at no very distant time, led to such grave
results. I must say here that facts seemed to confirm my foresight, to the
Canadian's great despair. Did Captain Nemo distrust us in these frequented seas?
or did he only wish to hide himself from the numerous vessels, of all nations,
which ploughed the Mediterranean? I could not tell; but we were oftener
between waters and far from the coast. Or, if the Nautilus did emerge, nothing
was to be seen but the pilot's cage; and sometimes it went to great depths, for,
between the Grecian Archipelago and Asia Minor we could not touch the bottom
by more than a thousand fathoms.

Thus I only knew we were near the Island of Carpathos, one of the Sporades,
by Captain Nemo reciting these lines from Virgil:

"Est Carpathio Neptuni gurgite vates,

Caeruleus Proteus,"

as he pointed to a spot on the planisphere.

It was indeed the ancient abode of Proteus, the old shepherd of Neptune's
flocks, now the Island of Scarpanto, situated between Rhodes and Crete. I saw
nothing but the granite base through the glass panels of the saloon.

The next day, the 14th of February, I resolved to employ some hours in
studying the fishes of the Archipelago; but for some reason or other the panels
remained hermetically sealed. Upon taking the course of the Nautilus, I found
that we were going towards Candia, the ancient Isle of Crete. At the time I
embarked on the Abraham Lincoln, the whole of this island had risen in
insurrection against the despotism of the Turks. But how the insurgents had fared
since that time I was absolutely ignorant, and it was not Captain Nemo, deprived
of all land communications, who could tell me.
 I made no allusion to this event when that night I found myself alone with
him in the saloon. Besides, he seemed to be taciturn and preoccupied. Then,
contrary to his custom, he ordered both panels to be opened, and, going from one
to the other, observed the mass of waters attentively. To what end I could not
guess; so, on my side, I employed my time in studying the fish passing before
my eyes.

In the midst of the waters a man appeared, a diver, carrying at his belt a
leathern purse. It was not a body abandoned to the waves; it was a living man,
swimming with a strong hand, disappearing occasionally to take breath at the
surface.

I turned towards Captain Nemo, and in an agitated voice exclaimed:

"A man shipwrecked! He must be saved at any price!"

The Captain did not answer me, but came and leaned against the panel.

The man had approached, and, with his face flattened against the glass, was
looking at us.

To my great amazement, Captain Nemo signed to him. The diver answered

with his hand, mounted immediately to the surface of the water, and did not
appear again.

"Do not be uncomfortable," said Captain Nemo. "It is Nicholas of Cape

Matapan, surnamed Pesca. He is well known in all the Cyclades. A bold diver!
water is his element, and he lives more in it than on land, going continually from
one island to another, even as far as Crete."

"You know him, Captain?"

"Why not, M. Aronnax?"

Saying which, Captain Nemo went towards a piece of furniture standing near
the left panel of the saloon. Near this piece of furniture, I saw a chest bound with
iron, on the cover of which was a copper plate, bearing the cypher of the
Nautilus with its device.

At that moment, the Captain, without noticing my presence, opened the piece
of furniture, a sort of strong box, which held a great many ingots.

They were ingots of gold. From whence came this precious metal, which
represented an enormous sum? Where did the Captain gather this gold from? and
what was he going to do with it?

I did not say one word. I looked. Captain Nemo took the ingots one by one,
and arranged them methodically in the chest, which he filled entirely. I estimated
the contents at more than 4,000 lb. weight of gold, that is to say, nearly
L200,000.

The chest was securely fastened, and the Captain wrote an address on the lid,
in characters which must have belonged to Modern Greece.

This done, Captain Nemo pressed a knob, the wire of which communicated
with the quarters of the crew. Four men appeared, and, not without some trouble,
pushed the chest out of the saloon. Then I heard them hoisting it up the iron
staircase by means of pulleys.

At that moment, Captain Nemo turned to me.

"And you were saying, sir?" said he.

"I was saying nothing, Captain."

"Then, sir, if you will allow me, I will wish you good night."

Whereupon he turned and left the saloon.

I returned to my room much troubled, as one may believe. I vainly tried to

sleep—I sought the connecting link between the apparition of the diver and the
chest filled with gold. Soon, I felt by certain movements of pitching and tossing
that the Nautilus was leaving the depths and returning to the surface.

Then I heard steps upon the platform; and I knew they were unfastening the
pinnace and launching it upon the waves. For one instant it struck the side of the
Nautilus, then all noise ceased.

Two hours after, the same noise, the same going and coming was renewed;
the boat was hoisted on board, replaced in its socket, and the Nautilus again
plunged under the waves.

So these millions had been transported to their address. To what point of the
continent? Who was Captain Nemo's correspondent?

The next day I related to Conseil and the Canadian the events of the night,
which had excited my curiosity to the highest degree. My companions were not
less surprised than myself.

"But where does he take his millions to?" asked Ned Land.

To that there was no possible answer. I returned to the saloon after having
breakfast and set to work. Till five o'clock in the evening I employed myself in
arranging my notes. At that moment—(ought I to attribute it to some peculiar
idiosyncrasy)—I felt so great a heat that I was obliged to take off my coat. It was
strange, for we were under low latitudes; and even then the Nautilus, submerged
as it was, ought to experience no change of temperature. I looked at the
manometer; it showed a depth of sixty feet, to which atmospheric heat could
never attain.

I continued my work, but the temperature rose to such a pitch as to be

intolerable.

"Could there be fire on board?" I asked myself.

I was leaving the saloon, when Captain Nemo entered; he approached the
thermometer, consulted it, and, turning to me, said:

"Forty-two degrees."

"I have noticed it, Captain," I replied; "and if it gets much hotter we cannot
bear it."

"Oh, sir, it will not get better if we do not wish it."

"You can reduce it as you please, then?"

"No; but I can go farther from the stove which produces it."

"It is outward, then!"

 "Certainly; we are floating in a current of boiling water."

"Is it possible!" I exclaimed.

"Look."

The panels opened, and I saw the sea entirely white all round. A sulphurous
smoke was curling amid the waves, which boiled like water in a copper. I placed
my hand on one of the panes of glass, but the heat was so great that I quickly
took it off again.

"Where are we?" I asked.

"Near the Island of Santorin, sir," replied the Captain. "I wished to give you a
sight of the curious spectacle of a submarine eruption."

"I thought," said I, "that the formation of these new islands was ended."

"Nothing is ever ended in the volcanic parts of the sea," replied Captain
Nemo; "and the globe is always being worked by subterranean fires. Already, in
the nineteenth year of our era, according to Cassiodorus and Pliny, a new island,
Theia (the divine), appeared in the very place where these islets have recently
been formed. Then they sank under the waves, to rise again in the year 69, when
they again subsided. Since that time to our days the Plutonian work has been
suspended. But on the 3rd of February, 1866, a new island, which they named
George Island, emerged from the midst of the sulphurous vapour near Nea
Kamenni, and settled again the 6th of the same month. Seven days after, the 13th
of February, the Island of Aphroessa appeared, leaving between Nea Kamenni
and itself a canal ten yards broad. I was in these seas when the phenomenon
occurred, and I was able therefore to observe all the different phases. The Island
of Aphroessa, of round form, measured 300 feet in diameter, and 30 feet in
height. It was composed of black and vitreous lava, mixed with fragments of
felspar. And lastly, on the 10th of March, a smaller island, called Reka, showed
itself near Nea Kamenni, and since then these three have joined together,
forming but one and the same island."

"And the canal in which we are at this moment?" I asked.

"Here it is," replied Captain Nemo, showing me a map of the Archipelago.

"You see, I have marked the new islands."
 I returned to the glass. The Nautilus was no longer moving, the heat was
becoming unbearable. The sea, which till now had been white, was red, owing to
the presence of salts of iron. In spite of the ship's being hermetically sealed, an
insupportable smell of sulphur filled the saloon, and the brilliancy of the
electricity was entirely extinguished by bright scarlet flames. I was in a bath, I
was choking, I was broiled.

"We can remain no longer in this boiling water," said I to the Captain.

"It would not be prudent," replied the impassive Captain Nemo.

An order was given; the Nautilus tacked about and left the furnace it could
not brave with impunity. A quarter of an hour after we were breathing fresh air
on the surface. The thought then struck me that, if Ned Land had chosen this part
of the sea for our flight, we should never have come alive out of this sea of fire.

The next day, the 16th of February, we left the basin which, between Rhodes
and Alexandria, is reckoned about 1,500 fathoms in depth, and the Nautilus,
passing some distance from Cerigo, quitted the Grecian Archipelago after having
doubled Cape Matapan.

CHAPTER VII

THE MEDITERRANEAN IN FORTY-EIGHT HOURS

The Mediterranean, the blue sea par excellence, "the great sea" of the
Hebrews, "the sea" of the Greeks, the "mare nostrum" of the Romans, bordered
by orange-trees, aloes, cacti, and sea-pines; embalmed with the perfume of the
myrtle, surrounded by rude mountains, saturated with pure and transparent air,
but incessantly worked by underground fires; a perfect battlefield in which
Neptune and Pluto still dispute the empire of the world!

It is upon these banks, and on these waters, says Michelet, that man is
renewed in one of the most powerful climates of the globe. But, beautiful as it
was, I could only take a rapid glance at the basin whose superficial area is two
million of square yards. Even Captain Nemo's knowledge was lost to me, for this
puzzling person did not appear once during our passage at full speed. I estimated
the course which the Nautilus took under the waves of the sea at about six
hundred leagues, and it was accomplished in forty-eight hours. Starting on the
morning of the 16th of February from the shores of Greece, we had crossed the
Straits of Gibraltar by sunrise on the 18th.

It was plain to me that this Mediterranean, enclosed in the midst of those

countries which he wished to avoid, was distasteful to Captain Nemo. Those
waves and those breezes brought back too many remembrances, if not too many
regrets. Here he had no longer that independence and that liberty of gait which
he had when in the open seas, and his Nautilus felt itself cramped between the
close shores of Africa and Europe.

Our speed was now twenty-five miles an hour. It may be well understood that
Ned Land, to his great disgust, was obliged to renounce his intended flight. He
could not launch the pinnace, going at the rate of twelve or thirteen yards every
second. To quit the Nautilus under such conditions would be as bad as jumping
from a train going at full speed—an imprudent thing, to say the least of it.
Besides, our vessel only mounted to the surface of the waves at night to renew
its stock of air; it was steered entirely by the compass and the log.

I saw no more of the interior of this Mediterranean than a traveller by express

train perceives of the landscape which flies before his eyes; that is to say, the
distant horizon, and not the nearer objects which pass like a flash of lightning.

We were then passing between Sicily and the coast of Tunis. In the narrow
space between Cape Bon and the Straits of Messina the bottom of the sea rose
almost suddenly. There was a perfect bank, on which there was not more than
nine fathoms of water, whilst on either side the depth was ninety fathoms.

The Nautilus had to manoeuvre very carefully so as not to strike against this
submarine barrier.

I showed Conseil, on the map of the Mediterranean, the spot occupied by this
reef.

"But if you please, sir," observed Conseil, "it is like a real isthmus joining
Europe to Africa."
 "Yes, my boy, it forms a perfect bar to the Straits of Lybia, and the soundings
of Smith have proved that in former times the continents between Cape Boco
and Cape Furina were joined."

"I can well believe it," said Conseil.

"I will add," I continued, "that a similar barrier exists between Gibraltar and
Ceuta, which in geological times formed the entire Mediterranean."

"What if some volcanic burst should one day raise these two barriers above
the waves?"

"It is not probable, Conseil."

"Well, but allow me to finish, please, sir; if this phenomenon should take
place, it will be troublesome for M. Lesseps, who has taken so much pains to
pierce the isthmus."

"I agree with you; but I repeat, Conseil, this phenomenon will never happen.
The violence of subterranean force is ever diminishing. Volcanoes, so plentiful in
the first days of the world, are being extinguished by degrees; the internal heat is
weakened, the temperature of the lower strata of the globe is lowered by a
perceptible quantity every century to the detriment of our globe, for its heat is its
life."

"But the sun?"

"The sun is not sufficient, Conseil. Can it give heat to a dead body?"

"Not that I know of."

"Well, my friend, this earth will one day be that cold corpse; it will become
uninhabitable and uninhabited like the moon, which has long since lost all its
vital heat."

"In how many centuries?"

"In some hundreds of thousands of years, my boy."

"Then," said Conseil, "we shall have time to finish our journey—that is, if
Ned Land does not interfere with it."

And Conseil, reassured, returned to the study of the bank, which the Nautilus
was skirting at a moderate speed.

During the night of the 16th and 17th February we had entered the second
Mediterranean basin, the greatest depth of which was 1,450 fathoms. The
Nautilus, by the action of its crew, slid down the inclined planes and buried itself
in the lowest depths of the sea.

On the 18th of February, about three o'clock in the morning, we were at the
entrance of the Straits of Gibraltar. There once existed two currents: an upper
one, long since recognised, which conveys the waters of the ocean into the basin
of the Mediterranean; and a lower counter-current, which reasoning has now
shown to exist. Indeed, the volume of water in the Mediterranean, incessantly
added to by the waves of the Atlantic and by rivers falling into it, would each
year raise the level of this sea, for its evaporation is not sufficient to restore the
equilibrium. As it is not so, we must necessarily admit the existence of an under-
current, which empties into the basin of the Atlantic through the Straits of
Gibraltar the surplus waters of the Mediterranean. A fact indeed; and it was this
counter-current by which the Nautilus profited. It advanced rapidly by the
narrow pass. For one instant I caught a glimpse of the beautiful ruins of the
temple of Hercules, buried in the ground, according to Pliny, and with the low
island which supports it; and a few minutes later we were floating on the
Atlantic.

CHAPTER VIII

VIGO BAY

The Atlantic! a vast sheet of water whose superficial area covers twenty-five
millions of square miles, the length of which is nine thousand miles, with a mean
breadth of two thousand seven hundred—an ocean whose parallel winding
shores embrace an immense circumference, watered by the largest rivers of the
world, the St. Lawrence, the Mississippi, the Amazon, the Plata, the Orinoco, the
Niger, the Senegal, the Elbe, the Loire, and the Rhine, which carry water from
the most civilised, as well as from the most savage, countries! Magnificent field
of water, incessantly ploughed by vessels of every nation, sheltered by the flags
of every nation, and which terminates in those two terrible points so dreaded by
mariners, Cape Horn and the Cape of Tempests.

The Nautilus was piercing the water with its sharp spur, after having
accomplished nearly ten thousand leagues in three months and a half, a distance
greater than the great circle of the earth. Where were we going now, and what
was reserved for the future? The Nautilus, leaving the Straits of Gibraltar, had
gone far out. It returned to the surface of the waves, and our daily walks on the
platform were restored to us.

I mounted at once, accompanied by Ned Land and Conseil. At a distance of

about twelve miles, Cape St. Vincent was dimly to be seen, forming the south-
western point of the Spanish peninsula. A strong southerly gale was blowing.
The sea was swollen and billowy; it made the Nautilus rock violently. It was
almost impossible to keep one's foot on the platform, which the heavy rolls of
the sea beat over every instant. So we descended after inhaling some mouthfuls
of fresh air.

I returned to my room, Conseil to his cabin; but the Canadian, with a

preoccupied air, followed me. Our rapid passage across the Mediterranean had
not allowed him to put his project into execution, and he could not help showing
his disappointment. When the door of my room was shut, he sat down and
looked at me silently.

"Friend Ned," said I, "I understand you; but you cannot reproach yourself. To
have attempted to leave the Nautilus under the circumstances would have been
folly."

Ned Land did not answer; his compressed lips and frowning brow showed
with him the violent possession this fixed idea had taken of his mind.

"Let us see," I continued; "we need not despair yet. We are going up the coast
of Portugal again; France and England are not far off, where we can easily find
refuge. Now if the Nautilus, on leaving the Straits of Gibraltar, had gone to the
south, if it had carried us towards regions where there were no continents, I
should share your uneasiness. But we know now that Captain Nemo does not fly
from civilised seas, and in some days I think you can act with security."

Ned Land still looked at me fixedly; at length his fixed lips parted, and he
said, "It is for to-night."

I drew myself up suddenly. I was, I admit, little prepared for this

communication. I wanted to answer the Canadian, but words would not come.

"We agreed to wait for an opportunity," continued Ned Land, "and the
opportunity has arrived. This night we shall be but a few miles from the Spanish
coast. It is cloudy. The wind blows freely. I have your word, M. Aronnax, and I
rely upon you."

As I was silent, the Canadian approached me.

"To-night, at nine o'clock," said he. "I have warned Conseil. At that moment
Captain Nemo will be shut up in his room, probably in bed. Neither the
engineers nor the ship's crew can see us. Conseil and I will gain the central
staircase, and you, M. Aronnax, will remain in the library, two steps from us,
waiting my signal. The oars, the mast, and the sail are in the canoe. I have even
succeeded in getting some provisions. I have procured an English wrench, to
unfasten the bolts which attach it to the shell of the Nautilus. So all is ready, till
to-night."

"The sea is bad."

"That I allow," replied the Canadian; "but we must risk that. Liberty is worth
paying for; besides, the boat is strong, and a few miles with a fair wind to carry
us is no great thing. Who knows but by to-morrow we may be a hundred leagues
away? Let circumstances only favour us, and by ten or eleven o'clock we shall
have landed on some spot of terra firma, alive or dead. But adieu now till to-
night."

With these words the Canadian withdrew, leaving me almost dumb. I had
imagined that, the chance gone, I should have time to reflect and discuss the
matter. My obstinate companion had given me no time; and, after all, what could
I have said to him? Ned Land was perfectly right. There was almost the
opportunity to profit by. Could I retract my word, and take upon myself the
responsibility of compromising the future of my companions? To-morrow
Captain Nemo might take us far from all land.
 At that moment a rather loud hissing noise told me that the reservoirs were
filling, and that the Nautilus was sinking under the waves of the Atlantic.

A sad day I passed, between the desire of regaining my liberty of action and
of abandoning the wonderful Nautilus, and leaving my submarine studies
incomplete.

What dreadful hours I passed thus! Sometimes seeing myself and

companions safely landed, sometimes wishing, in spite of my reason, that some
unforeseen circumstance, would prevent the realisation of Ned Land's project.

Twice I went to the saloon. I wished to consult the compass. I wished to see if
the direction the Nautilus was taking was bringing us nearer or taking us farther
from the coast. But no; the Nautilus kept in Portuguese waters.

I must therefore take my part and prepare for flight. My luggage was not
heavy; my notes, nothing more.

As to Captain Nemo, I asked myself what he would think of our escape; what
trouble, what wrong it might cause him and what he might do in case of its
discovery or failure. Certainly I had no cause to complain of him; on the
contrary, never was hospitality freer than his. In leaving him I could not be taxed
with ingratitude. No oath bound us to him. It was on the strength of
circumstances he relied, and not upon our word, to fix us for ever.

I had not seen the Captain since our visit to the Island of Santorin. Would
chance bring me to his presence before our departure? I wished it, and I feared it
at the same time. I listened if I could hear him walking the room contiguous to
mine. No sound reached my ear. I felt an unbearable uneasiness. This day of
waiting seemed eternal. Hours struck too slowly to keep pace with my
impatience.

My dinner was served in my room as usual. I ate but little; I was too
preoccupied. I left the table at seven o'clock. A hundred and twenty minutes (I
counted them) still separated me from the moment in which I was to join Ned
Land. My agitation redoubled. My pulse beat violently. I could not remain quiet.
I went and came, hoping to calm my troubled spirit by constant movement. The
idea of failure in our bold enterprise was the least painful of my anxieties; but
the thought of seeing our project discovered before leaving the Nautilus, of
being brought before Captain Nemo, irritated, or (what was worse) saddened, at
my desertion, made my heart beat.

I wanted to see the saloon for the last time. I descended the stairs and arrived
in the museum, where I had passed so many useful and agreeable hours. I looked
at all its riches, all its treasures, like a man on the eve of an eternal exile, who
was leaving never to return.

These wonders of Nature, these masterpieces of art, amongst which for so

many days my life had been concentrated, I was going to abandon them for ever!
I should like to have taken a last look through the windows of the saloon into the
waters of the Atlantic: but the panels were hermetically closed, and a cloak of
steel separated me from that ocean which I had not yet explored.

In passing through the saloon, I came near the door let into the angle which
opened into the Captain's room. To my great surprise, this door was ajar. I drew
back involuntarily. If Captain Nemo should be in his room, he could see me. But,
hearing no sound, I drew nearer. The room was deserted. I pushed open the door
and took some steps forward. Still the same monklike severity of aspect.

Suddenly the clock struck eight. The first beat of the hammer on the bell
awoke me from my dreams. I trembled as if an invisible eye had plunged into
my most secret thoughts, and I hurried from the room.

There my eye fell upon the compass. Our course was still north. The log
indicated moderate speed, the manometer a depth of about sixty feet.

I returned to my room, clothed myself warmly—sea boots, an otterskin cap, a

great coat of byssus, lined with sealskin; I was ready, I was waiting. The
vibration of the screw alone broke the deep silence which reigned on board. I
listened attentively. Would no loud voice suddenly inform me that Ned Land had
been surprised in his projected flight. A mortal dread hung over me, and I vainly
tried to regain my accustomed coolness.

At a few minutes to nine, I put my ear to the Captain's door. No noise. I left
my room and returned to the saloon, which was half in obscurity, but deserted.

I opened the door communicating with the library. The same insufficient
light, the same solitude. I placed myself near the door leading to the central
staircase, and there waited for Ned Land's signal.
 At that moment the trembling of the screw sensibly diminished, then it
stopped entirely. The silence was now only disturbed by the beatings of my own
heart. Suddenly a slight shock was felt; and I knew that the Nautilus had stopped
at the bottom of the ocean. My uneasiness increased. The Canadian's signal did
not come. I felt inclined to join Ned Land and beg of him to put off his attempt. I
felt that we were not sailing under our usual conditions.

At this moment the door of the large saloon opened, and Captain Nemo
appeared. He saw me, and without further preamble began in an amiable tone of
voice:

"Ah, sir! I have been looking for you. Do you know the history of Spain?"

Now, one might know the history of one's own country by heart; but in the
condition I was at the time, with troubled mind and head quite lost, I could not
have said a word of it.

"Well," continued Captain Nemo, "you heard my question! Do you know the
history of Spain?"

"Very slightly," I answered.

"Well, here are learned men having to learn," said the Captain. "Come, sit
down, and I will tell you a curious episode in this history. Sir, listen well," said
he; "this history will interest you on one side, for it will answer a question which
doubtless you have not been able to solve."

"I listen, Captain," said I, not knowing what my interlocutor was driving at,
and asking myself if this incident was bearing on our projected flight.

"Sir, if you have no objection, we will go back to 1702. You cannot be

ignorant that your king, Louis XIV, thinking that the gesture of a potentate was
sufficient to bring the Pyrenees under his yoke, had imposed the Duke of Anjou,
his grandson, on the Spaniards. This prince reigned more or less badly under the
name of Philip V, and had a strong party against him abroad. Indeed, the
preceding year, the royal houses of Holland, Austria, and England had concluded
a treaty of alliance at the Hague, with the intention of plucking the crown of
Spain from the head of Philip V, and placing it on that of an archduke to whom
they prematurely gave the title of Charles III.
 "Spain must resist this coalition; but she was almost entirely unprovided with
either soldiers or sailors. However, money would not fail them, provided that
their galleons, laden with gold and silver from America, once entered their ports.
And about the end of 1702 they expected a rich convoy which France was
escorting with a fleet of twenty-three vessels, commanded by Admiral Chateau-
Renaud, for the ships of the coalition were already beating the Atlantic. This
convoy was to go to Cadiz, but the Admiral, hearing that an English fleet was
cruising in those waters, resolved to make for a French port.

"The Spanish commanders of the convoy objected to this decision. They

wanted to be taken to a Spanish port, and, if not to Cadiz, into Vigo Bay, situated
on the northwest coast of Spain, and which was not blocked.

"Admiral Chateau-Renaud had the rashness to obey this injunction, and the
galleons entered Vigo Bay.

"Unfortunately, it formed an open road which could not be defended in any

way. They must therefore hasten to unload the galleons before the arrival of the
combined fleet; and time would not have failed them had not a miserable
question of rivalry suddenly arisen.

"You are following the chain of events?" asked Captain Nemo.

"Perfectly," said I, not knowing the end proposed by this historical lesson.

"I will continue. This is what passed. The merchants of Cadiz had a privilege
by which they had the right of receiving all merchandise coming from the West
Indies. Now, to disembark these ingots at the port of Vigo was depriving them of
their rights. They complained at Madrid, and obtained the consent of the weak-
minded Philip that the convoy, without discharging its cargo, should remain
sequestered in the roads of Vigo until the enemy had disappeared.

"But whilst coming to this decision, on the 22nd of October, 1702, the
English vessels arrived in Vigo Bay, when Admiral Chateau-Renaud, in spite of
inferior forces, fought bravely. But, seeing that the treasure must fall into the
enemy's hands, he burnt and scuttled every galleon, which went to the bottom
with their immense riches."

Captain Nemo stopped. I admit I could not see yet why this history should
interest me.
 "Well?" I asked.

"Well, M. Aronnax," replied Captain Nemo, "we are in that Vigo Bay; and it
rests with yourself whether you will penetrate its mysteries."

The Captain rose, telling me to follow him. I had had time to recover. I
obeyed. The saloon was dark, but through the transparent glass the waves were
sparkling. I looked.

For half a mile around the Nautilus, the waters seemed bathed in electric
light. The sandy bottom was clean and bright. Some of the ship's crew in their
diving-dresses were clearing away half-rotten barrels and empty cases from the
midst of the blackened wrecks. From these cases and from these barrels escaped
ingots of gold and silver, cascades of piastres and jewels. The sand was heaped
up with them. Laden with their precious booty, the men returned to the Nautilus,
disposed of their burden, and went back to this inexhaustible fishery of gold and
silver.

I understood now. This was the scene of the battle of the 22nd of October,
1702. Here on this very spot the galleons laden for the Spanish Government had
sunk. Here Captain Nemo came, according to his wants, to pack up those
millions with which he burdened the Nautilus. It was for him and him alone
America had given up her precious metals. He was heir direct, without anyone to
share, in those treasures torn from the Incas and from the conquered of
Ferdinand Cortez.

"Did you know, sir," he asked, smiling, "that the sea contained such riches?"

"I knew," I answered, "that they value money held in suspension in these
waters at two millions."

"Doubtless; but to extract this money the expense would be greater than the
profit. Here, on the contrary, I have but to pick up what man has lost—and not
only in Vigo Bay, but in a thousand other ports where shipwrecks have
happened, and which are marked on my submarine map. Can you understand
now the source of the millions I am worth?"

"I understand, Captain. But allow me to tell you that in exploring Vigo Bay
you have only been beforehand with a rival society."
 "And which?"

"A society which has received from the Spanish Government the privilege of
seeking those buried galleons. The shareholders are led on by the allurement of
an enormous bounty, for they value these rich shipwrecks at five hundred
millions."

"Five hundred millions they were," answered Captain Nemo, "but they are so
no longer."

"Just so," said I; "and a warning to those shareholders would be an act of

charity. But who knows if it would be well received? What gamblers usually
regret above all is less the loss of their money than of their foolish hopes. After
all, I pity them less than the thousands of unfortunates to whom so much riches
well-distributed would have been profitable, whilst for them they will be for ever
barren."

I had no sooner expressed this regret than I felt that it must have wounded
Captain Nemo.

"Barren!" he exclaimed, with animation. "Do you think then, sir, that these
riches are lost because I gather them? Is it for myself alone, according to your
idea, that I take the trouble to collect these treasures? Who told you that I did not
make a good use of it? Do you think I am ignorant that there are suffering beings
and oppressed races on this earth, miserable creatures to console, victims to
avenge? Do you not understand?"

Captain Nemo stopped at these last words, regretting perhaps that he had
spoken so much. But I had guessed that, whatever the motive which had forced
him to seek independence under the sea, it had left him still a man, that his heart
still beat for the sufferings of humanity, and that his immense charity was for
oppressed races as well as individuals. And I then understood for whom those
millions were destined which were forwarded by Captain Nemo when the
Nautilus was cruising in the waters of Crete.
 CHAPTER IX

A VANISHED CONTINENT
The next morning, the 19th of February, I saw the Canadian enter my room. I
expected this visit. He looked very disappointed.

"Well, sir?" said he.

"Well, Ned, fortune was against us yesterday."

"Yes; that Captain must needs stop exactly at the hour we intended leaving
his vessel."

"Yes, Ned, he had business at his bankers."

"His bankers!"

"Or rather his banking-house; by that I mean the ocean, where his riches are
safer than in the chests of the State."

I then related to the Canadian the incidents of the preceding night, hoping to
bring him back to the idea of not abandoning the Captain; but my recital had no
other result than an energetically expressed regret from Ned that he had not been
able to take a walk on the battlefield of Vigo on his own account.

"However," said he, "all is not ended. It is only a blow of the harpoon lost.
Another time we must succeed; and to-night, if necessary——"

"In what direction is the Nautilus going?" I asked.

"I do not know," replied Ned.

"Well, at noon we shall see the point."

The Canadian returned to Conseil. As soon as I was dressed, I went into the
saloon. The compass was not reassuring. The course of the Nautilus was S.S.W.
We were turning our backs on Europe.

I waited with some impatience till the ship's place was pricked on the chart.
At about half-past eleven the reservoirs were emptied, and our vessel rose to the
surface of the ocean. I rushed towards the platform. Ned Land had preceded me.
No more land in sight. Nothing but an immense sea. Some sails on the horizon,
doubtless those going to San Roque in search of favourable winds for doubling
the Cape of Good Hope. The weather was cloudy. A gale of wind was preparing.
Ned raved, and tried to pierce the cloudy horizon. He still hoped that behind all
that fog stretched the land he so longed for.

At noon the sun showed itself for an instant. The second profited by this
brightness to take its height. Then, the sea becoming more billowy, we
descended, and the panel closed.

An hour after, upon consulting the chart, I saw the position of the Nautilus
was marked at 16° 17' long., and 33° 22' lat., at 150 leagues from the nearest
coast. There was no means of flight, and I leave you to imagine the rage of the
Canadian when I informed him of our situation.

For myself, I was not particularly sorry. I felt lightened of the load which had
oppressed me, and was able to return with some degree of calmness to my
accustomed work.

That night, about eleven o'clock, I received a most unexpected visit from
Captain Nemo. He asked me very graciously if I felt fatigued from my watch of
the preceding night. I answered in the negative.

"Then, M. Aronnax, I propose a curious excursion."

"Propose, Captain?"

"You have hitherto only visited the submarine depths by daylight, under the
brightness of the sun. Would it suit you to see them in the darkness of the night?"

"Most willingly."

"I warn you, the way will be tiring. We shall have far to walk, and must climb
a mountain. The roads are not well kept."

"What you say, Captain, only heightens my curiosity; I am ready to follow

you."
 "Come then, sir, we will put on our diving-dresses."

Arrived at the robing-room, I saw that neither of my companions nor any of

the ship's crew were to follow us on this excursion. Captain Nemo had not even
proposed my taking with me either Ned or Conseil.

In a few moments we had put on our diving-dresses; they placed on our backs
the reservoirs, abundantly filled with air, but no electric lamps were prepared. I
called the Captain's attention to the fact.

"They will be useless," he replied.

I thought I had not heard aright, but I could not repeat my observation, for the
Captain's head had already disappeared in its metal case. I finished harnessing
myself. I felt them put an iron-pointed stick into my hand, and some minutes
later, after going through the usual form, we set foot on the bottom of the
Atlantic at a depth of 150 fathoms. Midnight was near. The waters were
profoundly dark, but Captain Nemo pointed out in the distance a reddish spot, a
sort of large light shining brilliantly about two miles from the Nautilus. What
this fire might be, what could feed it, why and how it lit up the liquid mass, I
could not say. In any case, it did light our way, vaguely, it is true, but I soon
accustomed myself to the peculiar darkness, and I understood, under such
circumstances, the uselessness of the Ruhmkorff apparatus.

As we advanced, I heard a kind of pattering above my head. The noise

redoubling, sometimes producing a continual shower, I soon understood the
cause. It was rain falling violently, and crisping the surface of the waves.
Instinctively the thought flashed across my mind that I should be wet through!
By the water! in the midst of the water! I could not help laughing at the odd idea.
But, indeed, in the thick diving-dress, the liquid element is no longer felt, and
one only seems to be in an atmosphere somewhat denser than the terrestrial
atmosphere. Nothing more.

After half an hour's walk the soil became stony. Medusae, microscopic
crustacea, and pennatules lit it slightly with their phosphorescent gleam. I caught
a glimpse of pieces of stone covered with millions of zoophytes and masses of
sea weed. My feet often slipped upon this sticky carpet of sea weed, and without
my iron-tipped stick I should have fallen more than once. In turning round, I
could still see the whitish lantern of the Nautilus beginning to pale in the
distance.

But the rosy light which guided us increased and lit up the horizon. The
presence of this fire under water puzzled me in the highest degree. Was I going
towards a natural phenomenon as yet unknown to the savants of the earth? Or
even (for this thought crossed my brain) had the hand of man aught to do with
this conflagration? Had he fanned this flame? Was I to meet in these depths
companions and friends of Captain Nemo whom he was going to visit, and who,
like him, led this strange existence? Should I find down there a whole colony of
exiles who, weary of the miseries of this earth, had sought and found
independence in the deep ocean? All these foolish and unreasonable ideas
pursued me. And in this condition of mind, over-excited by the succession of
wonders continually passing before my eyes, I should not have been surprised to
meet at the bottom of the sea one of those submarine towns of which Captain
Nemo dreamed.

Our road grew lighter and lighter. The white glimmer came in rays from the
summit of a mountain about 800 feet high. But what I saw was simply a
reflection, developed by the clearness of the waters. The source of this
inexplicable light was a fire on the opposite side of the mountain.

In the midst of this stony maze furrowing the bottom of the Atlantic, Captain
Nemo advanced without hesitation. He knew this dreary road. Doubtless he had
often travelled over it, and could not lose himself. I followed him with unshaken
confidence. He seemed to me like a genie of the sea; and, as he walked before
me, I could not help admiring his stature, which was outlined in black on the
luminous horizon.
 It was one in the morning when we arrived at the first slopes of the mountain;
but to gain access to them we must venture through the difficult paths of a vast
copse.

Yes; a copse of dead trees, without leaves, without sap, trees petrified by the
action of the water and here and there overtopped by gigantic pines. It was like a
coal-pit still standing, holding by the roots to the broken soil, and whose
branches, like fine black paper cuttings, showed distinctly on the watery ceiling.
Picture to yourself a forest in the Hartz hanging on to the sides of the mountain,
but a forest swallowed up. The paths were encumbered with seaweed and fucus,
between which grovelled a whole world of crustacea. I went along, climbing the
rocks, striding over extended trunks, breaking the sea bind-weed which hung
from one tree to the other; and frightening the fishes, which flew from branch to
branch. Pressing onward, I felt no fatigue. I followed my guide, who was never
tired. What a spectacle! How can I express it? how paint the aspect of those
woods and rocks in this medium—their under parts dark and wild, the upper
coloured with red tints, by that light which the reflecting powers of the waters
doubled? We climbed rocks which fell directly after with gigantic bounds and
the low growling of an avalanche. To right and left ran long, dark galleries,
where sight was lost. Here opened vast glades which the hand of man seemed to
have worked; and I sometimes asked myself if some inhabitant of these
submarine regions would not suddenly appear to me.

But Captain Nemo was still mounting. I could not stay behind. I followed
boldly. My stick gave me good help. A false step would have been dangerous on
the narrow passes sloping down to the sides of the gulfs; but I walked with firm
step, without feeling any giddiness. Now I jumped a crevice, the depth of which
would have made me hesitate had it been among the glaciers on the land; now I
ventured on the unsteady trunk of a tree thrown across from one abyss to the
other, without looking under my feet, having only eyes to admire the wild sites
of this region.

There, monumental rocks, leaning on their regularly-cut bases, seemed to

defy all laws of equilibrium. From between their stony knees trees sprang, like a
jet under heavy pressure, and upheld others which upheld them. Natural towers,
large scarps, cut perpendicularly, like a "curtain," inclined at an angle which the
laws of gravitation could never have tolerated in terrestrial regions.
 Two hours after quitting the Nautilus we had crossed the line of trees, and a
hundred feet above our heads rose the top of the mountain, which cast a shadow
on the brilliant irradiation of the opposite slope. Some petrified shrubs ran
fantastically here and there. Fishes got up under our feet like birds in the long
grass. The massive rocks were rent with impenetrable fractures, deep grottos,
and unfathomable holes, at the bottom of which formidable creatures might be
heard moving. My blood curdled when I saw enormous antennae blocking my
road, or some frightful claw closing with a noise in the shadow of some cavity.
Millions of luminous spots shone brightly in the midst of the darkness. They
were the eyes of giant crustacea crouched in their holes; giant lobsters setting
themselves up like halberdiers, and moving their claws with the clicking sound
of pincers; titanic crabs, pointed like a gun on its carriage; and frightful-looking
poulps, interweaving their tentacles like a living nest of serpents.

We had now arrived on the first platform, where other surprises awaited me.
Before us lay some picturesque ruins, which betrayed the hand of man and not
that of the Creator. There were vast heaps of stone, amongst which might be
traced the vague and shadowy forms of castles and temples, clothed with a world
of blossoming zoophytes, and over which, instead of ivy, sea-weed and fucus
threw a thick vegetable mantle. But what was this portion of the globe which had
been swallowed by cataclysms? Who had placed those rocks and stones like
cromlechs of prehistoric times? Where was I? Whither had Captain Nemo's
fancy hurried me?

I would fain have asked him; not being able to, I stopped him—I seized his
arm. But, shaking his head, and pointing to the highest point of the mountain, he
seemed to say:

"Come, come along; come higher!"

I followed, and in a few minutes I had climbed to the top, which for a circle
of ten yards commanded the whole mass of rock.

I looked down the side we had just climbed. The mountain did not rise more
than seven or eight hundred feet above the level of the plain; but on the opposite
side it commanded from twice that height the depths of this part of the Atlantic.
My eyes ranged far over a large space lit by a violent fulguration. In fact, the
mountain was a volcano.
 At fifty feet above the peak, in the midst of a rain of stones and scoriae, a
large crater was vomiting forth torrents of lava which fell in a cascade of fire
into the bosom of the liquid mass. Thus situated, this volcano lit the lower plain
like an immense torch, even to the extreme limits of the horizon. I said that the
submarine crater threw up lava, but no flames. Flames require the oxygen of the
air to feed upon and cannot be developed under water; but streams of lava,
having in themselves the principles of their incandescence, can attain a white
heat, fight vigorously against the liquid element, and turn it to vapour by contact.

Rapid currents bearing all these gases in diffusion and torrents of lava slid to
the bottom of the mountain like an eruption of Vesuvius on another Terra del
Greco.

There indeed under my eyes, ruined, destroyed, lay a town—its roofs open to
the sky, its temples fallen, its arches dislocated, its columns lying on the ground,
from which one would still recognise the massive character of Tuscan
architecture. Further on, some remains of a gigantic aqueduct; here the high base
of an Acropolis, with the floating outline of a Parthenon; there traces of a quay,
as if an ancient port had formerly abutted on the borders of the ocean, and
disappeared with its merchant vessels and its war-galleys. Farther on again, long
lines of sunken walls and broad, deserted streets—a perfect Pompeii escaped
beneath the waters. Such was the sight that Captain Nemo brought before my
eyes!

Where was I? Where was I? I must know at any cost. I tried to speak, but
Captain Nemo stopped me by a gesture, and, picking up a piece of chalk-stone,
advanced to a rock of black basalt, and traced the one word:

ATLANTIS

What a light shot through my mind! Atlantis! the Atlantis of Plato, that
continent denied by Origen and Humbolt, who placed its disappearance amongst
the legendary tales. I had it there now before my eyes, bearing upon it the
unexceptionable testimony of its catastrophe. The region thus engulfed was
beyond Europe, Asia, and Lybia, beyond the columns of Hercules, where those
powerful people, the Atlantides, lived, against whom the first wars of ancient
Greeks were waged.

Thus, led by the strangest destiny, I was treading under foot the mountains of
this continent, touching with my hand those ruins a thousand generations old and
contemporary with the geological epochs. I was walking on the very spot where
the contemporaries of the first man had walked.

Whilst I was trying to fix in my mind every detail of this grand landscape,
Captain Nemo remained motionless, as if petrified in mute ecstasy, leaning on a
mossy stone. Was he dreaming of those generations long since disappeared? Was
he asking them the secret of human destiny? Was it here this strange man came
to steep himself in historical recollections, and live again this ancient life—he
who wanted no modern one? What would I not have given to know his thoughts,
to share them, to understand them! We remained for an hour at this place,
contemplating the vast plains under the brightness of the lava, which was some
times wonderfully intense. Rapid tremblings ran along the mountain caused by
internal bubblings, deep noise, distinctly transmitted through the liquid medium
were echoed with majestic grandeur. At this moment the moon appeared through
the mass of waters and threw her pale rays on the buried continent. It was but a
gleam, but what an indescribable effect! The Captain rose, cast one last look on
the immense plain, and then bade me follow him.

We descended the mountain rapidly, and, the mineral forest once passed, I
saw the lantern of the Nautilus shining like a star. The Captain walked straight to
it, and we got on board as the first rays of light whitened the surface of the
ocean.

CHAPTER X

THE SUBMARINE COAL-MINES

The next day, the 20th of February, I awoke very late: the fatigues of the
previous night had prolonged my sleep until eleven o'clock. I dressed quickly,
and hastened to find the course the Nautilus was taking. The instruments showed
it to be still toward the south, with a speed of twenty miles an hour and a depth
of fifty fathoms.

The species of fishes here did not differ much from those already noticed.
There were rays of giant size, five yards long, and endowed with great muscular
strength, which enabled them to shoot above the waves; sharks of many kinds;
amongst others, one fifteen feet long, with triangular sharp teeth, and whose
transparency rendered it almost invisible in the water.

Amongst bony fish Conseil noticed some about three yards long, armed at the
upper jaw with a piercing sword; other bright-coloured creatures, known in the
time of Aristotle by the name of the sea-dragon, which are dangerous to capture
on account of the spikes on their back.

About four o'clock, the soil, generally composed of a thick mud mixed with
petrified wood, changed by degrees, and it became more stony, and seemed
strewn with conglomerate and pieces of basalt, with a sprinkling of lava. I
thought that a mountainous region was succeeding the long plains; and
accordingly, after a few evolutions of the Nautilus, I saw the southerly horizon
blocked by a high wall which seemed to close all exit. Its summit evidently
passed the level of the ocean. It must be a continent, or at least an island—one of
the Canaries, or of the Cape Verde Islands. The bearings not being yet taken,
perhaps designedly, I was ignorant of our exact position. In any case, such a wall
seemed to me to mark the limits of that Atlantis, of which we had in reality
passed over only the smallest part.

Much longer should I have remained at the window admiring the beauties of
sea and sky, but the panels closed. At this moment the Nautilus arrived at the
side of this high, perpendicular wall. What it would do, I could not guess. I
returned to my room; it no longer moved. I laid myself down with the full
intention of waking after a few hours' sleep; but it was eight o'clock the next day
when I entered the saloon. I looked at the manometer. It told me that the Nautilus
was floating on the surface of the ocean. Besides, I heard steps on the platform. I
went to the panel. It was open; but, instead of broad daylight, as I expected, I
was surrounded by profound darkness. Where were we? Was I mistaken? Was it
still night? No; not a star was shining and night has not that utter darkness.

I knew not what to think, when a voice near me said:

"Is that you, Professor?"

 "Ah! Captain," I answered, "where are we?"

"Underground, sir."

"Underground!" I exclaimed. "And the Nautilus floating still?"

"It always floats."

"But I do not understand."

"Wait a few minutes, our lantern will be lit, and, if you like light places, you
will be satisfied."

I stood on the platform and waited. The darkness was so complete that I
could not even see Captain Nemo; but, looking to the zenith, exactly above my
head, I seemed to catch an undecided gleam, a kind of twilight filling a circular
hole. At this instant the lantern was lit, and its vividness dispelled the faint light.
I closed my dazzled eyes for an instant, and then looked again. The Nautilus was
stationary, floating near a mountain which formed a sort of quay. The lake, then,
supporting it was a lake imprisoned by a circle of walls, measuring two miles in
diameter and six in circumference. Its level (the manometer showed) could only
be the same as the outside level, for there must necessarily be a communication
between the lake and the sea. The high partitions, leaning forward on their base,
grew into a vaulted roof bearing the shape of an immense funnel turned upside
down, the height being about five or six hundred yards. At the summit was a
circular orifice, by which I had caught the slight gleam of light, evidently
daylight.

"Where are we?" I asked.

"In the very heart of an extinct volcano, the interior of which has been
invaded by the sea, after some great convulsion of the earth. Whilst you were
sleeping, Professor, the Nautilus penetrated to this lagoon by a natural canal,
which opens about ten yards beneath the surface of the ocean. This is its harbour
of refuge, a sure, commodious, and mysterious one, sheltered from all gales.
Show me, if you can, on the coasts of any of your continents or islands, a road
which can give such perfect refuge from all storms."

"Certainly," I replied, "you are in safety here, Captain Nemo. Who could
reach you in the heart of a volcano? But did I not see an opening at its summit?"
 "Yes; its crater, formerly filled with lava, vapour, and flames, and which now
gives entrance to the life-giving air we breathe."

"But what is this volcanic mountain?"

"It belongs to one of the numerous islands with which this sea is strewn—to
vessels a simple sandbank—to us an immense cavern. Chance led me to discover
it, and chance served me well."

"But of what use is this refuge, Captain? The Nautilus wants no port."

"No, sir; but it wants electricity to make it move, and the wherewithal to
make the electricity—sodium to feed the elements, coal from which to get the
sodium, and a coal-mine to supply the coal. And exactly on this spot the sea
covers entire forests embedded during the geological periods, now mineralised
and transformed into coal; for me they are an inexhaustible mine."

"Your men follow the trade of miners here, then, Captain?"

"Exactly so. These mines extend under the waves like the mines of
Newcastle. Here, in their diving-dresses, pick axe and shovel in hand, my men
extract the coal, which I do not even ask from the mines of the earth. When I
burn this combustible for the manufacture of sodium, the smoke, escaping from
the crater of the mountain, gives it the appearance of a still-active volcano."

"And we shall see your companions at work?"

"No; not this time at least; for I am in a hurry to continue our submarine tour
of the earth. So I shall content myself with drawing from the reserve of sodium I
already possess. The time for loading is one day only, and we continue our
voyage. So, if you wish to go over the cavern and make the round of the lagoon,
you must take advantage of to-day, M. Aronnax."

I thanked the Captain and went to look for my companions, who had not yet
left their cabin. I invited them to follow me without saying where we were. They
mounted the platform. Conseil, who was astonished at nothing, seemed to look
upon it as quite natural that he should wake under a mountain, after having fallen
asleep under the waves. But Ned Land thought of nothing but finding whether
the cavern had any exit. After breakfast, about ten o'clock, we went down on to
the mountain.
 "Here we are, once more on land," said Conseil.

"I do not call this land," said the Canadian. "And besides, we are not on it,
but beneath it."

Between the walls of the mountains and the waters of the lake lay a sandy
shore which, at its greatest breadth, measured five hundred feet. On this soil one
might easily make the tour of the lake. But the base of the high partitions was
stony ground, with volcanic locks and enormous pumice-stones lying in
picturesque heaps. All these detached masses, covered with enamel, polished by
the action of the subterraneous fires, shone resplendent by the light of our
electric lantern. The mica dust from the shore, rising under our feet, flew like a
cloud of sparks. The bottom now rose sensibly, and we soon arrived at long
circuitous slopes, or inclined planes, which took us higher by degrees; but we
were obliged to walk carefully among these conglomerates, bound by no cement,
the feet slipping on the glassy crystal, felspar, and quartz.

The volcanic nature of this enormous excavation was confirmed on all sides,
and I pointed it out to my companions.

"Picture to yourselves," said I, "what this crater must have been when filled
with boiling lava, and when the level of the incandescent liquid rose to the
orifice of the mountain, as though melted on the top of a hot plate."

"I can picture it perfectly," said Conseil. "But, sir, will you tell me why the
Great Architect has suspended operations, and how it is that the furnace is
replaced by the quiet waters of the lake?"

"Most probably, Conseil, because some convulsion beneath the ocean

produced that very opening which has served as a passage for the Nautilus. Then
the waters of the Atlantic rushed into the interior of the mountain. There must
have been a terrible struggle between the two elements, a struggle which ended
in the victory of Neptune. But many ages have run out since then, and the
submerged volcano is now a peaceable grotto."

"Very well," replied Ned Land; "I accept the explanation, sir; but, in our own
interests, I regret that the opening of which you speak was not made above the
level of the sea."

"But, friend Ned," said Conseil, "if the passage had not been under the sea,
the Nautilus could not have gone through it."

We continued ascending. The steps became more and more perpendicular and
narrow. Deep excavations, which we were obliged to cross, cut them here and
there; sloping masses had to be turned. We slid upon our knees and crawled
along. But Conseil's dexterity and the Canadian's strength surmounted all
obstacles. At a height of about 31 feet the nature of the ground changed without
becoming more practicable. To the conglomerate and trachyte succeeded black
basalt, the first dispread in layers full of bubbles, the latter forming regular
prisms, placed like a colonnade supporting the spring of the immense vault, an
admirable specimen of natural architecture. Between the blocks of basalt wound
long streams of lava, long since grown cold, encrusted with bituminous rays; and
in some places there were spread large carpets of sulphur. A more powerful light
shone through the upper crater, shedding a vague glimmer over these volcanic
depressions for ever buried in the bosom of this extinguished mountain. But our
upward march was soon stopped at a height of about two hundred and fifty feet
by impassable obstacles. There was a complete vaulted arch overhanging us, and
our ascent was changed to a circular walk. At the last change vegetable life
began to struggle with the mineral. Some shrubs, and even some trees, grew
from the fractures of the walls. I recognised some euphorbias, with the caustic
sugar coming from them; heliotropes, quite incapable of justifying their name,
sadly drooped their clusters of flowers, both their colour and perfume half gone.
Here and there some chrysanthemums grew timidly at the foot of an aloe with
long, sickly-looking leaves. But between the streams of lava, I saw some little
violets still slightly perfumed, and I admit that I smelt them with delight.
Perfume is the soul of the flower, and sea-flowers have no soul.

We had arrived at the foot of some sturdy dragon-trees, which had pushed
aside the rocks with their strong roots, when Ned Land exclaimed:

"Ah! sir, a hive! a hive!"

"A hive!" I replied, with a gesture of incredulity.

"Yes, a hive," repeated the Canadian, "and bees humming round it."

I approached, and was bound to believe my own eyes. There at a hole bored
in one of the dragon-trees were some thousands of these ingenious insects, so
common in all the Canaries, and whose produce is so much esteemed. Naturally
enough, the Canadian wished to gather the honey, and I could not well oppose
his wish. A quantity of dry leaves, mixed with sulphur, he lit with a spark from
his flint, and he began to smoke out the bees. The humming ceased by degrees,
and the hive eventually yielded several pounds of the sweetest honey, with which
Ned Land filled his haversack.

"When I have mixed this honey with the paste of the bread-fruit," said he, "I
shall be able to offer you a succulent cake."
[Transcriber's Note: 'bread-fruit' has been substituted for 'artocarpus' in this ed.]

"'Pon my word," said Conseil, "it will be gingerbread."

"Never mind the gingerbread," said I; "let us continue our interesting walk."

At every turn of the path we were following, the lake appeared in all its
length and breadth. The lantern lit up the whole of its peaceable surface, which
knew neither ripple nor wave. The Nautilus remained perfectly immovable. On
the platform, and on the mountain, the ship's crew were working like black
shadows clearly carved against the luminous atmosphere. We were now going
round the highest crest of the first layers of rock which upheld the roof. I then
saw that bees were not the only representatives of the animal kingdom in the
interior of this volcano. Birds of prey hovered here and there in the shadows, or
fled from their nests on the top of the rocks. There were sparrow hawks, with
white breasts, and kestrels, and down the slopes scampered, with their long legs,
several fine fat bustards. I leave anyone to imagine the covetousness of the
Canadian at the sight of this savoury game, and whether he did not regret having
no gun. But he did his best to replace the lead by stones, and, after several
fruitless attempts, he succeeded in wounding a magnificent bird. To say that he
risked his life twenty times before reaching it is but the truth; but he managed so
well that the creature joined the honey-cakes in his bag. We were now obliged to
descend toward the shore, the crest becoming impracticable. Above us the crater
seemed to gape like the mouth of a well. From this place the sky could be clearly
seen, and clouds, dissipated by the west wind, leaving behind them, even on the
summit of the mountain, their misty remnants—certain proof that they were only
moderately high, for the volcano did not rise more than eight hundred feet above
the level of the ocean. Half an hour after the Canadian's last exploit we had
regained the inner shore. Here the flora was represented by large carpets of
marine crystal, a little umbelliferous plant very good to pickle, which also bears
the name of pierce-stone and sea-fennel. Conseil gathered some bundles of it. As
to the fauna, it might be counted by thousands of crustacea of all sorts, lobsters,
crabs, spider-crabs, chameleon shrimps, and a large number of shells, rockfish,
and limpets. Three-quarters of an hour later we had finished our circuitous walk
and were on board. The crew had just finished loading the sodium, and the
Nautilus could have left that instant. But Captain Nemo gave no order. Did he
wish to wait until night, and leave the submarine passage secretly? Perhaps so.
Whatever it might be, the next day, the Nautilus, having left its port, steered
clear of all land at a few yards beneath the waves of the Atlantic.

CHAPTER XI

THE SARGASSO SEA

That day the Nautilus crossed a singular part of the Atlantic Ocean. No one
can be ignorant of the existence of a current of warm water known by the name
of the Gulf Stream. After leaving the Gulf of Florida, we went in the direction of
Spitzbergen. But before entering the Gulf of Mexico, about 45° of N. lat., this
current divides into two arms, the principal one going towards the coast of
Ireland and Norway, whilst the second bends to the south about the height of the
Azores; then, touching the African shore, and describing a lengthened oval,
returns to the Antilles. This second arm—it is rather a collar than an arm—
surrounds with its circles of warm water that portion of the cold, quiet,
immovable ocean called the Sargasso Sea, a perfect lake in the open Atlantic: it
takes no less than three years for the great current to pass round it. Such was the
region the Nautilus was now visiting, a perfect meadow, a close carpet of
seaweed, fucus, and tropical berries, so thick and so compact that the stem of a
vessel could hardly tear its way through it. And Captain Nemo, not wishing to
entangle his screw in this herbaceous mass, kept some yards beneath the surface
of the waves. The name Sargasso comes from the Spanish word "sargazzo"
which signifies kelp. This kelp, or berry-plant, is the principal formation of this
immense bank. And this is the reason why these plants unite in the peaceful
basin of the Atlantic. The only explanation which can be given, he says, seems
to me to result from the experience known to all the world. Place in a vase some
fragments of cork or other floating body, and give to the water in the vase a
circular movement, the scattered fragments will unite in a group in the centre of
the liquid surface, that is to say, in the part least agitated. In the phenomenon we
are considering, the Atlantic is the vase, the Gulf Stream the circular current, and
the Sargasso Sea the central point at which the floating bodies unite.

I share Maury's opinion, and I was able to study the phenomenon in the very
midst, where vessels rarely penetrate. Above us floated products of all kinds,
heaped up among these brownish plants; trunks of trees torn from the Andes or
the Rocky Mountains, and floated by the Amazon or the Mississippi; numerous
wrecks, remains of keels, or ships' bottoms, side-planks stove in, and so
weighted with shells and barnacles that they could not again rise to the surface.
And time will one day justify Maury's other opinion, that these substances thus
accumulated for ages will become petrified by the action of the water and will
then form inexhaustible coal-mines—a precious reserve prepared by far-seeing
Nature for the moment when men shall have exhausted the mines of continents.

In the midst of this inextricable mass of plants and sea weed, I noticed some
charming pink halcyons and actiniae, with their long tentacles trailing after
them, and medusae, green, red, and blue.

All the day of the 22nd of February we passed in the Sargasso Sea, where
such fish as are partial to marine plants find abundant nourishment. The next, the
ocean had returned to its accustomed aspect. From this time for nineteen days,
from the 23rd of February to the 12th of March, the Nautilus kept in the middle
of the Atlantic, carrying us at a constant speed of a hundred leagues in twenty-
four hours. Captain Nemo evidently intended accomplishing his submarine
programme, and I imagined that he intended, after doubling Cape Horn, to return
to the Australian seas of the Pacific. Ned Land had cause for fear. In these large
seas, void of islands, we could not attempt to leave the boat. Nor had we any
means of opposing Captain Nemo's will. Our only course was to submit; but
what we could neither gain by force nor cunning, I liked to think might be
obtained by persuasion. This voyage ended, would he not consent to restore our
liberty, under an oath never to reveal his existence?—an oath of honour which
we should have religiously kept. But we must consider that delicate question
with the Captain. But was I free to claim this liberty? Had he not himself said
from the beginning, in the firmest manner, that the secret of his life exacted from
him our lasting imprisonment on board the Nautilus? And would not my four
months' silence appear to him a tacit acceptance of our situation? And would not
a return to the subject result in raising suspicions which might be hurtful to our
projects, if at some future time a favourable opportunity offered to return to
them?

During the nineteen days mentioned above, no incident of any kind happened
to signalise our voyage. I saw little of the Captain; he was at work. In the library
I often found his books left open, especially those on natural history. My work
on submarine depths, conned over by him, was covered with marginal notes,
often contradicting my theories and systems; but the Captain contented himself
with thus purging my work; it was very rare for him to discuss it with me.
Sometimes I heard the melancholy tones of his organ; but only at night, in the
midst of the deepest obscurity, when the Nautilus slept upon the deserted ocean.
During this part of our voyage we sailed whole days on the surface of the waves.
The sea seemed abandoned. A few sailing-vessels, on the road to India, were
making for the Cape of Good Hope. One day we were followed by the boats of a
whaler, who, no doubt, took us for some enormous whale of great price; but
Captain Nemo did not wish the worthy fellows to lose their time and trouble, so
ended the chase by plunging under the water. Our navigation continued until the
13th of March; that day the Nautilus was employed in taking soundings, which
greatly interested me. We had then made about 13,000 leagues since our
departure from the high seas of the Pacific. The bearings gave us 45° 37' S. lat.,
and 37° 53' W. long. It was the same water in which Captain Denham of the
Herald sounded 7,000 fathoms without finding the bottom. There, too,
Lieutenant Parker, of the American frigate Congress, could not touch the bottom
with 15,140 fathoms. Captain Nemo intended seeking the bottom of the ocean by
a diagonal sufficiently lengthened by means of lateral planes placed at an angle
of 45° with the water-line of the Nautilus. Then the screw set to work at its
maximum speed, its four blades beating the waves with in describable force.
Under this powerful pressure, the hull of the Nautilus quivered like a sonorous
chord and sank regularly under the water.

At 7,000 fathoms I saw some blackish tops rising from the midst of the
waters; but these summits might belong to high mountains like the Himalayas or
Mont Blanc, even higher; and the depth of the abyss remained incalculable. The
Nautilus descended still lower, in spite of the great pressure. I felt the steel plates
tremble at the fastenings of the bolts; its bars bent, its partitions groaned; the
windows of the saloon seemed to curve under the pressure of the waters. And
this firm structure would doubtless have yielded, if, as its Captain had said, it
had not been capable of resistance like a solid block. We had attained a depth of
16,000 yards (four leagues), and the sides of the Nautilus then bore a pressure of
1,600 atmospheres, that is to say, 3,200 lb. to each square two-fifths of an inch of
its surface.

"What a situation to be in!" I exclaimed. "To overrun these deep regions

where man has never trod! Look, Captain, look at these magnificent rocks, these
uninhabited grottoes, these lowest receptacles of the globe, where life is no
longer possible! What unknown sights are here! Why should we be unable to
preserve a remembrance of them?"

"Would you like to carry away more than the remembrance?" said Captain
Nemo.

"What do you mean by those words?"

"I mean to say that nothing is easier than to make a photographic view of this
submarine region."

I had not time to express my surprise at this new proposition, when, at

Captain Nemo's call, an objective was brought into the saloon. Through the
widely-opened panel, the liquid mass was bright with electricity, which was
distributed with such uniformity that not a shadow, not a gradation, was to be
seen in our manufactured light. The Nautilus remained motionless, the force of
its screw subdued by the inclination of its planes: the instrument was propped on
the bottom of the oceanic site, and in a few seconds we had obtained a perfect
negative.

But, the operation being over, Captain Nemo said, "Let us go up; we must not
abuse our position, nor expose the Nautilus too long to such great pressure."

"Go up again!" I exclaimed.

"Hold well on."

I had not time to understand why the Captain cautioned me thus, when I was
thrown forward on to the carpet. At a signal from the Captain, its screw was
shipped, and its blades raised vertically; the Nautilus shot into the air like a
balloon, rising with stunning rapidity, and cutting the mass of waters with a
sonorous agitation. Nothing was visible; and in four minutes it had shot through
the four leagues which separated it from the ocean, and, after emerging like a
flying-fish, fell, making the waves rebound to an enormous height.
 CHAPTER XII

CACHALOTS AND WHALES

During the nights of the 13th and 14th of March, the Nautilus returned to its
southerly course. I fancied that, when on a level with Cape Horn, he would turn
the helm westward, in order to beat the Pacific seas, and so complete the tour of
the world. He did nothing of the kind, but continued on his way to the southern
regions. Where was he going to? To the pole? It was madness! I began to think
that the Captain's temerity justified Ned Land's fears. For some time past the
Canadian had not spoken to me of his projects of flight; he was less
communicative, almost silent. I could see that this lengthened imprisonment was
weighing upon him, and I felt that rage was burning within him. When he met
the Captain, his eyes lit up with suppressed anger; and I feared that his natural
violence would lead him into some extreme. That day, the 14th of March,
Conseil and he came to me in my room. I inquired the cause of their visit.

"A simple question to ask you, sir," replied the Canadian.

"Speak, Ned."

"How many men are there on board the Nautilus, do you think?"

"I cannot tell, my friend."

"I should say that its working does not require a large crew."

"Certainly, under existing conditions, ten men, at the most, ought to be

enough."

"Well, why should there be any more?"

"Why?" I replied, looking fixedly at Ned Land, whose meaning was easy to
guess. "Because," I added, "if my surmises are correct, and if I have well
understood the Captain's existence, the Nautilus is not only a vessel: it is also a
place of refuge for those who, like its commander, have broken every tie upon
earth."

"Perhaps so," said Conseil; "but, in any case, the Nautilus can only contain a
certain number of men. Could not you, sir, estimate their maximum?"

"How, Conseil?"

"By calculation; given the size of the vessel, which you know, sir, and
consequently the quantity of air it contains, knowing also how much each man
expends at a breath, and comparing these results with the fact that the Nautilus is
obliged to go to the surface every twenty-four hours."

Conseil had not finished the sentence before I saw what he was driving at.

"I understand," said I; "but that calculation, though simple enough, can give
but a very uncertain result."

"Never mind," said Ned Land urgently.

"Here it is, then," said I. "In one hour each man consumes the oxygen
contained in twenty gallons of air; and in twenty-four, that contained in 480
gallons. We must, therefore find how many times 480 gallons of air the Nautilus
contains."

"Just so," said Conseil.

"Or," I continued, "the size of the Nautilus being 1,500 tons; and one ton
holding 200 gallons, it contains 300,000 gallons of air, which, divided by 480,
gives a quotient of 625. Which means to say, strictly speaking, that the air
contained in the Nautilus would suffice for 625 men for twenty-four hours."

"Six hundred and twenty-five!" repeated Ned.

"But remember that all of us, passengers, sailors, and officers included,
would not form a tenth part of that number."

"Still too many for three men," murmured Conseil.

The Canadian shook his head, passed his hand across his forehead, and left
the room without answering.

"Will you allow me to make one observation, sir?" said Conseil. "Poor Ned is
longing for everything that he can not have. His past life is always present to
him; everything that we are forbidden he regrets. His head is full of old
recollections. And we must understand him. What has he to do here? Nothing;
he is not learned like you, sir; and has not the same taste for the beauties of the
sea that we have. He would risk everything to be able to go once more into a
tavern in his own country."

Certainly the monotony on board must seem intolerable to the Canadian,

accustomed as he was to a life of liberty and activity. Events were rare which
could rouse him to any show of spirit; but that day an event did happen which
recalled the bright days of the harpooner. About eleven in the morning, being on
the surface of the ocean, the Nautilus fell in with a troop of whales—an
encounter which did not astonish me, knowing that these creatures, hunted to
death, had taken refuge in high latitudes.

We were seated on the platform, with a quiet sea. The month of October in
those latitudes gave us some lovely autumnal days. It was the Canadian—he
could not be mistaken—who signalled a whale on the eastern horizon. Looking
attentively, one might see its black back rise and fall with the waves five miles
from the Nautilus.

"Ah!" exclaimed Ned Land, "if I was on board a whaler, now such a meeting
would give me pleasure. It is one of large size. See with what strength its blow-
holes throw up columns of air an steam! Confound it, why am I bound to these
steel plates?"

"What, Ned," said I, "you have not forgotten your old ideas of fishing?"

"Can a whale-fisher ever forget his old trade, sir? Can he ever tire of the
emotions caused by such a chase?"

"You have never fished in these seas, Ned?"

"Never, sir; in the northern only, and as much in Behring as in Davis Straits."

"Then the southern whale is still unknown to you. It is the Greenland whale
you have hunted up to this time, and that would not risk passing through the
warm waters of the equator. Whales are localised, according to their kinds, in
certain seas which they never leave. And if one of these creatures went from
Behring to Davis Straits, it must be simply because there is a passage from one
sea to the other, either on the American or the Asiatic side."

"In that case, as I have never fished in these seas, I do not know the kind of
whale frequenting them!"

"I have told you, Ned."

"A greater reason for making their acquaintance," said Conseil.

"Look! look!" exclaimed the Canadian, "they approach: they aggravate me;
they know that I cannot get at them!"

Ned stamped his feet. His hand trembled, as he grasped an imaginary

harpoon.

"Are these cetaceans as large as those of the northern seas?" asked he.

"Very nearly, Ned."

"Because I have seen large whales, sir, whales measuring a hundred feet. I
have even been told that those of Hullamoch and Umgallick, of the Aleutian
Islands, are sometimes a hundred and fifty feet long."

"That seems to me exaggeration. These creatures are only balaeaopterons,

provided with dorsal fins; and, like the cachalots, are generally much smaller
than the Greenland whale."

"Ah!" exclaimed the Canadian, whose eyes had never left the ocean, "they
are coming nearer; they are in the same water as the Nautilus."

Then, returning to the conversation, he said:

"You spoke of the cachalot as a small creature. I have heard of gigantic ones.
They are intelligent cetacea. It is said of some that they cover themselves with
seaweed and fucus, and then are taken for islands. People encamp upon them,
and settle there; lights a fire——"
 "And build houses," said Conseil.

"Yes, joker," said Ned Land. "And one fine day the creature plunges, carrying
with it all the inhabitants to the bottom of the sea."

"Something like the travels of Sinbad the Sailor," I replied, laughing.

"Ah!" suddenly exclaimed Ned Land, "it is not one whale; there are ten—
there are twenty—it is a whole troop! And I not able to do anything! hands and
feet tied!"

"But, friend Ned," said Conseil, "why do you not ask Captain Nemo's
permission to chase them?"

Conseil had not finished his sentence when Ned Land had lowered himself
through the panel to seek the Captain. A few minutes afterwards the two
appeared together on the platform.

Captain Nemo watched the troop of cetacea playing on the waters about a
mile from the Nautilus.

"They are southern whales," said he; "there goes the fortune of a whole fleet
of whalers."

"Well, sir," asked the Canadian, "can I not chase them, if only to remind me
of my old trade of harpooner?"

"And to what purpose?" replied Captain Nemo; "only to destroy! We have

nothing to do with the whale-oil on board."

"But, sir," continued the Canadian, "in the Red Sea you allowed us to follow
the dugong."

"Then it was to procure fresh meat for my crew. Here it would be killing for
killing's sake. I know that is a privilege reserved for man, but I do not approve of
such murderous pastime. In destroying the southern whale (like the Greenland
whale, an inoffensive creature), your traders do a culpable action, Master Land.
They have already depopulated the whole of Baffin's Bay, and are annihilating a
class of useful animals. Leave the unfortunate cetacea alone. They have plenty of
natural enemies—cachalots, swordfish, and sawfish—without you troubling
them."

The Captain was right. The barbarous and inconsiderate greed of these
fishermen will one day cause the disappearance of the last whale in the ocean.
Ned Land whistled "Yankee-doodle" between his teeth, thrust his hands into his
pockets, and turned his back upon us. But Captain Nemo watched the troop of
cetacea, and, addressing me, said:

"I was right in saying that whales had natural enemies enough, without
counting man. These will have plenty to do before long. Do you see, M.
Aronnax, about eight miles to leeward, those blackish moving points?"

"Yes, Captain," I replied.

"Those are cachalots—terrible animals, which I have met in troops of two or

three hundred. As to those, they are cruel, mischievous creatures; they would be
right in exterminating them."

The Canadian turned quickly at the last words.

"Well, Captain," said he, "it is still time, in the interest of the whales."

"It is useless to expose one's self, Professor. The Nautilus will disperse them.
It is armed with a steel spur as good as Master Land's harpoon, I imagine."

The Canadian did not put himself out enough to shrug his shoulders. Attack
cetacea with blows of a spur! Who had ever heard of such a thing?

"Wait, M. Aronnax," said Captain Nemo. "We will show you something you
have never yet seen. We have no pity for these ferocious creatures. They are
nothing but mouth and teeth."

Mouth and teeth! No one could better describe the macrocephalous cachalot,
which is sometimes more than seventy-five feet long. Its enormous head
occupies one-third of its entire body. Better armed than the whale, whose upper
jaw is furnished only with whalebone, it is supplied with twenty-five large tusks,
about eight inches long, cylindrical and conical at the top, each weighing two
pounds. It is in the upper part of this enormous head, in great cavities divided by
cartilages, that is to be found from six to eight hundred pounds of that precious
oil called spermaceti. The cachalot is a disagreeable creature, more tadpole than
fish, according to Fredol's description. It is badly formed, the whole of its left
side being (if we may say it), a "failure," and being only able to see with its right
eye. But the formidable troop was nearing us. They had seen the whales and
were preparing to attack them. One could judge beforehand that the cachalots
would be victorious, not only because they were better built for attack than their
inoffensive adversaries, but also because they could remain longer under water
without coming to the surface. There was only just time to go to the help of the
whales. The Nautilus went under water. Conseil, Ned Land, and I took our
places before the window in the saloon, and Captain Nemo joined the pilot in his
cage to work his apparatus as an engine of destruction. Soon I felt the beatings of
the screw quicken, and our speed increased. The battle between the cachalots
and the whales had already begun when the Nautilus arrived. They did not at
first show any fear at the sight of this new monster joining in the conflict. But
they soon had to guard against its blows. What a battle! The Nautilus was
nothing but a formidable harpoon, brandished by the hand of its Captain. It
hurled itself against the fleshy mass, passing through from one part to the other,
leaving behind it two quivering halves of the animal. It could not feel the
formidable blows from their tails upon its sides, nor the shock which it produced
itself, much more. One cachalot killed, it ran at the next, tacked on the spot that
it might not miss its prey, going forwards and backwards, answering to its helm,
plunging when the cetacean dived into the deep waters, coming up with it when
it returned to the surface, striking it front or sideways, cutting or tearing in all
directions and at any pace, piercing it with its terrible spur. What carnage! What
a noise on the surface of the waves! What sharp hissing, and what snorting
peculiar to these enraged animals! In the midst of these waters, generally so
peaceful, their tails made perfect billows. For one hour this wholesale massacre
continued, from which the cachalots could not escape. Several times ten or
twelve united tried to crush the Nautilus by their weight. From the window we
could see their enormous mouths, studded with tusks, and their formidable eyes.
Ned Land could not contain himself; he threatened and swore at them. We could
feel them clinging to our vessel like dogs worrying a wild boar in a copse. But
the Nautilus, working its screw, carried them here and there, or to the upper
levels of the ocean, without caring for their enormous weight, nor the powerful
strain on the vessel. At length the mass of cachalots broke up, the waves became
quiet, and I felt that we were rising to the surface. The panel opened, and we
hurried on to the platform. The sea was covered with mutilated bodies. A
formidable explosion could not have divided and torn this fleshy mass with more
violence. We were floating amid gigantic bodies, bluish on the back and white
underneath, covered with enormous protuberances. Some terrified cachalots
were flying towards the horizon. The waves were dyed red for several miles, and
the Nautilus floated in a sea of blood: Captain Nemo joined us.

"Well, Master Land?" said he.

"Well, sir," replied the Canadian, whose enthusiasm had somewhat calmed;
"it is a terrible spectacle, certainly. But I am not a butcher. I am a hunter, and I
call this a butchery."

"It is a massacre of mischievous creatures," replied the Captain; "and the

Nautilus is not a butcher's knife."

"I like my harpoon better," said the Canadian.

"Every one to his own," answered the Captain, looking fixedly at Ned Land.

I feared he would commit some act of violence, which would end in sad
consequences. But his anger was turned by the sight of a whale which the
Nautilus had just come up with. The creature had not quite escaped from the
cachalot's teeth. I recognised the southern whale by its flat head, which is
entirely black. Anatomically, it is distinguished from the white whale and the
North Cape whale by the seven cervical vertebrae, and it has two more ribs than
its congeners. The unfortunate cetacean was lying on its side, riddled with holes
from the bites, and quite dead. From its mutilated fin still hung a young whale
which it could not save from the massacre. Its open mouth let the water flow in
and out, murmuring like the waves breaking on the shore. Captain Nemo steered
close to the corpse of the creature. Two of his men mounted its side, and I saw,
not without surprise, that they were drawing from its breasts all the milk which
they contained, that is to say, about two or three tons. The Captain offered me a
cup of the milk, which was still warm. I could not help showing my repugnance
to the drink; but he assured me that it was excellent, and not to be distinguished
from cow's milk. I tasted it, and was of his opinion. It was a useful reserve to us,
for in the shape of salt butter or cheese it would form an agreeable variety from
our ordinary food. From that day I noticed with uneasiness that Ned Land's ill-
will towards Captain Nemo increased, and I resolved to watch the Canadian's
gestures closely.
 CHAPTER XIII

THE ICEBERG
The Nautilus was steadily pursuing its southerly course, following the fiftieth
meridian with considerable speed. Did he wish to reach the pole? I did not think
so, for every attempt to reach that point had hitherto failed. Again, the season
was far advanced, for in the Antarctic regions the 13th of March corresponds
with the 13th of September of northern regions, which begin at the equinoctial
season. On the 14th of March I saw floating ice in latitude 55°, merely pale bits
of debris from twenty to twenty-five feet long, forming banks over which the sea
curled. The Nautilus remained on the surface of the ocean. Ned Land, who had
fished in the Arctic Seas, was familiar with its icebergs; but Conseil and I
admired them for the first time. In the atmosphere towards the southern horizon
stretched a white dazzling band. English whalers have given it the name of "ice
blink." However thick the clouds may be, it is always visible, and announces the
presence of an ice pack or bank. Accordingly, larger blocks soon appeared,
whose brilliancy changed with the caprices of the fog. Some of these masses
showed green veins, as if long undulating lines had been traced with sulphate of
copper; others resembled enormous amethysts with the light shining through
them. Some reflected the light of day upon a thousand crystal facets. Others
shaded with vivid calcareous reflections resembled a perfect town of marble.
The more we neared the south the more these floating islands increased both in
number and importance.

At 60° lat. every pass had disappeared. But, seeking carefully, Captain Nemo
soon found a narrow opening, through which he boldly slipped, knowing,
however, that it would close behind him. Thus, guided by this clever hand, the
Nautilus passed through all the ice with a precision which quite charmed
Conseil; icebergs or mountains, ice-fields or smooth plains, seeming to have no
limits, drift-ice or floating ice-packs, plains broken up, called palchs when they
are circular, and streams when they are made up of long strips. The temperature
was very low; the thermometer exposed to the air marked 2 deg. or 3° below
zero, but we were warmly clad with fur, at the expense of the sea-bear and seal.
The interior of the Nautilus, warmed regularly by its electric apparatus, defied
the most intense cold. Besides, it would only have been necessary to go some
yards beneath the waves to find a more bearable temperature. Two months
earlier we should have had perpetual daylight in these latitudes; but already we
had had three or four hours of night, and by and by there would be six months of
darkness in these circumpolar regions. On the 15th of March we were in the
latitude of New Shetland and South Orkney. The Captain told me that formerly
numerous tribes of seals inhabited them; but that English and American whalers,
in their rage for destruction, massacred both old and young; thus, where there
was once life and animation, they had left silence and death.

About eight o'clock on the morning of the 16th of March the Nautilus,
following the fifty-fifth meridian, cut the Antarctic polar circle. Ice surrounded
us on all sides, and closed the horizon. But Captain Nemo went from one
opening to another, still going higher. I cannot express my astonishment at the
beauties of these new regions. The ice took most surprising forms. Here the
grouping formed an oriental town, with innumerable mosques and minarets;
there a fallen city thrown to the earth, as it were, by some convulsion of nature.
The whole aspect was constantly changed by the oblique rays of the sun, or lost
in the greyish fog amidst hurricanes of snow. Detonations and falls were heard
on all sides, great overthrows of icebergs, which altered the whole landscape like
a diorama. Often seeing no exit, I thought we were definitely prisoners; but,
instinct guiding him at the slightest indication, Captain Nemo would discover a
new pass. He was never mistaken when he saw the thin threads of bluish water
trickling along the ice-fields; and I had no doubt that he had already ventured
into the midst of these Antarctic seas before. On the 16th of March, however, the
ice-fields absolutely blocked our road. It was not the iceberg itself, as yet, but
vast fields cemented by the cold. But this obstacle could not stop Captain Nemo:
he hurled himself against it with frightful violence. The Nautilus entered the
brittle mass like a wedge, and split it with frightful crackings. It was the
battering ram of the ancients hurled by infinite strength. The ice, thrown high in
the air, fell like hail around us. By its own power of impulsion our apparatus
made a canal for itself; some times carried away by its own impetus, it lodged on
the ice-field, crushing it with its weight, and sometimes buried beneath it,
dividing it by a simple pitching movement, producing large rents in it. Violent
gales assailed us at this time, accompanied by thick fogs, through which, from
one end of the platform to the other, we could see nothing. The wind blew
sharply from all parts of the compass, and the snow lay in such hard heaps that
we had to break it with blows of a pickaxe. The temperature was always at 5
deg. below zero; every outward part of the Nautilus was covered with ice. A
rigged vessel would have been entangled in the blocked up gorges. A vessel
without sails, with electricity for its motive power, and wanting no coal, could
alone brave such high latitudes. At length, on the 18th of March, after many
useless assaults, the Nautilus was positively blocked. It was no longer either
streams, packs, or ice-fields, but an interminable and immovable barrier, formed
by mountains soldered together.

"An iceberg!" said the Canadian to me.

I knew that to Ned Land, as well as to all other navigators who had preceded
us, this was an inevitable obstacle. The sun appearing for an instant at noon,
Captain Nemo took an observation as near as possible, which gave our situation
at 51° 30' long. and 67° 39' of S. lat. We had advanced one degree more in this
Antarctic region. Of the liquid surface of the sea there was no longer a glimpse.
Under the spur of the Nautilus lay stretched a vast plain, entangled with
confused blocks. Here and there sharp points and slender needles rising to a
height of 200 feet; further on a steep shore, hewn as it were with an axe and
clothed with greyish tints; huge mirrors, reflecting a few rays of sunshine, half
drowned in the fog. And over this desolate face of nature a stern silence reigned,
scarcely broken by the flapping of the wings of petrels and puffins. Everything
was frozen—even the noise. The Nautilus was then obliged to stop in its
adventurous course amid these fields of ice. In spite of our efforts, in spite of the
powerful means employed to break up the ice, the Nautilus remained
immovable. Generally, when we can proceed no further, we have return still
open to us; but here return was as impossible as advance, for every pass had
closed behind us; and for the few moments when we were stationary, we were
likely to be entirely blocked, which did indeed happen about two o'clock in the
afternoon, the fresh ice forming around its sides with astonishing rapidity. I was
obliged to admit that Captain Nemo was more than imprudent. I was on the
platform at that moment. The Captain had been observing our situation for some
time past, when he said to me:

"Well, sir, what do you think of this?"

"I think that we are caught, Captain."

"So, M. Aronnax, you really think that the Nautilus cannot disengage itself?"

"With difficulty, Captain; for the season is already too far advanced for you to
reckon on the breaking of the ice."

"Ah! sir," said Captain Nemo, in an ironical tone, "you will always be the
same. You see nothing but difficulties and obstacles. I affirm that not only can
the Nautilus disengage itself, but also that it can go further still."

"Further to the South?" I asked, looking at the Captain.

"Yes, sir; it shall go to the pole."

"To the pole!" I exclaimed, unable to repress a gesture of incredulity.

"Yes," replied the Captain, coldly, "to the Antarctic pole—to that unknown
point from whence springs every meridian of the globe. You know whether I can
do as I please with the Nautilus!"

Yes, I knew that. I knew that this man was bold, even to rashness. But to
conquer those obstacles which bristled round the South Pole, rendering it more
inaccessible than the North, which had not yet been reached by the boldest
navigators—was it not a mad enterprise, one which only a maniac would have
conceived? It then came into my head to ask Captain Nemo if he had ever
discovered that pole which had never yet been trodden by a human creature?

"No, sir," he replied; "but we will discover it together. Where others have
failed, I will not fail. I have never yet led my Nautilus so far into southern seas;
but, I repeat, it shall go further yet."

"I can well believe you, Captain," said I, in a slightly ironical tone. "I believe
you! Let us go ahead! There are no obstacles for us! Let us smash this iceberg!
Let us blow it up; and, if it resists, let us give the Nautilus wings to fly over it!"

"Over it, sir!" said Captain Nemo, quietly; "no, not over it, but under it!"

"Under it!" I exclaimed, a sudden idea of the Captain's projects flashing upon
my mind. I understood; the wonderful qualities of the Nautilus were going to
serve us in this superhuman enterprise.

"I see we are beginning to understand one another, sir," said the Captain, half
smiling. "You begin to see the possibility—I should say the success—of this
attempt. That which is impossible for an ordinary vessel is easy to the Nautilus.
If a continent lies before the pole, it must stop before the continent; but if, on the
contrary, the pole is washed by open sea, it will go even to the pole."

"Certainly," said I, carried away by the Captain's reasoning; "if the surface of
the sea is solidified by the ice, the lower depths are free by the Providential law
which has placed the maximum of density of the waters of the ocean one degree
higher than freezing-point; and, if I am not mistaken, the portion of this iceberg
which is above the water is as one to four to that which is below."

"Very nearly, sir; for one foot of iceberg above the sea there are three below
it. If these ice mountains are not more than 300 feet above the surface, they are
not more than 900 beneath. And what are 900 feet to the Nautilus?"

"Nothing, sir."

"It could even seek at greater depths that uniform temperature of sea-water,
and there brave with impunity the thirty or forty degrees of surface cold."

"Just so, sir—just so," I replied, getting animated.

"The only difficulty," continued Captain Nemo, "is that of remaining several
days without renewing our provision of air."

"Is that all? The Nautilus has vast reservoirs; we can fill them, and they will
supply us with all the oxygen we want."

"Well thought of, M. Aronnax," replied the Captain, smiling. "But, not
wishing you to accuse me of rashness, I will first give you all my objections."

"Have you any more to make?"

"Only one. It is possible, if the sea exists at the South Pole, that it may be
covered; and, consequently, we shall be unable to come to the surface."

"Good, sir! but do you forget that the Nautilus is armed with a powerful spur,
and could we not send it diagonally against these fields of ice, which would open
at the shocks."

"Ah! sir, you are full of ideas to-day."

"Besides, Captain," I added, enthusiastically, "why should we not find the sea
open at the South Pole as well as at the North? The frozen poles of the earth do
not coincide, either in the southern or in the northern regions; and, until it is
proved to the contrary, we may suppose either a continent or an ocean free from
ice at these two points of the globe."

"I think so too, M. Aronnax," replied Captain Nemo. "I only wish you to
observe that, after having made so many objections to my project, you are now
crushing me with arguments in its favour!"

The preparations for this audacious attempt now began. The powerful pumps
of the Nautilus were working air into the reservoirs and storing it at high
pressure. About four o'clock, Captain Nemo announced the closing of the panels
on the platform. I threw one last look at the massive iceberg which we were
going to cross. The weather was clear, the atmosphere pure enough, the cold
very great, being 12° below zero; but, the wind having gone down, this
temperature was not so unbearable. About ten men mounted the sides of the
Nautilus, armed with pickaxes to break the ice around the vessel, which was
soon free. The operation was quickly performed, for the fresh ice was still very
thin. We all went below. The usual reservoirs were filled with the newly-
liberated water, and the Nautilus soon descended. I had taken my place with
Conseil in the saloon; through the open window we could see the lower beds of
the Southern Ocean. The thermometer went up, the needle of the compass
deviated on the dial. At about 900 feet, as Captain Nemo had foreseen, we were
floating beneath the undulating bottom of the iceberg. But the Nautilus went
lower still—it went to the depth of four hundred fathoms. The temperature of the
water at the surface showed twelve degrees, it was now only ten; we had gained
two. I need not say the temperature of the Nautilus was raised by its heating
apparatus to a much higher degree; every manoeuvre was accomplished with
wonderful precision.

"We shall pass it, if you please, sir," said Conseil.

"I believe we shall," I said, in a tone of firm conviction.

In this open sea, the Nautilus had taken its course direct to the pole, without
leaving the fifty-second meridian. From 67° 30' to 90 deg., twenty-two degrees
and a half of latitude remained to travel; that is, about five hundred leagues. The
Nautilus kept up a mean speed of twenty-six miles an hour—the speed of an
express train. If that was kept up, in forty hours we should reach the pole.

For a part of the night the novelty of the situation kept us at the window. The
sea was lit with the electric lantern; but it was deserted; fishes did not sojourn in
these imprisoned waters; they only found there a passage to take them from the
Antarctic Ocean to the open polar sea. Our pace was rapid; we could feel it by
the quivering of the long steel body. About two in the morning I took some
hours' repose, and Conseil did the same. In crossing the waist I did not meet
Captain Nemo: I supposed him to be in the pilot's cage. The next morning, the
19th of March, I took my post once more in the saloon. The electric log told me
that the speed of the Nautilus had been slackened. It was then going towards the
surface; but prudently emptying its reservoirs very slowly. My heart beat fast.
Were we going to emerge and regain the open polar atmosphere? No! A shock
told me that the Nautilus had struck the bottom of the iceberg, still very thick,
judging from the deadened sound. We had in deed "struck," to use a sea
expression, but in an inverse sense, and at a thousand feet deep. This would give
three thousand feet of ice above us; one thousand being above the water-mark.
The iceberg was then higher than at its borders—not a very reassuring fact.
Several times that day the Nautilus tried again, and every time it struck the wall
which lay like a ceiling above it. Sometimes it met with but 900 yards, only 200
of which rose above the surface. It was twice the height it was when the Nautilus
had gone under the waves. I carefully noted the different depths, and thus
obtained a submarine profile of the chain as it was developed under the water.
That night no change had taken place in our situation. Still ice between four and
five hundred yards in depth! It was evidently diminishing, but, still, what a
thickness between us and the surface of the ocean! It was then eight. According
to the daily custom on board the Nautilus, its air should have been renewed four
hours ago; but I did not suffer much, although Captain Nemo had not yet made
any demand upon his reserve of oxygen. My sleep was painful that night; hope
and fear besieged me by turns: I rose several times. The groping of the Nautilus
continued. About three in the morning, I noticed that the lower surface of the
iceberg was only about fifty feet deep. One hundred and fifty feet now separated
us from the surface of the waters. The iceberg was by degrees becoming an ice-
field, the mountain a plain. My eyes never left the manometer. We were still
rising diagonally to the surface, which sparkled under the electric rays. The
iceberg was stretching both above and beneath into lengthening slopes; mile
after mile it was getting thinner. At length, at six in the morning of that
memorable day, the 19th of March, the door of the saloon opened, and Captain
Nemo appeared.

"The sea is open!!" was all he said.

 CHAPTER XIV

THE SOUTH POLE

I rushed on to the platform. Yes! the open sea, with but a few scattered pieces
of ice and moving icebergs—a long stretch of sea; a world of birds in the air, and
myriads of fishes under those waters, which varied from intense blue to olive
green, according to the bottom. The thermometer marked 3° C. above zero. It
was comparatively spring, shut up as we were behind this iceberg, whose
lengthened mass was dimly seen on our northern horizon.

"Are we at the pole?" I asked the Captain, with a beating heart.

"I do not know," he replied. "At noon I will take our bearings."

"But will the sun show himself through this fog?" said I, looking at the leaden
sky.

"However little it shows, it will be enough," replied the Captain.

About ten miles south a solitary island rose to a height of one hundred and
four yards. We made for it, but carefully, for the sea might be strewn with banks.
One hour afterwards we had reached it, two hours later we had made the round
of it. It measured four or five miles in circumference. A narrow canal separated it
from a considerable stretch of land, perhaps a continent, for we could not see its
limits. The existence of this land seemed to give some colour to Maury's theory.
The ingenious American has remarked that, between the South Pole and the
sixtieth parallel, the sea is covered with floating ice of enormous size, which is
never met with in the North Atlantic. From this fact he has drawn the conclusion
that the Antarctic Circle encloses considerable continents, as icebergs cannot
form in open sea, but only on the coasts. According to these calculations, the
mass of ice surrounding the southern pole forms a vast cap, the circumference of
which must be, at least, 2,500 miles. But the Nautilus, for fear of running
aground, had stopped about three cable-lengths from a strand over which reared
a superb heap of rocks. The boat was launched; the Captain, two of his men,
bearing instruments, Conseil, and myself were in it. It was ten in the morning. I
had not seen Ned Land. Doubtless the Canadian did not wish to admit the
presence of the South Pole. A few strokes of the oar brought us to the sand,
where we ran ashore. Conseil was going to jump on to the land, when I held him
back.

"Sir," said I to Captain Nemo, "to you belongs the honour of first setting foot
on this land."

"Yes, sir," said the Captain, "and if I do not hesitate to tread this South Pole, it
is because, up to this time, no human being has left a trace there."

Saying this, he jumped lightly on to the sand. His heart beat with emotion. He
climbed a rock, sloping to a little promontory, and there, with his arms crossed,
mute and motionless, and with an eager look, he seemed to take possession of
these southern regions. After five minutes passed in this ecstasy, he turned to us.

"When you like, sir."

I landed, followed by Conseil, leaving the two men in the boat. For a long
way the soil was composed of a reddish sandy stone, something like crushed
brick, scoriae, streams of lava, and pumice-stones. One could not mistake its
volcanic origin. In some parts, slight curls of smoke emitted a sulphurous smell,
proving that the internal fires had lost nothing of their expansive powers, though,
having climbed a high acclivity, I could see no volcano for a radius of several
miles. We know that in those Antarctic countries, James Ross found two craters,
the Erebus and Terror, in full activity, on the 167th meridian, latitude 77° 32'.
The vegetation of this desolate continent seemed to me much restricted. Some
lichens lay upon the black rocks; some microscopic plants, rudimentary
diatomas, a kind of cells placed between two quartz shells; long purple and
scarlet weed, supported on little swimming bladders, which the breaking of the
waves brought to the shore. These constituted the meagre flora of this region.
The shore was strewn with molluscs, little mussels, and limpets. I also saw
myriads of northern clios, one-and-a-quarter inches long, of which a whale
would swallow a whole world at a mouthful; and some perfect sea-butterflies,
animating the waters on the skirts of the shore.

There appeared on the high bottoms some coral shrubs, of the kind which,
according to James Ross, live in the Antarctic seas to the depth of more than
1,000 yards. Then there were little kingfishers and starfish studding the soil. But
where life abounded most was in the air. There thousands of birds fluttered and
flew of all kinds, deafening us with their cries; others crowded the rock, looking
at us as we passed by without fear, and pressing familiarly close by our feet.
There were penguins, so agile in the water, heavy and awkward as they are on
the ground; they were uttering harsh cries, a large assembly, sober in gesture, but
extravagant in clamour. Albatrosses passed in the air, the expanse of their wings
being at least four yards and a half, and justly called the vultures of the ocean;
some gigantic petrels, and some damiers, a kind of small duck, the underpart of
whose body is black and white; then there were a whole series of petrels, some
whitish, with brown-bordered wings, others blue, peculiar to the Antarctic seas,
and so oily, as I told Conseil, that the inhabitants of the Ferroe Islands had
nothing to do before lighting them but to put a wick in.

"A little more," said Conseil, "and they would be perfect lamps! After that,
we cannot expect Nature to have previously furnished them with wicks!"

About half a mile farther on the soil was riddled with ruffs' nests, a sort of
laying-ground, out of which many birds were issuing. Captain Nemo had some
hundreds hunted. They uttered a cry like the braying of an ass, were about the
size of a goose, slate-colour on the body, white beneath, with a yellow line round
their throats; they allowed themselves to be killed with a stone, never trying to
escape. But the fog did not lift, and at eleven the sun had not yet shown itself. Its
absence made me uneasy. Without it no observations were possible. How, then,
could we decide whether we had reached the pole? When I rejoined Captain
Nemo, I found him leaning on a piece of rock, silently watching the sky. He
seemed impatient and vexed. But what was to be done? This rash and powerful
man could not command the sun as he did the sea. Noon arrived without the orb
of day showing itself for an instant. We could not even tell its position behind
the curtain of fog; and soon the fog turned to snow.
 "Till to-morrow," said the Captain, quietly, and we returned to the Nautilus
amid these atmospheric disturbances.

The tempest of snow continued till the next day. It was impossible to remain
on the platform. From the saloon, where I was taking notes of incidents
happening during this excursion to the polar continent, I could hear the cries of
petrels and albatrosses sporting in the midst of this violent storm. The Nautilus
did not remain motionless, but skirted the coast, advancing ten miles more to the
south in the half-light left by the sun as it skirted the edge of the horizon. The
next day, the 20th of March, the snow had ceased. The cold was a little greater,
the thermometer showing 2° below zero. The fog was rising, and I hoped that
that day our observations might be taken. Captain Nemo not having yet
appeared, the boat took Conseil and myself to land. The soil was still of the same
volcanic nature; everywhere were traces of lava, scoriae, and basalt; but the
crater which had vomited them I could not see. Here, as lower down, this
continent was alive with myriads of birds. But their rule was now divided with
large troops of sea-mammals, looking at us with their soft eyes. There were
several kinds of seals, some stretched on the earth, some on flakes of ice, many
going in and out of the sea. They did not flee at our approach, never having had
anything to do with man; and I reckoned that there were provisions there for
hundreds of vessels.

"Sir," said Conseil, "will you tell me the names of these creatures?"

"They are seals and morses."

It was now eight in the morning. Four hours remained to us before the sun
could be observed with advantage. I directed our steps towards a vast bay cut in
the steep granite shore. There, I can aver that earth and ice were lost to sight by
the numbers of sea-mammals covering them, and I involuntarily sought for old
Proteus, the mythological shepherd who watched these immense flocks of
Neptune. There were more seals than anything else, forming distinct groups,
male and female, the father watching over his family, the mother suckling her
little ones, some already strong enough to go a few steps. When they wished to
change their place, they took little jumps, made by the contraction of their
bodies, and helped awkwardly enough by their imperfect fin, which, as with the
lamantin, their cousins, forms a perfect forearm. I should say that, in the water,
which is their element—the spine of these creatures is flexible; with smooth and
close skin and webbed feet—they swim admirably. In resting on the earth they
take the most graceful attitudes. Thus the ancients, observing their soft and
expressive looks, which cannot be surpassed by the most beautiful look a woman
can give, their clear voluptuous eyes, their charming positions, and the poetry of
their manners, metamorphosed them, the male into a triton and the female into a
mermaid. I made Conseil notice the considerable development of the lobes of the
brain in these interesting cetaceans. No mammal, except man, has such a
quantity of brain matter; they are also capable of receiving a certain amount of
education, are easily domesticated, and I think, with other naturalists, that if
properly taught they would be of great service as fishing-dogs. The greater part
of them slept on the rocks or on the sand. Amongst these seals, properly so
called, which have no external ears (in which they differ from the otter, whose
ears are prominent), I noticed several varieties of seals about three yards long,
with a white coat, bulldog heads, armed with teeth in both jaws, four incisors at
the top and four at the bottom, and two large canine teeth in the shape of a fleur-
de-lis. Amongst them glided sea-elephants, a kind of seal, with short, flexible
trunks. The giants of this species measured twenty feet round and ten yards and a
half in length; but they did not move as we approached.

"These creatures are not dangerous?" asked Conseil.

"No; not unless you attack them. When they have to defend their young their
rage is terrible, and it is not uncommon for them to break the fishing-boats to
pieces."

"They are quite right," said Conseil.

"I do not say they are not."

Two miles farther on we were stopped by the promontory which shelters the
bay from the southerly winds. Beyond it we heard loud bellowings such as a
troop of ruminants would produce.

"Good!" said Conseil; "a concert of bulls!"

"No; a concert of morses."

"They are fighting!"

"They are either fighting or playing."

 We now began to climb the blackish rocks, amid unforeseen stumbles, and
over stones which the ice made slippery. More than once I rolled over at the
expense of my loins. Conseil, more prudent or more steady, did not stumble, and
helped me up, saying:

"If, sir, you would have the kindness to take wider steps, you would preserve
your equilibrium better."

Arrived at the upper ridge of the promontory, I saw a vast white plain covered
with morses. They were playing amongst themselves, and what we heard were
bellowings of pleasure, not of anger.

As I passed these curious animals I could examine them leisurely, for they did
not move. Their skins were thick and rugged, of a yellowish tint, approaching to
red; their hair was short and scant. Some of them were four yards and a quarter
long. Quieter and less timid than their cousins of the north, they did not, like
them, place sentinels round the outskirts of their encampment. After examining
this city of morses, I began to think of returning. It was eleven o'clock, and, if
Captain Nemo found the conditions favourable for observations, I wished to be
present at the operation. We followed a narrow pathway running along the
summit of the steep shore. At half-past eleven we had reached the place where
we landed. The boat had run aground, bringing the Captain. I saw him standing
on a block of basalt, his instruments near him, his eyes fixed on the northern
horizon, near which the sun was then describing a lengthened curve. I took my
place beside him, and waited without speaking. Noon arrived, and, as before, the
sun did not appear. It was a fatality. Observations were still wanting. If not
accomplished to-morrow, we must give up all idea of taking any. We were
indeed exactly at the 20th of March. To-morrow, the 21st, would be the equinox;
the sun would disappear behind the horizon for six months, and with its
disappearance the long polar night would begin. Since the September equinox it
had emerged from the northern horizon, rising by lengthened spirals up to the
21st of December. At this period, the summer solstice of the northern regions, it
had begun to descend; and to-morrow was to shed its last rays upon them. I
communicated my fears and observations to Captain Nemo.

"You are right, M. Aronnax," said he; "if to-morrow I cannot take the altitude
of the sun, I shall not be able to do it for six months. But precisely because
chance has led me into these seas on the 21st of March, my bearings will be easy
to take, if at twelve we can see the sun."
 "Why, Captain?"

"Because then the orb of day described such lengthened curves that it is
difficult to measure exactly its height above the horizon, and grave errors may be
made with instruments."

"What will you do then?"

"I shall only use my chronometer," replied Captain Nemo. "If to-morrow, the
21st of March, the disc of the sun, allowing for refraction, is exactly cut by the
northern horizon, it will show that I am at the South Pole."

"Just so," said I. "But this statement is not mathematically correct, because
the equinox does not necessarily begin at noon."

"Very likely, sir; but the error will not be a hundred yards and we do not want
more. Till to-morrow, then!"

Captain Nemo returned on board. Conseil and I remained to survey the shore,
observing and studying until five o'clock. Then I went to bed, not, however,
without invoking, like the Indian, the favour of the radiant orb. The next day, the
21st of March, at five in the morning, I mounted the platform. I found Captain
Nemo there.

"The weather is lightening a little," said he. "I have some hope. After
breakfast we will go on shore and choose a post for observation."

That point settled, I sought Ned Land. I wanted to take him with me. But the
obstinate Canadian refused, and I saw that his taciturnity and his bad humour
grew day by day. After all, I was not sorry for his obstinacy under the
circumstances. Indeed, there were too many seals on shore, and we ought not to
lay such temptation in this unreflecting fisherman's way. Breakfast over, we went
on shore. The Nautilus had gone some miles further up in the night. It was a
whole league from the coast, above which reared a sharp peak about five
hundred yards high. The boat took with me Captain Nemo, two men of the crew,
and the instruments, which consisted of a chronometer, a telescope, and a
barometer. While crossing, I saw numerous whales belonging to the three kinds
peculiar to the southern seas; the whale, or the English "right whale," which has
no dorsal fin; the "humpback," with reeved chest and large, whitish fins, which,
in spite of its name, do not form wings; and the fin-back, of a yellowish brown,
the liveliest of all the cetacea. This powerful creature is heard a long way off
when he throws to a great height columns of air and vapour, which look like
whirlwinds of smoke. These different mammals were disporting themselves in
troops in the quiet waters; and I could see that this basin of the Antarctic Pole
serves as a place of refuge to the cetacea too closely tracked by the hunters. I
also noticed large medusae floating between the reeds.

At nine we landed; the sky was brightening, the clouds were flying to the
south, and the fog seemed to be leaving the cold surface of the waters. Captain
Nemo went towards the peak, which he doubtless meant to be his observatory. It
was a painful ascent over the sharp lava and the pumice-stones, in an atmosphere
often impregnated with a sulphurous smell from the smoking cracks. For a man
unaccustomed to walk on land, the Captain climbed the steep slopes with an
agility I never saw equalled and which a hunter would have envied. We were two
hours getting to the summit of this peak, which was half porphyry and half
basalt. From thence we looked upon a vast sea which, towards the north,
distinctly traced its boundary line upon the sky. At our feet lay fields of dazzling
whiteness. Over our heads a pale azure, free from fog. To the north the disc of
the sun seemed like a ball of fire, already horned by the cutting of the horizon.
From the bosom of the water rose sheaves of liquid jets by hundreds. In the
distance lay the Nautilus like a cetacean asleep on the water. Behind us, to the
south and east, an immense country and a chaotic heap of rocks and ice, the
limits of which were not visible. On arriving at the summit Captain Nemo
carefully took the mean height of the barometer, for he would have to consider
that in taking his observations. At a quarter to twelve the sun, then seen only by
refraction, looked like a golden disc shedding its last rays upon this deserted
continent and seas which never man had yet ploughed. Captain Nemo, furnished
with a lenticular glass which, by means of a mirror, corrected the refraction,
watched the orb sinking below the horizon by degrees, following a lengthened
diagonal. I held the chronometer. My heart beat fast. If the disappearance of the
half-disc of the sun coincided with twelve o'clock on the chronometer, we were
at the pole itself.

"Twelve!" I exclaimed.

"The South Pole!" replied Captain Nemo, in a grave voice, handing me the
glass, which showed the orb cut in exactly equal parts by the horizon.

I looked at the last rays crowning the peak, and the shadows mounting by
degrees up its slopes. At that moment Captain Nemo, resting with his hand on
my shoulder, said:

"I, Captain Nemo, on this 21st day of March, 1868, have reached the South
Pole on the ninetieth degree; and I take possession of this part of the globe, equal
to one-sixth of the known continents."

"In whose name, Captain?"

"In my own, sir!"

Saying which, Captain Nemo unfurled a black banner, bearing an "N" in gold
quartered on its bunting. Then, turning towards the orb of day, whose last rays
lapped the horizon of the sea, he exclaimed:

"Adieu, sun! Disappear, thou radiant orb! rest beneath this open sea, and let a
night of six months spread its shadows over my new domains!"

CHAPTER XV

ACCIDENT OR INCIDENT?

The next day, the 22nd of March, at six in the morning, preparations for
departure were begun. The last gleams of twilight were melting into night. The
cold was great, the constellations shone with wonderful intensity. In the zenith
glittered that wondrous Southern Cross—the polar bear of Antarctic regions. The
thermometer showed 120 below zero, and when the wind freshened it was most
biting. Flakes of ice increased on the open water. The sea seemed everywhere
alike. Numerous blackish patches spread on the surface, showing the formation
of fresh ice. Evidently the southern basin, frozen during the six winter months,
was absolutely inaccessible. What became of the whales in that time? Doubtless
they went beneath the icebergs, seeking more practicable seas. As to the seals
and morses, accustomed to live in a hard climate, they remained on these icy
shores. These creatures have the instinct to break holes in the ice-field and to
keep them open. To these holes they come for breath; when the birds, driven
away by the cold, have emigrated to the north, these sea mammals remain sole
masters of the polar continent. But the reservoirs were filling with water, and the
Nautilus was slowly descending. At 1,000 feet deep it stopped; its screw beat the
waves, and it advanced straight towards the north at a speed of fifteen miles an
hour. Towards night it was already floating under the immense body of the
iceberg. At three in the morning I was awakened by a violent shock. I sat up in
my bed and listened in the darkness, when I was thrown into the middle of the
room. The Nautilus, after having struck, had rebounded violently. I groped along
the partition, and by the staircase to the saloon, which was lit by the luminous
ceiling. The furniture was upset. Fortunately the windows were firmly set, and
had held fast. The pictures on the starboard side, from being no longer vertical,
were clinging to the paper, whilst those of the port side were hanging at least a
foot from the wall. The Nautilus was lying on its starboard side perfectly
motionless. I heard footsteps, and a confusion of voices; but Captain Nemo did
not appear. As I was leaving the saloon, Ned Land and Conseil entered.

"What is the matter?" said I, at once.

"I came to ask you, sir," replied Conseil.

"Confound it!" exclaimed the Canadian, "I know well enough! The Nautilus
has struck; and, judging by the way she lies, I do not think she will right herself
as she did the first time in Torres Straits."

"But," I asked, "has she at least come to the surface of the sea?"

"We do not know," said Conseil.

"It is easy to decide," I answered. I consulted the manometer. To my great

surprise, it showed a depth of more than 180 fathoms. "What does that mean?" I
exclaimed.

"We must ask Captain Nemo," said Conseil.

"But where shall we find him?" said Ned Land.

"Follow me," said I, to my companions.

We left the saloon. There was no one in the library. At the centre staircase, by
the berths of the ship's crew, there was no one. I thought that Captain Nemo must
be in the pilot's cage. It was best to wait. We all returned to the saloon. For
twenty minutes we remained thus, trying to hear the slightest noise which might
be made on board the Nautilus, when Captain Nemo entered. He seemed not to
see us; his face, generally so impassive, showed signs of uneasiness. He watched
the compass silently, then the manometer; and, going to the planisphere, placed
his finger on a spot representing the southern seas. I would not interrupt him;
but, some minutes later, when he turned towards me, I said, using one of his own
expressions in the Torres Straits:

"An incident, Captain?"

"No, sir; an accident this time."

"Serious?"

"Perhaps."

"Is the danger immediate?"

"No."

"The Nautilus has stranded?"

"Yes."

"And this has happened—how?"

"From a caprice of nature, not from the ignorance of man. Not a mistake has
been made in the working. But we cannot prevent equilibrium from producing
its effects. We may brave human laws, but we cannot resist natural ones."

Captain Nemo had chosen a strange moment for uttering this philosophical
reflection. On the whole, his answer helped me little.

"May I ask, sir, the cause of this accident?"

"An enormous block of ice, a whole mountain, has turned over," he replied.
"When icebergs are undermined at their base by warmer water or reiterated
shocks their centre of gravity rises, and the whole thing turns over. This is what
has happened; one of these blocks, as it fell, struck the Nautilus, then, gliding
under its hull, raised it with irresistible force, bringing it into beds which are not
so thick, where it is lying on its side."

"But can we not get the Nautilus off by emptying its reservoirs, that it might
regain its equilibrium?"

"That, sir, is being done at this moment. You can hear the pump working.
Look at the needle of the manometer; it shows that the Nautilus is rising, but the
block of ice is floating with it; and, until some obstacle stops its ascending
motion, our position cannot be altered."

Indeed, the Nautilus still held the same position to starboard; doubtless it
would right itself when the block stopped. But at this moment who knows if we
may not be frightfully crushed between the two glassy surfaces? I reflected on
all the consequences of our position. Captain Nemo never took his eyes off the
manometer. Since the fall of the iceberg, the Nautilus had risen about a hundred
and fifty feet, but it still made the same angle with the perpendicular. Suddenly a
slight movement was felt in the hold. Evidently it was righting a little. Things
hanging in the saloon were sensibly returning to their normal position. The
partitions were nearing the upright. No one spoke. With beating hearts we
watched and felt the straightening. The boards became horizontal under our feet.
Ten minutes passed.

"At last we have righted!" I exclaimed.

"Yes," said Captain Nemo, going to the door of the saloon.

"But are we floating?" I asked.

"Certainly," he replied; "since the reservoirs are not empty; and, when empty,
the Nautilus must rise to the surface of the sea."

We were in open sea; but at a distance of about ten yards, on either side of the
Nautilus, rose a dazzling wall of ice. Above and beneath the same wall. Above,
because the lower surface of the iceberg stretched over us like an immense
ceiling. Beneath, because the overturned block, having slid by degrees, had
found a resting-place on the lateral walls, which kept it in that position. The
Nautilus was really imprisoned in a perfect tunnel of ice more than twenty yards
in breadth, filled with quiet water. It was easy to get out of it by going either
forward or backward, and then make a free passage under the iceberg, some
hundreds of yards deeper. The luminous ceiling had been extinguished, but the
saloon was still resplendent with intense light. It was the powerful reflection
from the glass partition sent violently back to the sheets of the lantern. I cannot
describe the effect of the voltaic rays upon the great blocks so capriciously cut;
upon every angle, every ridge, every facet was thrown a different light,
according to the nature of the veins running through the ice; a dazzling mine of
gems, particularly of sapphires, their blue rays crossing with the green of the
emerald. Here and there were opal shades of wonderful softness, running
through bright spots like diamonds of fire, the brilliancy of which the eye could
not bear. The power of the lantern seemed increased a hundredfold, like a lamp
through the lenticular plates of a first-class lighthouse.

"How beautiful! how beautiful!" cried Conseil.

"Yes," I said, "it is a wonderful sight. Is it not, Ned?"

"Yes, confound it! Yes," answered Ned Land, "it is superb! I am mad at being
obliged to admit it. No one has ever seen anything like it; but the sight may cost
us dear. And, if I must say all, I think we are seeing here things which God never
intended man to see."

Ned was right, it was too beautiful. Suddenly a cry from Conseil made me
turn.

"What is it?" I asked.

"Shut your eyes, sir! Do not look, sir!" Saying which, Conseil clapped his
hands over his eyes.

"But what is the matter, my boy?"

"I am dazzled, blinded."

My eyes turned involuntarily towards the glass, but I could not stand the fire
which seemed to devour them. I understood what had happened. The Nautilus
had put on full speed. All the quiet lustre of the ice-walls was at once changed
into flashes of lightning. The fire from these myriads of diamonds was blinding.
It required some time to calm our troubled looks. At last the hands were taken
down.
 "Faith, I should never have believed it," said Conseil.

It was then five in the morning; and at that moment a shock was felt at the
bows of the Nautilus. I knew that its spur had struck a block of ice. It must have
been a false manoeuvre, for this submarine tunnel, obstructed by blocks, was not
very easy navigation. I thought that Captain Nemo, by changing his course,
would either turn these obstacles or else follow the windings of the tunnel. In
any case, the road before us could not be entirely blocked. But, contrary to my
expectations, the Nautilus took a decided retrograde motion.

"We are going backwards?" said Conseil.

"Yes," I replied. "This end of the tunnel can have no egress."

"And then?"

"Then," said I, "the working is easy. We must go back again, and go out at the
southern opening. That is all."

In speaking thus, I wished to appear more confident than I really was. But the
retrograde motion of the Nautilus was increasing; and, reversing the screw, it
carried us at great speed.

"It will be a hindrance," said Ned.

"What does it matter, some hours more or less, provided we get out at last?"

"Yes," repeated Ned Land, "provided we do get out at last!"

For a short time I walked from the saloon to the library. My companions were
silent. I soon threw myself on an ottoman, and took a book, which my eyes
overran mechanically. A quarter of an hour after, Conseil, approaching me, said,
"Is what you are reading very interesting, sir?"

"Very interesting!" I replied.

"I should think so, sir. It is your own book you are reading."

"My book?"
 And indeed I was holding in my hand the work on the Great Submarine
Depths. I did not even dream of it. I closed the book and returned to my walk.
Ned and Conseil rose to go.

"Stay here, my friends," said I, detaining them. "Let us remain together until
we are out of this block."

"As you please, sir," Conseil replied.

Some hours passed. I often looked at the instruments hanging from the
partition. The manometer showed that the Nautilus kept at a constant depth of
more than three hundred yards; the compass still pointed to south; the log
indicated a speed of twenty miles an hour, which, in such a cramped space, was
very great. But Captain Nemo knew that he could not hasten too much, and that
minutes were worth ages to us. At twenty-five minutes past eight a second shock
took place, this time from behind. I turned pale. My companions were close by
my side. I seized Conseil's hand. Our looks expressed our feelings better than
words. At this moment the Captain entered the saloon. I went up to him.

"Our course is barred southward?" I asked.

"Yes, sir. The iceberg has shifted and closed every outlet."

"We are blocked up then?"

"Yes."

CHAPTER XVI

WANT OF AIR

Thus around the Nautilus, above and below, was an impenetrable wall of ice.
We were prisoners to the iceberg. I watched the Captain. His countenance had
resumed its habitual imperturbability.

"Gentlemen," he said calmly, "there are two ways of dying in the

circumstances in which we are placed." (This puzzling person had the air of a
mathematical professor lecturing to his pupils.) "The first is to be crushed; the
second is to die of suffocation. I do not speak of the possibility of dying of
hunger, for the supply of provisions in the Nautilus will certainly last longer than
we shall. Let us, then, calculate our chances."

"As to suffocation, Captain," I replied, "that is not to be feared, because our

reservoirs are full."

"Just so; but they will only yield two days' supply of air. Now, for thirty-six
hours we have been hidden under the water, and already the heavy atmosphere of
the Nautilus requires renewal. In forty-eight hours our reserve will be
exhausted."

"Well, Captain, can we be delivered before forty-eight hours?"

"We will attempt it, at least, by piercing the wall that surrounds us."

"On which side?"

"Sound will tell us. I am going to run the Nautilus aground on the lower bank,
and my men will attack the iceberg on the side that is least thick."

Captain Nemo went out. Soon I discovered by a hissing noise that the water
was entering the reservoirs. The Nautilus sank slowly, and rested on the ice at a
depth of 350 yards, the depth at which the lower bank was immersed.

"My friends," I said, "our situation is serious, but I rely on your courage and
energy."

"Sir," replied the Canadian, "I am ready to do anything for the general
safety."

"Good! Ned," and I held out my hand to the Canadian.

"I will add," he continued, "that, being as handy with the pickaxe as with the
harpoon, if I can be useful to the Captain, he can command my services."

"He will not refuse your help. Come, Ned!"

 I led him to the room where the crew of the Nautilus were putting on their
cork-jackets. I told the Captain of Ned's proposal, which he accepted. The
Canadian put on his sea-costume, and was ready as soon as his companions.
When Ned was dressed, I re-entered the drawing-room, where the panes of glass
were open, and, posted near Conseil, I examined the ambient beds that supported
the Nautilus. Some instants after, we saw a dozen of the crew set foot on the
bank of ice, and among them Ned Land, easily known by his stature. Captain
Nemo was with them. Before proceeding to dig the walls, he took the soundings,
to be sure of working in the right direction. Long sounding lines were sunk in the
side walls, but after fifteen yards they were again stopped by the thick wall. It
was useless to attack it on the ceiling-like surface, since the iceberg itself
measured more than 400 yards in height. Captain Nemo then sounded the lower
surface. There ten yards of wall separated us from the water, so great was the
thickness of the ice-field. It was necessary, therefore, to cut from it a piece equal
in extent to the waterline of the Nautilus. There were about 6,000 cubic yards to
detach, so as to dig a hole by which we could descend to the ice-field. The work
had begun immediately and carried on with indefatigable energy. Instead of
digging round the Nautilus which would have involved greater difficulty,
Captain Nemo had an immense trench made at eight yards from the port-quarter.
Then the men set to work simultaneously with their screws on several points of
its circumference. Presently the pickaxe attacked this compact matter vigorously,
and large blocks were detached from the mass. By a curious effect of specific
gravity, these blocks, lighter than water, fled, so to speak, to the vault of the
tunnel, that increased in thickness at the top in proportion as it diminished at the
base. But that mattered little, so long as the lower part grew thinner. After two
hours' hard work, Ned Land came in exhausted. He and his comrades were
replaced by new workers, whom Conseil and I joined. The second lieutenant of
the Nautilus superintended us. The water seemed singularly cold, but I soon got
warm handling the pickaxe. My movements were free enough, although they
were made under a pressure of thirty atmospheres. When I re-entered, after
working two hours, to take some food and rest, I found a perceptible difference
between the pure fluid with which the Rouquayrol engine supplied me and the
atmosphere of the Nautilus, already charged with carbonic acid. The air had not
been renewed for forty-eight hours, and its vivifying qualities were considerably
enfeebled. However, after a lapse of twelve hours, we had only raised a block of
ice one yard thick, on the marked surface, which was about 600 cubic yards!
Reckoning that it took twelve hours to accomplish this much it would take five
nights and four days to bring this enterprise to a satisfactory conclusion. Five
nights and four days! And we have only air enough for two days in the
reservoirs! "Without taking into account," said Ned, "that, even if we get out of
this infernal prison, we shall also be imprisoned under the iceberg, shut out from
all possible communication with the atmosphere." True enough! Who could then
foresee the minimum of time necessary for our deliverance? We might be
suffocated before the Nautilus could regain the surface of the waves? Was it
destined to perish in this ice-tomb, with all those it enclosed? The situation was
terrible. But everyone had looked the danger in the face, and each was
determined to do his duty to the last.

As I expected, during the night a new block a yard square was carried away,
and still further sank the immense hollow. But in the morning when, dressed in
my cork-jacket, I traversed the slushy mass at a temperature of six or seven
degrees below zero, I remarked that the side walls were gradually closing in. The
beds of water farthest from the trench, that were not warmed by the men's work,
showed a tendency to solidification. In presence of this new and imminent
danger, what would become of our chances of safety, and how hinder the
solidification of this liquid medium, that would burst the partitions of the
Nautilus like glass?

I did not tell my companions of this new danger. What was the good of
damping the energy they displayed in the painful work of escape? But when I
went on board again, I told Captain Nemo of this grave complication.

"I know it," he said, in that calm tone which could counteract the most
terrible apprehensions. "It is one danger more; but I see no way of escaping it;
the only chance of safety is to go quicker than solidification. We must be
beforehand with it, that is all."

On this day for several hours I used my pickaxe vigorously. The work kept
me up. Besides, to work was to quit the Nautilus, and breathe directly the pure
air drawn from the reservoirs, and supplied by our apparatus, and to quit the
impoverished and vitiated atmosphere. Towards evening the trench was dug one
yard deeper. When I returned on board, I was nearly suffocated by the carbonic
acid with which the air was filled—ah! if we had only the chemical means to
drive away this deleterious gas. We had plenty of oxygen; all this water
contained a considerable quantity, and by dissolving it with our powerful piles, it
would restore the vivifying fluid. I had thought well over it; but of what good
was that, since the carbonic acid produced by our respiration had invaded every
part of the vessel? To absorb it, it was necessary to fill some jars with caustic
potash, and to shake them incessantly. Now this substance was wanting on
board, and nothing could replace it. On that evening, Captain Nemo ought to
open the taps of his reservoirs, and let some pure air into the interior of the
Nautilus; without this precaution we could not get rid of the sense of suffocation.
The next day, March 26th, I resumed my miner's work in beginning the fifth
yard. The side walls and the lower surface of the iceberg thickened visibly. It
was evident that they would meet before the Nautilus was able to disengage
itself. Despair seized me for an instant; my pickaxe nearly fell from my hands.
What was the good of digging if I must be suffocated, crushed by the water that
was turning into stone?—a punishment that the ferocity of the savages even
would not have invented! Just then Captain Nemo passed near me. I touched his
hand and showed him the walls of our prison. The wall to port had advanced to
at least four yards from the hull of the Nautilus. The Captain understood me, and
signed me to follow him. We went on board. I took off my cork-jacket and
accompanied him into the drawing-room.

"M. Aronnax, we must attempt some desperate means, or we shall be sealed

up in this solidified water as in cement."

"Yes; but what is to be done?"

"Ah! if my Nautilus were strong enough to bear this pressure without being
crushed!"

"Well?" I asked, not catching the Captain's idea.

"Do you not understand," he replied, "that this congelation of water will help
us? Do you not see that by its solidification, it would burst through this field of
ice that imprisons us, as, when it freezes, it bursts the hardest stones? Do you not
perceive that it would be an agent of safety instead of destruction?"

"Yes, Captain, perhaps. But, whatever resistance to crushing the Nautilus

possesses, it could not support this terrible pressure, and would be flattened like
an iron plate."

"I know it, sir. Therefore we must not reckon on the aid of nature, but on our
own exertions. We must stop this solidification. Not only will the side walls be
pressed together; but there is not ten feet of water before or behind the Nautilus.
The congelation gains on us on all sides."
 "How long will the air in the reservoirs last for us to breathe on board?"

The Captain looked in my face. "After to-morrow they will be empty!"

A cold sweat came over me. However, ought I to have been astonished at the
answer? On March 22, the Nautilus was in the open polar seas. We were at 26°.
For five days we had lived on the reserve on board. And what was left of the
respirable air must be kept for the workers. Even now, as I write, my recollection
is still so vivid that an involuntary terror seizes me and my lungs seem to be
without air. Meanwhile, Captain Nemo reflected silently, and evidently an idea
had struck him; but he seemed to reject it. At last, these words escaped his lips:

"Boiling water!" he muttered.

"Boiling water?" I cried.

"Yes, sir. We are enclosed in a space that is relatively confined. Would not
jets of boiling water, constantly injected by the pumps, raise the temperature in
this part and stay the congelation?"

"Let us try it," I said resolutely.

"Let us try it, Professor."

The thermometer then stood at 7° outside. Captain Nemo took me to the

galleys, where the vast distillatory machines stood that furnished the drinkable
water by evaporation. They filled these with water, and all the electric heat from
the piles was thrown through the worms bathed in the liquid. In a few minutes
this water reached 100°. It was directed towards the pumps, while fresh water
replaced it in proportion. The heat developed by the troughs was such that cold
water, drawn up from the sea after only having gone through the machines, came
boiling into the body of the pump. The injection was begun, and three hours after
the thermometer marked 6° below zero outside. One degree was gained. Two
hours later the thermometer only marked 4°.

"We shall succeed," I said to the Captain, after having anxiously watched the
result of the operation.

"I think," he answered, "that we shall not be crushed. We have no more

suffocation to fear."
 During the night the temperature of the water rose to 1° below zero. The
injections could not carry it to a higher point. But, as the congelation of the sea-
water produces at least 2°, I was at least reassured against the dangers of
solidification.

The next day, March 27th, six yards of ice had been cleared, twelve feet only
remaining to be cleared away. There was yet forty-eight hours' work. The air
could not be renewed in the interior of the Nautilus. And this day would make it
worse. An intolerable weight oppressed me. Towards three o'clock in the
evening this feeling rose to a violent degree. Yawns dislocated my jaws. My
lungs panted as they inhaled this burning fluid, which became rarefied more and
more. A moral torpor took hold of me. I was powerless, almost unconscious. My
brave Conseil, though exhibiting the same symptoms and suffering in the same
manner, never left me. He took my hand and encouraged me, and I heard him
murmur, "Oh! if I could only not breathe, so as to leave more air for my master!"

Tears came into my eyes on hearing him speak thus. If our situation to all was
intolerable in the interior, with what haste and gladness would we put on our
cork-jackets to work in our turn! Pickaxes sounded on the frozen ice-beds. Our
arms ached, the skin was torn off our hands. But what were these fatigues, what
did the wounds matter? Vital air came to the lungs! We breathed! we breathed!

All this time no one prolonged his voluntary task beyond the prescribed time.
His task accomplished, each one handed in turn to his panting companions the
apparatus that supplied him with life. Captain Nemo set the example, and
submitted first to this severe discipline. When the time came, he gave up his
apparatus to another and returned to the vitiated air on board, calm, unflinching,
unmurmuring.

On that day the ordinary work was accomplished with unusual vigour. Only
two yards remained to be raised from the surface. Two yards only separated us
from the open sea. But the reservoirs were nearly emptied of air. The little that
remained ought to be kept for the workers; not a particle for the Nautilus. When
I went back on board, I was half suffocated. What a night! I know not how to
describe it. The next day my breathing was oppressed. Dizziness accompanied
the pain in my head and made me like a drunken man. My companions showed
the same symptoms. Some of the crew had rattling in the throat.

On that day, the sixth of our imprisonment, Captain Nemo, finding the
pickaxes work too slowly, resolved to crush the ice-bed that still separated us
from the liquid sheet. This man's coolness and energy never forsook him. He
subdued his physical pains by moral force.

By his orders the vessel was lightened, that is to say, raised from the ice-bed
by a change of specific gravity. When it floated they towed it so as to bring it
above the immense trench made on the level of the water-line. Then, filling his
reservoirs of water, he descended and shut himself up in the hole.

Just then all the crew came on board, and the double door of communication
was shut. The Nautilus then rested on the bed of ice, which was not one yard
thick, and which the sounding leads had perforated in a thousand places. The
taps of the reservoirs were then opened, and a hundred cubic yards of water was
let in, increasing the weight of the Nautilus to 1,800 tons. We waited, we
listened, forgetting our sufferings in hope. Our safety depended on this last
chance. Notwithstanding the buzzing in my head, I soon heard the humming
sound under the hull of the Nautilus. The ice cracked with a singular noise, like
tearing paper, and the Nautilus sank.

"We are off!" murmured Conseil in my ear.

I could not answer him. I seized his hand, and pressed it convulsively. All at
once, carried away by its frightful overcharge, the Nautilus sank like a bullet
under the waters, that is to say, it fell as if it was in a vacuum. Then all the
electric force was put on the pumps, that soon began to let the water out of the
reservoirs. After some minutes, our fall was stopped. Soon, too, the manometer
indicated an ascending movement. The screw, going at full speed, made the iron
hull tremble to its very bolts and drew us towards the north. But if this floating
under the iceberg is to last another day before we reach the open sea, I shall be
dead first.

Half stretched upon a divan in the library, I was suffocating. My face was
purple, my lips blue, my faculties suspended. I neither saw nor heard. All notion
of time had gone from my mind. My muscles could not contract. I do not know
how many hours passed thus, but I was conscious of the agony that was coming
over me. I felt as if I was going to die. Suddenly I came to. Some breaths of air
penetrated my lungs. Had we risen to the surface of the waves? Were we free of
the iceberg? No! Ned and Conseil, my two brave friends, were sacrificing
themselves to save me. Some particles of air still remained at the bottom of one
apparatus. Instead of using it, they had kept it for me, and, while they were being
suffocated, they gave me life, drop by drop. I wanted to push back the thing;
they held my hands, and for some moments I breathed freely. I looked at the
clock; it was eleven in the morning. It ought to be the 28th of March. The
Nautilus went at a frightful pace, forty miles an hour. It literally tore through the
water. Where was Captain Nemo? Had he succumbed? Were his companions
dead with him? At the moment the manometer indicated that we were not more
than twenty feet from the surface. A mere plate of ice separated us from the
atmosphere. Could we not break it? Perhaps. In any case the Nautilus was going
to attempt it. I felt that it was in an oblique position, lowering the stern, and
raising the bows. The introduction of water had been the means of disturbing its
equilibrium. Then, impelled by its powerful screw, it attacked the ice-field from
beneath like a formidable battering-ram. It broke it by backing and then rushing
forward against the field, which gradually gave way; and at last, dashing
suddenly against it, shot forwards on the ice-field, that crushed beneath its
weight. The panel was opened—one might say torn off—and the pure air came
in in abundance to all parts of the Nautilus.

CHAPTER XVII

FROM CAPE HORN TO THE AMAZON

How I got on to the platform, I have no idea; perhaps the Canadian had
carried me there. But I breathed, I inhaled the vivifying sea-air. My two
companions were getting drunk with the fresh particles. The other unhappy men
had been so long without food, that they could not with impunity indulge in the
simplest aliments that were given them. We, on the contrary, had no end to
restrain ourselves; we could draw this air freely into our lungs, and it was the
breeze, the breeze alone, that filled us with this keen enjoyment.

"Ah!" said Conseil, "how delightful this oxygen is! Master need not fear to
breathe it. There is enough for everybody."

Ned Land did not speak, but he opened his jaws wide enough to frighten a
shark. Our strength soon returned, and, when I looked round me, I saw we were
alone on the platform. The foreign seamen in the Nautilus were contented with
the air that circulated in the interior; none of them had come to drink in the open
air.

The first words I spoke were words of gratitude and thankfulness to my two
companions. Ned and Conseil had prolonged my life during the last hours of this
long agony. All my gratitude could not repay such devotion.

"My friends," said I, "we are bound one to the other for ever, and I am under
infinite obligations to you."

"Which I shall take advantage of," exclaimed the Canadian.

"What do you mean?" said Conseil.

"I mean that I shall take you with me when I leave this infernal Nautilus."

"Well," said Conseil, "after all this, are we going right?"

"Yes," I replied, "for we are going the way of the sun, and here the sun is in
the north."

"No doubt," said Ned Land; "but it remains to be seen whether he will bring
the ship into the Pacific or the Atlantic Ocean, that is, into frequented or deserted
seas."

I could not answer that question, and I feared that Captain Nemo would
rather take us to the vast ocean that touches the coasts of Asia and America at
the same time. He would thus complete the tour round the submarine world, and
return to those waters in which the Nautilus could sail freely. We ought, before
long, to settle this important point. The Nautilus went at a rapid pace. The polar
circle was soon passed, and the course shaped for Cape Horn. We were off the
American point, March 31st, at seven o'clock in the evening. Then all our past
sufferings were forgotten. The remembrance of that imprisonment in the ice was
effaced from our minds. We only thought of the future. Captain Nemo did not
appear again either in the drawing-room or on the platform. The point shown
each day on the planisphere, and, marked by the lieutenant, showed me the exact
direction of the Nautilus. Now, on that evening, it was evident, to, my great
satisfaction, that we were going back to the North by the Atlantic. The next day,
April 1st, when the Nautilus ascended to the surface some minutes before noon,
we sighted land to the west. It was Terra del Fuego, which the first navigators
named thus from seeing the quantity of smoke that rose from the natives' huts.
The coast seemed low to me, but in the distance rose high mountains. I even
thought I had a glimpse of Mount Sarmiento, that rises 2,070 yards above the
level of the sea, with a very pointed summit, which, according as it is misty or
clear, is a sign of fine or of wet weather. At this moment the peak was clearly
defined against the sky. The Nautilus, diving again under the water, approached
the coast, which was only some few miles off. From the glass windows in the
drawing-room, I saw long seaweeds and gigantic fuci and varech, of which the
open polar sea contains so many specimens, with their sharp polished filaments;
they measured about 300 yards in length—real cables, thicker than one's thumb;
and, having great tenacity, they are often used as ropes for vessels. Another weed
known as velp, with leaves four feet long, buried in the coral concretions, hung
at the bottom. It served as nest and food for myriads of crustacea and molluscs,
crabs, and cuttlefish. There seals and otters had splendid repasts, eating the flesh
of fish with sea-vegetables, according to the English fashion. Over this fertile
and luxuriant ground the Nautilus passed with great rapidity. Towards evening it
approached the Falkland group, the rough summits of which I recognised the
following day. The depth of the sea was moderate. On the shores our nets
brought in beautiful specimens of sea weed, and particularly a certain fucus, the
roots of which were filled with the best mussels in the world. Geese and ducks
fell by dozens on the platform, and soon took their places in the pantry on board.

When the last heights of the Falklands had disappeared from the horizon, the
Nautilus sank to between twenty and twenty-five yards, and followed the
American coast. Captain Nemo did not show himself. Until the 3rd of April we
did not quit the shores of Patagonia, sometimes under the ocean, sometimes at
the surface. The Nautilus passed beyond the large estuary formed by the
Uraguay. Its direction was northwards, and followed the long windings of the
coast of South America. We had then made 1,600 miles since our embarkation in
the seas of Japan. About eleven o'clock in the morning the Tropic of Capricorn
was crossed on the thirty-seventh meridian, and we passed Cape Frio standing
out to sea. Captain Nemo, to Ned Land's great displeasure, did not like the
neighbourhood of the inhabited coasts of Brazil, for we went at a giddy speed.
Not a fish, not a bird of the swiftest kind could follow us, and the natural
curiosities of these seas escaped all observation.

This speed was kept up for several days, and in the evening of the 9th of
April we sighted the most westerly point of South America that forms Cape San
Roque. But then the Nautilus swerved again, and sought the lowest depth of a
submarine valley which is between this Cape and Sierra Leone on the African
coast. This valley bifurcates to the parallel of the Antilles, and terminates at the
mouth by the enormous depression of 9,000 yards. In this place, the geological
basin of the ocean forms, as far as the Lesser Antilles, a cliff to three and a half
miles perpendicular in height, and, at the parallel of the Cape Verde Islands, an
other wall not less considerable, that encloses thus all the sunk continent of the
Atlantic. The bottom of this immense valley is dotted with some mountains, that
give to these submarine places a picturesque aspect. I speak, moreover, from the
manuscript charts that were in the library of the Nautilus—charts evidently due
to Captain Nemo's hand, and made after his personal observations. For two days
the desert and deep waters were visited by means of the inclined planes. The
Nautilus was furnished with long diagonal broadsides which carried it to all
elevations. But on the 11th of April it rose suddenly, and land appeared at the
mouth of the Amazon River, a vast estuary, the embouchure of which is so
considerable that it freshens the sea-water for the distance of several leagues.

The equator was crossed. Twenty miles to the west were the Guianas, a
French territory, on which we could have found an easy refuge; but a stiff breeze
was blowing, and the furious waves would not have allowed a single boat to face
them. Ned Land understood that, no doubt, for he spoke not a word about it. For
my part, I made no allusion to his schemes of flight, for I would not urge him to
make an attempt that must inevitably fail. I made the time pass pleasantly by
interesting studies. During the days of April 11th and 12th, the Nautilus did not
leave the surface of the sea, and the net brought in a marvellous haul of
Zoophytes, fish and reptiles. Some zoophytes had been fished up by the chain of
the nets; they were for the most part beautiful phyctallines, belonging to the
actinidian family, and among other species the phyctalis protexta, peculiar to that
part of the ocean, with a little cylindrical trunk, ornamented With vertical lines,
speckled with red dots, crowning a marvellous blossoming of tentacles. As to the
molluscs, they consisted of some I had already observed—turritellas, olive
porphyras, with regular lines intercrossed, with red spots standing out plainly
against the flesh; odd pteroceras, like petrified scorpions; translucid hyaleas,
argonauts, cuttle-fish (excellent eating), and certain species of calmars that
naturalists of antiquity have classed amongst the flying-fish, and that serve
principally for bait for cod-fishing. I had now an opportunity of studying several
species of fish on these shores. Amongst the cartilaginous ones, petromyzons-
pricka, a sort of eel, fifteen inches long, with a greenish head, violet fins, grey-
blue back, brown belly, silvered and sown with bright spots, the pupil of the eye
encircled with gold—a curious animal, that the current of the Amazon had
drawn to the sea, for they inhabit fresh waters—tuberculated streaks, with
pointed snouts, and a long loose tail, armed with a long jagged sting; little
sharks, a yard long, grey and whitish skin, and several rows of teeth, bent back,
that are generally known by the name of pantouffles; vespertilios, a kind of red
isosceles triangle, half a yard long, to which pectorals are attached by fleshy
prolongations that make them look like bats, but that their horny appendage,
situated near the nostrils, has given them the name of sea-unicorns; lastly, some
species of balistae, the curassavian, whose spots were of a brilliant gold colour,
and the capriscus of clear violet, and with varying shades like a pigeon's throat.

I end here this catalogue, which is somewhat dry perhaps, but very exact,
with a series of bony fish that I observed in passing belonging to the apteronotes,
and whose snout is white as snow, the body of a beautiful black, marked with a
very long loose fleshy strip; odontognathes, armed with spikes; sardines nine
inches long, glittering with a bright silver light; a species of mackerel provided
with two anal fins; centronotes of a blackish tint, that are fished for with torches,
long fish, two yards in length, with fat flesh, white and firm, which, when they
arc fresh, taste like eel, and when dry, like smoked salmon; labres, half red,
covered with scales only at the bottom of the dorsal and anal fins; chrysoptera,
on which gold and silver blend their brightness with that of the ruby and topaz;
golden-tailed spares, the flesh of which is extremely delicate, and whose
phosphorescent properties betray them in the midst of the waters; orange-
coloured spares with long tongues; maigres, with gold caudal fins, dark thorn-
tails, anableps of Surinam, etc.

Notwithstanding this "et cetera," I must not omit to mention fish that Conseil
will long remember, and with good reason. One of our nets had hauled up a sort
of very flat ray fish, which, with the tail cut off, formed a perfect disc, and
weighed twenty ounces. It was white underneath, red above, with large round
spots of dark blue encircled with black, very glossy skin, terminating in a
bilobed fin. Laid out on the platform, it struggled, tried to turn itself by
convulsive movements, and made so many efforts, that one last turn had nearly
sent it into the sea. But Conseil, not wishing to let the fish go, rushed to it, and,
before I could prevent him, had seized it with both hands. In a moment he was
overthrown, his legs in the air, and half his body paralysed, crying—

"Oh! master, master! help me!"

 It was the first time the poor boy had spoken to me so familiarly. The
Canadian and I took him up, and rubbed his contracted arms till he became
sensible. The unfortunate Conseil had attacked a cramp-fish of the most
dangerous kind, the cumana. This odd animal, in a medium conductor like water,
strikes fish at several yards' distance, so great is the power of its electric organ,
the two principal surfaces of which do not measure less than twenty-seven
square feet. The next day, April 12th, the Nautilus approached the Dutch coast,
near the mouth of the Maroni. There several groups of sea-cows herded together;
they were manatees, that, like the dugong and the stellera, belong to the skenian
order. These beautiful animals, peaceable and inoffensive, from eighteen to
twenty-one feet in length, weigh at least sixteen hundredweight. I told Ned Land
and Conseil that provident nature had assigned an important role to these
mammalia. Indeed, they, like the seals, are designed to graze on the submarine
prairies, and thus destroy the accumulation of weed that obstructs the tropical
rivers.

"And do you know," I added, "what has been the result since men have
almost entirely annihilated this useful race? That the putrefied weeds have
poisoned the air, and the poisoned air causes the yellow fever, that desolates
these beautiful countries. Enormous vegetations are multiplied under the torrid
seas, and the evil is irresistibly developed from the mouth of the Rio de la Plata
to Florida. If we are to believe Toussenel, this plague is nothing to what it would
be if the seas were cleaned of whales and seals. Then, infested with poulps,
medusae, and cuttle-fish, they would become immense centres of infection, since
their waves would not possess 'these vast stomachs that God had charged to
infest the surface of the seas.'"

CHAPTER XVIII

THE POULPS

For several days the Nautilus kept off from the American coast. Evidently it
did not wish to risk the tides of the Gulf of Mexico or of the sea of the Antilles.
April 16th, we sighted Martinique and Guadaloupe from a distance of about
thirty miles. I saw their tall peaks for an instant. The Canadian, who counted on
carrying out his projects in the Gulf, by either landing or hailing one of the
numerous boats that coast from one island to another, was quite disheartened.
Flight would have been quite practicable, if Ned Land had been able to take
possession of the boat without the Captain's knowledge. But in the open sea it
could not be thought of. The Canadian, Conseil, and I had a long conversation
on this subject. For six months we had been prisoners on board the Nautilus. We
had travelled 17,000 leagues; and, as Ned Land said, there was no reason why it
should come to an end. We could hope nothing from the Captain of the Nautilus,
but only from ourselves. Besides, for some time past he had become graver,
more retired, less sociable. He seemed to shun me. I met him rarely. Formerly he
was pleased to explain the submarine marvels to me; now he left me to my
studies, and came no more to the saloon. What change had come over him? For
what cause? For my part, I did not wish to bury with me my curious and novel
studies. I had now the power to write the true book of the sea; and this book,
sooner or later, I wished to see daylight. The land nearest us was the archipelago
of the Bahamas. There rose high submarine cliffs covered with large weeds. It
was about eleven o'clock when Ned Land drew my attention to a formidable
pricking, like the sting of an ant, which was produced by means of large
seaweeds.

"Well," I said, "these are proper caverns for poulps, and I should not be
astonished to see some of these monsters."

"What!" said Conseil; "cuttlefish, real cuttlefish of the cephalopod class?"

"No," I said, "poulps of huge dimensions."

"I will never believe that such animals exist," said Ned.

"Well," said Conseil, with the most serious air in the world, "I remember
perfectly to have seen a large vessel drawn under the waves by an octopus's
arm."

"You saw that?" said the Canadian.

"Yes, Ned."

"With your own eyes?"

"With my own eyes."

 "Where, pray, might that be?"

"At St. Malo," answered Conseil.

"In the port?" said Ned, ironically.

"No; in a church," replied Conseil.

"In a church!" cried the Canadian.

"Yes; friend Ned. In a picture representing the poulp in question."

"Good!" said Ned Land, bursting out laughing.

"He is quite right," I said. "I have heard of this picture; but the subject
represented is taken from a legend, and you know what to think of legends in the
matter of natural history. Besides, when it is a question of monsters, the
imagination is apt to run wild. Not only is it supposed that these poulps can draw
down vessels, but a certain Olaus Magnus speaks of an octopus a mile long that
is more like an island than an animal. It is also said that the Bishop of Nidros
was building an altar on an immense rock. Mass finished, the rock began to
walk, and returned to the sea. The rock was a poulp. Another Bishop,
Pontoppidan, speaks also of a poulp on which a regiment of cavalry could
manoeuvre. Lastly, the ancient naturalists speak of monsters whose mouths were
like gulfs, and which were too large to pass through the Straits of Gibraltar."

"But how much is true of these stories?" asked Conseil.

"Nothing, my friends; at least of that which passes the limit of truth to get to
fable or legend. Nevertheless, there must be some ground for the imagination of
the story-tellers. One cannot deny that poulps and cuttlefish exist of a large
species, inferior, however, to the cetaceans. Aristotle has stated the dimensions
of a cuttlefish as five cubits, or nine feet two inches. Our fishermen frequently
see some that are more than four feet long. Some skeletons of poulps are
preserved in the museums of Trieste and Montpelier, that measure two yards in
length. Besides, according to the calculations of some naturalists, one of these
animals only six feet long would have tentacles twenty-seven feet long. That
would suffice to make a formidable monster."

"Do they fish for them in these days?" asked Ned.

 "If they do not fish for them, sailors see them at least. One of my friends,
Captain Paul Bos of Havre, has often affirmed that he met one of these monsters
of colossal dimensions in the Indian seas. But the most astonishing fact, and
which does not permit of the denial of the existence of these gigantic animals,
happened some years ago, in 1861."

"What is the fact?" asked Ned Land.

"This is it. In 1861, to the north-east of Teneriffe, very nearly in the same
latitude we are in now, the crew of the despatch-boat Alector perceived a
monstrous cuttlefish swimming in the waters. Captain Bouguer went near to the
animal, and attacked it with harpoon and guns, without much success, for balls
and harpoons glided over the soft flesh. After several fruitless attempts the crew
tried to pass a slip-knot round the body of the mollusc. The noose slipped as far
as the tail fins and there stopped. They tried then to haul it on board, but its
weight was so considerable that the tightness of the cord separated the tail from
the body, and, deprived of this ornament, he disappeared under the water."

"Indeed! is that a fact?"

"An indisputable fact, my good Ned. They proposed to name this poulp
`Bouguer's cuttlefish.'"

"What length was it?" asked the Canadian.

"Did it not measure about six yards?" said Conseil, who, posted at the
window, was examining again the irregular windings of the cliff.

"Precisely," I replied.

"Its head," rejoined Conseil, "was it not crowned with eight tentacles, that
beat the water like a nest of serpents?"

"Precisely."

"Had not its eyes, placed at the back of its head, considerable development?"

"Yes, Conseil."

"And was not its mouth like a parrot's beak?"

 "Exactly, Conseil."

"Very well! no offence to master," he replied, quietly; "if this is not Bouguer's
cuttlefish, it is, at least, one of its brothers."

I looked at Conseil. Ned Land hurried to the window.

"What a horrible beast!" he cried.

I looked in my turn, and could not repress a gesture of disgust. Before my

eyes was a horrible monster worthy to figure in the legends of the marvellous. It
was an immense cuttlefish, being eight yards long. It swam crossways in the
direction of the Nautilus with great speed, watching us with its enormous staring
green eyes. Its eight arms, or rather feet, fixed to its head, that have given the
name of cephalopod to these animals, were twice as long as its body, and were
twisted like the furies' hair. One could see the 250 air holes on the inner side of
the tentacles. The monster's mouth, a horned beak like a parrot's, opened and
shut vertically. Its tongue, a horned substance, furnished with several rows of
pointed teeth, came out quivering from this veritable pair of shears. What a freak
of nature, a bird's beak on a mollusc! Its spindle-like body formed a fleshy mass
that might weigh 4,000 to 5,000 lb.; the, varying colour changing with great
rapidity, according to the irritation of the animal, passed successively from livid
grey to reddish brown. What irritated this mollusc? No doubt the presence of the
Nautilus, more formidable than itself, and on which its suckers or its jaws had no
hold. Yet, what monsters these poulps are! what vitality the Creator has given
them! what vigour in their movements! and they possess three hearts! Chance
had brought us in presence of this cuttlefish, and I did not wish to lose the
opportunity of carefully studying this specimen of cephalopods. I overcame the
horror that inspired me, and, taking a pencil, began to draw it.

"Perhaps this is the same which the Alector saw," said Conseil.

"No," replied the Canadian; "for this is whole, and the other had lost its tail."

"That is no reason," I replied. "The arms and tails of these animals are re-
formed by renewal; and in seven years the tail of Bouguer's cuttlefish has no
doubt had time to grow."

By this time other poulps appeared at the port light. I counted seven. They
formed a procession after the Nautilus, and I heard their beaks gnashing against
the iron hull. I continued my work. These monsters kept in the water with such
precision that they seemed immovable. Suddenly the Nautilus stopped. A shock
made it tremble in every plate.

"Have we struck anything?" I asked.

"In any case," replied the Canadian, "we shall be free, for we are floating."

The Nautilus was floating, no doubt, but it did not move. A minute passed.
Captain Nemo, followed by his lieutenant, entered the drawing-room. I had not
seen him for some time. He seemed dull. Without noticing or speaking to us, he
went to the panel, looked at the poulps, and said something to his lieutenant. The
latter went out. Soon the panels were shut. The ceiling was lighted. I went
towards the Captain.

"A curious collection of poulps?" I said.

"Yes, indeed, Mr. Naturalist," he replied; "and we are going to fight them,
man to beast."

I looked at him. I thought I had not heard aright.

"Man to beast?" I repeated.

"Yes, sir. The screw is stopped. I think that the horny jaws of one of the
cuttlefish is entangled in the blades. That is what prevents our moving."

"What are you going to do?"

"Rise to the surface, and slaughter this vermin."

"A difficult enterprise."

"Yes, indeed. The electric bullets are powerless against the soft flesh, where
they do not find resistance enough to go off. But we shall attack them with the
hatchet."

"And the harpoon, sir," said the Canadian, "if you do not refuse my help."

"I will accept it, Master Land."

 "We will follow you," I said, and, following Captain Nemo, we went towards
the central staircase.

There, about ten men with boarding-hatchets were ready for the attack.
Conseil and I took two hatchets; Ned Land seized a harpoon. The Nautilus had
then risen to the surface. One of the sailors, posted on the top ladderstep,
unscrewed the bolts of the panels. But hardly were the screws loosed, when the
panel rose with great violence, evidently drawn by the suckers of a poulp's arm.
Immediately one of these arms slid like a serpent down the opening and twenty
others were above. With one blow of the axe, Captain Nemo cut this formidable
tentacle, that slid wriggling down the ladder. Just as we were pressing one on the
other to reach the platform, two other arms, lashing the air, came down on the
seaman placed before Captain Nemo, and lifted him up with irresistible power.
Captain Nemo uttered a cry, and rushed out. We hurried after him.

What a scene! The unhappy man, seized by the tentacle and fixed to the
suckers, was balanced in the air at the caprice of this enormous trunk. He rattled
in his throat, he was stifled, he cried, "Help! help!" These words, spoken in
French, startled me! I had a fellow-countryman on board, perhaps several! That
heart-rending cry! I shall hear it all my life. The unfortunate man was lost. Who
could rescue him from that powerful pressure? However, Captain Nemo had
rushed to the poulp, and with one blow of the axe had cut through one arm. His
lieutenant struggled furiously against other monsters that crept on the flanks of
the Nautilus. The crew fought with their axes. The Canadian, Conseil, and I
buried our weapons in the fleshy masses; a strong smell of musk penetrated the
atmosphere. It was horrible!

For one instant, I thought the unhappy man, entangled with the poulp, would
be torn from its powerful suction. Seven of the eight arms had been cut off. One
only wriggled in the air, brandishing the victim like a feather. But just as Captain
Nemo and his lieutenant threw themselves on it, the animal ejected a stream of
black liquid. We were blinded with it. When the cloud dispersed, the cuttlefish
had disappeared, and my unfortunate countryman with it. Ten or twelve poulps
now invaded the platform and sides of the Nautilus. We rolled pell-mell into the
midst of this nest of serpents, that wriggled on the platform in the waves of
blood and ink. It seemed as though these slimy tentacles sprang up like the
hydra's heads. Ned Land's harpoon, at each stroke, was plunged into the staring
eyes of the cuttle fish. But my bold companion was suddenly overturned by the
tentacles of a monster he had not been able to avoid.
 Ah! how my heart beat with emotion and horror! The formidable beak of a
cuttlefish was open over Ned Land. The unhappy man would be cut in two. I
rushed to his succour. But Captain Nemo was before me; his axe disappeared
between the two enormous jaws, and, miraculously saved, the Canadian, rising,
plunged his harpoon deep into the triple heart of the poulp.

"I owed myself this revenge!" said the Captain to the Canadian.

Ned bowed without replying. The combat had lasted a quarter of an hour. The
monsters, vanquished and mutilated, left us at last, and disappeared under the
waves. Captain Nemo, covered with blood, nearly exhausted, gazed upon the sea
that had swallowed up one of his companions, and great tears gathered in his
eyes.
 CHAPTER XIX

THE GULF STREAM

This terrible scene of the 20th of April none of us can ever forget. I have
written it under the influence of violent emotion. Since then I have revised the
recital; I have read it to Conseil and to the Canadian. They found it exact as to
facts, but insufficient as to effect. To paint such pictures, one must have the pen
of the most illustrious of our poets, the author of The Toilers of the Deep.

I have said that Captain Nemo wept while watching the waves; his grief was
great. It was the second companion he had lost since our arrival on board, and
what a death! That friend, crushed, stifled, bruised by the dreadful arms of a
poulp, pounded by his iron jaws, would not rest with his comrades in the
peaceful coral cemetery! In the midst of the struggle, it was the despairing cry
uttered by the unfortunate man that had torn my heart. The poor Frenchman,
forgetting his conventional language, had taken to his own mother tongue, to
utter a last appeal! Amongst the crew of the Nautilus, associated with the body
and soul of the Captain, recoiling like him from all contact with men, I had a
fellow-countryman. Did he alone represent France in this mysterious association,
evidently composed of individuals of divers nationalities? It was one of these
insoluble problems that rose up unceasingly before my mind!

Captain Nemo entered his room, and I saw him no more for some time. But
that he was sad and irresolute I could see by the vessel, of which he was the soul,
and which received all his impressions. The Nautilus did not keep on in its
settled course; it floated about like a corpse at the will of the waves. It went at
random. He could not tear himself away from the scene of the last struggle, from
this sea that had devoured one of his men. Ten days passed thus. It was not till
the 1st of May that the Nautilus resumed its northerly course, after having
sighted the Bahamas at the mouth of the Bahama Canal. We were then following
the current from the largest river to the sea, that has its banks, its fish, and its
proper temperatures. I mean the Gulf Stream. It is really a river, that flows freely
to the middle of the Atlantic, and whose waters do not mix with the ocean
waters. It is a salt river, salter than the surrounding sea. Its mean depth is 1,500
fathoms, its mean breadth ten miles. In certain places the current flows with the
speed of two miles and a half an hour. The body of its waters is more
considerable than that of all the rivers in the globe. It was on this ocean river that
the Nautilus then sailed.

I must add that, during the night, the phosphorescent waters of the Gulf
Stream rivalled the electric power of our watch-light, especially in the stormy
weather that threatened us so frequently. May 8th, we were still crossing Cape
Hatteras, at the height of the North Caroline. The width of the Gulf Stream there
is seventy-five miles, and its depth 210 yards. The Nautilus still went at random;
all supervision seemed abandoned. I thought that, under these circumstances,
escape would be possible. Indeed, the inhabited shores offered anywhere an easy
refuge. The sea was incessantly ploughed by the steamers that ply between New
York or Boston and the Gulf of Mexico, and overrun day and night by the little
schooners coasting about the several parts of the American coast. We could hope
to be picked up. It was a favourable opportunity, notwithstanding the thirty miles
that separated the Nautilus from the coasts of the Union. One unfortunate
circumstance thwarted the Canadian's plans. The weather was very bad. We were
nearing those shores where tempests are so frequent, that country of waterspouts
and cyclones actually engendered by the current of the Gulf Stream. To tempt
the sea in a frail boat was certain destruction. Ned Land owned this himself. He
fretted, seized with nostalgia that flight only could cure.

"Master," he said that day to me, "this must come to an end. I must make a
clean breast of it. This Nemo is leaving land and going up to the north. But I
declare to you that I have had enough of the South Pole, and I will not follow
him to the North."

"What is to be done, Ned, since flight is impracticable just now?"

"We must speak to the Captain," said he; "you said nothing when we were in
your native seas. I will speak, now we are in mine. When I think that before long
the Nautilus will be by Nova Scotia, and that there near New foundland is a large
bay, and into that bay the St. Lawrence empties itself, and that the St. Lawrence
is my river, the river by Quebec, my native town—when I think of this, I feel
furious, it makes my hair stand on end. Sir, I would rather throw myself into the
sea! I will not stay here! I am stifled!"

The Canadian was evidently losing all patience. His vigorous nature could
not stand this prolonged imprisonment. His face altered daily; his temper became
more surly. I knew what he must suffer, for I was seized with home-sickness
myself. Nearly seven months had passed without our having had any news from
land; Captain Nemo's isolation, his altered spirits, especially since the fight with
the poulps, his taciturnity, all made me view things in a different light.

"Well, sir?" said Ned, seeing I did not reply.

"Well, Ned, do you wish me to ask Captain Nemo his intentions concerning
us?"

"Yes, sir."

"Although he has already made them known?"

"Yes; I wish it settled finally. Speak for me, in my name only, if you like."

"But I so seldom meet him. He avoids me."

"That is all the more reason for you to go to see him."

I went to my room. From thence I meant to go to Captain Nemo's. It would

not do to let this opportunity of meeting him slip. I knocked at the door. No
answer. I knocked again, then turned the handle. The door opened, I went in. The
Captain was there. Bending over his work-table, he had not heard me. Resolved
not to go without having spoken, I approached him. He raised his head quickly,
frowned, and said roughly, "You here! What do you want?"

"To speak to you, Captain."

"But I am busy, sir; I am working. I leave you at liberty to shut yourself up;
cannot I be allowed the same?"

This reception was not encouraging; but I was determined to hear and answer
everything.

"Sir," I said coldly, "I have to speak to you on a matter that admits of no
delay."

"What is that, sir?" he replied, ironically. "Have you discovered something

that has escaped me, or has the sea delivered up any new secrets?"

We were at cross-purposes. But, before I could reply, he showed me an open

manuscript on his table, and said, in a more serious tone, "Here, M. Aronnax, is
a manuscript written in several languages. It contains the sum of my studies of
the sea; and, if it please God, it shall not perish with me. This manuscript, signed
with my name, complete with the history of my life, will be shut up in a little
floating case. The last survivor of all of us on board the Nautilus will throw this
case into the sea, and it will go whither it is borne by the waves."

This man's name! his history written by himself! His mystery would then be
revealed some day.

"Captain," I said, "I can but approve of the idea that makes you act thus. The
result of your studies must not be lost. But the means you employ seem to me to
be primitive. Who knows where the winds will carry this case, and in whose
hands it will fall? Could you not use some other means? Could not you, or one
of yours——"

"Never, sir!" he said, hastily interrupting me.

"But I and my companions are ready to keep this manuscript in store; and, if
you will put us at liberty——"

"At liberty?" said the Captain, rising.

"Yes, sir; that is the subject on which I wish to question you. For seven
months we have been here on board, and I ask you to-day, in the name of my
companions and in my own, if your intention is to keep us here always?"

"M. Aronnax, I will answer you to-day as I did seven months ago: Whoever
enters the Nautilus, must never quit it."

"You impose actual slavery upon us!"

"Give it what name you please."

"But everywhere the slave has the right to regain his liberty."

"Who denies you this right? Have I ever tried to chain you with an oath?"

He looked at me with his arms crossed.

 "Sir," I said, "to return a second time to this subject will be neither to your
nor to my taste; but, as we have entered upon it, let us go through with it. I
repeat, it is not only myself whom it concerns. Study is to me a relief, a
diversion, a passion that could make me forget everything. Like you, I am
willing to live obscure, in the frail hope of bequeathing one day, to future time,
the result of my labours. But it is otherwise with Ned Land. Every man, worthy
of the name, deserves some consideration. Have you thought that love of liberty,
hatred of slavery, can give rise to schemes of revenge in a nature like the
Canadian's; that he could think, attempt, and try——"

I was silenced; Captain Nemo rose.

"Whatever Ned Land thinks of, attempts, or tries, what does it matter to me? I
did not seek him! It is not for my pleasure that I keep him on board! As for you,
M. Aronnax, you are one of those who can understand everything, even silence.
I have nothing more to say to you. Let this first time you have come to treat of
this subject be the last, for a second time I will not listen to you."

I retired. Our situation was critical. I related my conversation to my two

companions.

"We know now," said Ned, "that we can expect nothing from this man. The
Nautilus is nearing Long Island. We will escape, whatever the weather may be."

But the sky became more and more threatening. Symptoms of a hurricane
became manifest. The atmosphere was becoming white and misty. On the
horizon fine streaks of cirrhous clouds were succeeded by masses of cumuli.
Other low clouds passed swiftly by. The swollen sea rose in huge billows. The
birds disappeared with the exception of the petrels, those friends of the storm.
The barometer fell sensibly, and indicated an extreme extension of the vapours.
The mixture of the storm glass was decomposed under the influence of the
electricity that pervaded the atmosphere. The tempest burst on the 18th of May,
just as the Nautilus was floating off Long Island, some miles from the port of
New York. I can describe this strife of the elements! for, instead of fleeing to the
depths of the sea, Captain Nemo, by an unaccountable caprice, would brave it at
the surface. The wind blew from the south-west at first. Captain Nemo, during
the squalls, had taken his place on the platform. He had made himself fast, to
prevent being washed overboard by the monstrous waves. I had hoisted myself
up, and made myself fast also, dividing my admiration between the tempest and
this extraordinary man who was coping with it. The raging sea was swept by
huge cloud-drifts, which were actually saturated with the waves. The Nautilus,
sometimes lying on its side, sometimes standing up like a mast, rolled and
pitched terribly. About five o'clock a torrent of rain fell, that lulled neither sea
nor wind. The hurri cane blew nearly forty leagues an hour. It is under these
conditions that it overturns houses, breaks iron gates, displaces twenty-four
pounders. However, the Nautilus, in the midst of the tempest, confirmed the
words of a clever engineer, "There is no well-constructed hull that cannot defy
the sea." This was not a resisting rock; it was a steel spindle, obedient and
movable, without rigging or masts, that braved its fury with impunity. However,
I watched these raging waves attentively. They measured fifteen feet in height,
and 150 to 175 yards long, and their speed of propagation was thirty feet per
second. Their bulk and power increased with the depth of the water. Such waves
as these, at the Hebrides, have displaced a mass weighing 8,400 lb. They are
they which, in the tempest of December 23rd, 1864, after destroying the town of
Yeddo, in Japan, broke the same day on the shores of America. The intensity of
the tempest increased with the night. The barometer, as in 1860 at Reunion
during a cyclone, fell seven-tenths at the close of day. I saw a large vessel pass
the horizon struggling painfully. She was trying to lie to under half steam, to
keep up above the waves. It was probably one of the steamers of the line from
New York to Liverpool, or Havre. It soon disappeared in the gloom. At ten
o'clock in the evening the sky was on fire. The atmosphere was streaked with
vivid lightning. I could not bear the brightness of it; while the captain, looking at
it, seemed to envy the spirit of the tempest. A terrible noise filled the air, a
complex noise, made up of the howls of the crushed waves, the roaring of the
wind, and the claps of thunder. The wind veered suddenly to all points of the
horizon; and the cyclone, rising in the east, returned after passing by the north,
west, and south, in the inverse course pursued by the circular storm of the
southern hemisphere. Ah, that Gulf Stream! It deserves its name of the King of
Tempests. It is that which causes those formidable cyclones, by the difference of
temperature between its air and its currents. A shower of fire had succeeded the
rain. The drops of water were changed to sharp spikes. One would have thought
that Captain Nemo was courting a death worthy of himself, a death by lightning.
As the Nautilus, pitching dreadfully, raised its steel spur in the air, it seemed to
act as a conductor, and I saw long sparks burst from it. Crushed and without
strength I crawled to the panel, opened it, and descended to the saloon. The
storm was then at its height. It was impossible to stand upright in the interior of
the Nautilus. Captain Nemo came down about twelve. I heard the reservoirs
filling by degrees, and the Nautilus sank slowly beneath the waves. Through the
open windows in the saloon I saw large fish terrified, passing like phantoms in
the water. Some were struck before my eyes. The Nautilus was still descending. I
thought that at about eight fathoms deep we should find a calm. But no! the
upper beds were too violently agitated for that. We had to seek repose at more
than twenty-five fathoms in the bowels of the deep. But there, what quiet, what
silence, what peace! Who could have told that such a hurricane had been let
loose on the surface of that ocean?

CHAPTER XX

FROM LATITUDE 47° 24' TO LONGITUDE 17° 28'

In consequence of the storm, we had been thrown eastward once more. All
hope of escape on the shores of New York or St. Lawrence had faded away; and
poor Ned, in despair, had isolated himself like Captain Nemo. Conseil and I,
however, never left each other. I said that the Nautilus had gone aside to the east.
I should have said (to be more exact) the north-east. For some days, it wandered
first on the surface, and then beneath it, amid those fogs so dreaded by sailors.
What accidents are due to these thick fogs! What shocks upon these reefs when
the wind drowns the breaking of the waves! What collisions between vessels, in
spite of their warning lights, whistles, and alarm bells! And the bottoms of these
seas look like a field of battle, where still lie all the conquered of the ocean;
some old and already encrusted, others fresh and reflecting from their iron bands
and copper plates the brilliancy of our lantern.

On the 15th of May we were at the extreme south of the Bank of

Newfoundland. This bank consists of alluvia, or large heaps of organic matter,
brought either from the Equator by the Gulf Stream, or from the North Pole by
the counter-current of cold water which skirts the American coast. There also are
heaped up those erratic blocks which are carried along by the broken ice; and
close by, a vast charnel-house of molluscs, which perish here by millions. The
depth of the sea is not great at Newfoundland—not more than some hundreds of
fathoms; but towards the south is a depression of 1,500 fathoms. There the Gulf
Stream widens. It loses some of its speed and some of its temperature, but it
becomes a sea.
 It was on the 17th of May, about 500 miles from Heart's Content, at a depth
of more than 1,400 fathoms, that I saw the electric cable lying on the bottom.
Conseil, to whom I had not mentioned it, thought at first that it was a gigantic
sea-serpent. But I undeceived the worthy fellow, and by way of consolation
related several particulars in the laying of this cable. The first one was laid in the
years 1857 and 1858; but, after transmitting about 400 telegrams, would not act
any longer. In 1863 the engineers constructed an other one, measuring 2,000
miles in length, and weighing 4,500 tons, which was embarked on the Great
Eastern. This attempt also failed.

On the 25th of May the Nautilus, being at a depth of more than 1,918
fathoms, was on the precise spot where the rupture occurred which ruined the
enterprise. It was within 638 miles of the coast of Ireland; and at half-past two in
the afternoon they discovered that communication with Europe had ceased. The
electricians on board resolved to cut the cable before fishing it up, and at eleven
o'clock at night they had recovered the damaged part. They made another point
and spliced it, and it was once more submerged. But some days after it broke
again, and in the depths of the ocean could not be recaptured. The Americans,
however, were not discouraged. Cyrus Field, the bold promoter of the enterprise,
as he had sunk all his own fortune, set a new subscription on foot, which was at
once answered, and another cable was constructed on better principles. The
bundles of conducting wires were each enveloped in gutta-percha, and protected
by a wadding of hemp, contained in a metallic covering. The Great Eastern
sailed on the 13th of July, 1866. The operation worked well. But one incident
occurred. Several times in unrolling the cable they observed that nails had
recently been forced into it, evidently with the motive of destroying it. Captain
Anderson, the officers, and engineers consulted together, and had it posted up
that, if the offender was surprised on board, he would be thrown without further
trial into the sea. From that time the criminal attempt was never repeated.

On the 23rd of July the Great Eastern was not more than 500 miles from
Newfoundland, when they telegraphed from Ireland the news of the armistice
concluded between Prussia and Austria after Sadowa. On the 27th, in the midst
of heavy fogs, they reached the port of Heart's Content. The enterprise was
successfully terminated; and for its first despatch, young America addressed old
Europe in these words of wisdom, so rarely understood: "Glory to God in the
highest, and on earth peace, goodwill towards men."

I did not expect to find the electric cable in its primitive state, such as it was
on leaving the manufactory. The long serpent, covered with the remains of
shells, bristling with foraminiferae, was encrusted with a strong coating which
served as a protection against all boring molluscs. It lay quietly sheltered from
the motions of the sea, and under a favourable pressure for the transmission of
the electric spark which passes from Europe to America in .32 of a second.
Doubtless this cable will last for a great length of time, for they find that the
gutta-percha covering is improved by the sea-water. Besides, on this level, so
well chosen, the cable is never so deeply submerged as to cause it to break. The
Nautilus followed it to the lowest depth, which was more than 2,212 fathoms,
and there it lay without any anchorage; and then we reached the spot where the
accident had taken place in 1863. The bottom of the ocean then formed a valley
about 100 miles broad, in which Mont Blanc might have been placed without its
summit appearing above the waves. This valley is closed at the east by a
perpendicular wall more than 2,000 yards high. We arrived there on the 28th of
May, and the Nautilus was then not more than 120 miles from Ireland.

Was Captain Nemo going to land on the British Isles? No. To my great
surprise he made for the south, once more coming back towards European seas.
In rounding the Emerald Isle, for one instant I caught sight of Cape Clear, and
the light which guides the thousands of vessels leaving Glasgow or Liverpool.
An important question then arose in my mind. Did the Nautilus dare entangle
itself in the Manche? Ned Land, who had re-appeared since we had been nearing
land, did not cease to question me. How could I answer? Captain Nemo
remained invisible. After having shown the Canadian a glimpse of American
shores, was he going to show me the coast of France?

But the Nautilus was still going southward. On the 30th of May, it passed in
sight of Land's End, between the extreme point of England and the Scilly Isles,
which were left to starboard. If we wished to enter the Manche, he must go
straight to the east. He did not do so.

During the whole of the 31st of May, the Nautilus described a series of circles
on the water, which greatly interested me. It seemed to be seeking a spot it had
some trouble in finding. At noon, Captain Nemo himself came to work the ship's
log. He spoke no word to me, but seemed gloomier than ever. What could
sadden him thus? Was it his proxim ity to European shores? Had he some
recollections of his abandoned country? If not, what did he feel? Remorse or
regret? For a long while this thought haunted my mind, and I had a kind of
presentiment that before long chance would betray the captain's secrets.
 The next day, the 1st of June, the Nautilus continued the same process. It was
evidently seeking some particular spot in the ocean. Captain Nemo took the sun's
altitude as he had done the day before. The sea was beautiful, the sky clear.
About eight miles to the east, a large steam vessel could be discerned on the
horizon. No flag fluttered from its mast, and I could not discover its nationality.
Some minutes before the sun passed the meridian, Captain Nemo took his
sextant, and watched with great attention. The perfect rest of the water greatly
helped the operation. The Nautilus was motionless; it neither rolled nor pitched.

I was on the platform when the altitude was taken, and the Captain
pronounced these words: "It is here."

He turned and went below. Had he seen the vessel which was changing its
course and seemed to be nearing us? I could not tell. I returned to the saloon.
The panels closed, I heard the hissing of the water in the reservoirs. The Nautilus
began to sink, following a vertical line, for its screw communicated no motion to
it. Some minutes later it stopped at a depth of more than 420 fathoms, resting on
the ground. The luminous ceiling was darkened, then the panels were opened,
and through the glass I saw the sea brilliantly illuminated by the rays of our
lantern for at least half a mile round us.

I looked to the port side, and saw nothing but an immensity of quiet waters.
But to starboard, on the bottom appeared a large protuberance, which at once
attracted my attention. One would have thought it a ruin buried under a coating
of white shells, much resembling a covering of snow. Upon examining the mass
attentively, I could recognise the ever-thickening form of a vessel bare of its
masts, which must have sunk. It certainly belonged to past times. This wreck, to
be thus encrusted with the lime of the water, must already be able to count many
years passed at the bottom of the ocean.

What was this vessel? Why did the Nautilus visit its tomb? Could it have
been aught but a shipwreck which had drawn it under the water? I knew not
what to think, when near me in a slow voice I heard Captain Nemo say:

"At one time this ship was called the Marseillais. It carried seventy-four guns,
and was launched in 1762. In 1778, the 13th of August, commanded by La
Poype-Ver trieux, it fought boldly against the Preston. In 1779, on the 4th of
July, it was at the taking of Grenada, with the squadron of Admiral Estaing. In
1781, on the 5th of September, it took part in the battle of Comte de Grasse, in
Chesapeake Bay. In 1794, the French Republic changed its name. On the 16th of
April, in the same year, it joined the squadron of Villaret Joyeuse, at Brest, being
entrusted with the escort of a cargo of corn coming from America, under the
command of Admiral Van Stebel. On the 11th and 12th Prairal of the second
year, this squadron fell in with an English vessel. Sir, to-day is the 13th Prairal,
the first of June, 1868. It is now seventy-four years ago, day for day on this very
spot, in latitude 47° 24', longitude 17° 28', that this vessel, after fighting
heroically, losing its three masts, with the water in its hold, and the third of its
crew disabled, preferred sinking with its 356 sailors to surrendering; and, nailing
its colours to the poop, disappeared under the waves to the cry of `Long live the
Republic!'"

"The Avenger!" I exclaimed.

"Yes, sir, the Avenger! A good name!" muttered Captain Nemo, crossing his
arms.

CHAPTER XXI

A HECATOMB

The way of describing this unlooked-for scene, the history of the patriot ship,
told at first so coldly, and the emotion with which this strange man pronounced
the last words, the name of the Avenger, the significance of which could not
escape me, all impressed itself deeply on my mind. My eyes did not leave the
Captain, who, with his hand stretched out to sea, was watching with a glowing
eye the glorious wreck. Perhaps I was never to know who he was, from whence
he came, or where he was going to, but I saw the man move, and apart from the
savant. It was no common misanthropy which had shut Captain Nemo and his
companions within the Nautilus, but a hatred, either monstrous or sublime,
which time could never weaken. Did this hatred still seek for vengeance? The
future would soon teach me that. But the Nautilus was rising slowly to the
surface of the sea, and the form of the Avenger disappeared by degrees from my
sight. Soon a slight rolling told me that we were in the open air. At that moment
a dull boom was heard. I looked at the Captain. He did not move.
 "Captain?" said I.

He did not answer. I left him and mounted the platform. Conseil and the
Canadian were already there.

"Where did that sound come from?" I asked.

"It was a gunshot," replied Ned Land.

I looked in the direction of the vessel I had already seen. It was nearing the
Nautilus, and we could see that it was putting on steam. It was within six miles
of us.

"What is that ship, Ned?"

"By its rigging, and the height of its lower masts," said the Canadian, "I bet
she is a ship-of-war. May it reach us; and, if necessary, sink this cursed
Nautilus."

"Friend Ned," replied Conseil, "what harm can it do to the Nautilus? Can it
attack it beneath the waves? Can its cannonade us at the bottom of the sea?"

"Tell me, Ned," said I, "can you recognise what country she belongs to?"

The Canadian knitted his eyebrows, dropped his eyelids, and screwed up the
corners of his eyes, and for a few moments fixed a piercing look upon the vessel.

"No, sir," he replied; "I cannot tell what nation she belongs to, for she shows
no colours. But I can declare she is a man-of-war, for a long pennant flutters
from her main mast."

For a quarter of an hour we watched the ship which was steaming towards us.
I could not, however, believe that she could see the Nautilus from that distance;
and still less that she could know what this submarine engine was. Soon the
Canadian informed me that she was a large, armoured, two-decker ram. A thick
black smoke was pouring from her two funnels. Her closely-furled sails were
stopped to her yards. She hoisted no flag at her mizzen-peak. The distance
prevented us from distinguishing the colours of her pennant, which floated like a
thin ribbon. She advanced rapidly. If Captain Nemo allowed her to approach,
there was a chance of salvation for us.
 "Sir," said Ned Land, "if that vessel passes within a mile of us I shall throw
myself into the sea, and I should advise you to do the same."

I did not reply to the Canadian's suggestion, but continued watching the ship.
Whether English, French, American, or Russian, she would be sure to take us in
if we could only reach her. Presently a white smoke burst from the fore part of
the vessel; some seconds after, the water, agitated by the fall of a heavy body,
splashed the stern of the Nautilus, and shortly afterwards a loud explosion struck
my ear.

"What! they are firing at us!" I exclaimed.

"So please you, sir," said Ned, "they have recognised the unicorn, and they
are firing at us."

"But," I exclaimed, "surely they can see that there are men in the case?"

"It is, perhaps, because of that," replied Ned Land, looking at me.

A whole flood of light burst upon my mind. Doubtless they knew now how to
believe the stories of the pretended monster. No doubt, on board the Abraham
Lincoln, when the Canadian struck it with the harpoon, Commander Farragut
had recognised in the supposed narwhal a submarine vessel, more dangerous
than a supernatural cetacean. Yes, it must have been so; and on every sea they
were now seeking this engine of destruction. Terrible indeed! if, as we supposed,
Captain Nemo employed the Nautilus in works of vengeance. On the night when
we were imprisoned in that cell, in the midst of the Indian Ocean, had he not
attacked some vessel? The man buried in the coral cemetery, had he not been a
victim to the shock caused by the Nautilus? Yes, I repeat it, it must be so. One
part of the mysterious existence of Captain Nemo had been unveiled; and, if his
identity had not been recognised, at least, the nations united against him were no
longer hunting a chimerical creature, but a man who had vowed a deadly hatred
against them. All the formidable past rose before me. Instead of meeting friends
on board the approaching ship, we could only expect pitiless enemies. But the
shot rattled about us. Some of them struck the sea and ricochetted, losing
themselves in the distance. But none touched the Nautilus. The vessel was not
more than three miles from us. In spite of the serious cannonade, Captain Nemo
did not appear on the platform; but, if one of the conical projectiles had struck
the shell of the Nautilus, it would have been fatal. The Canadian then said, "Sir,
we must do all we can to get out of this dilemma. Let us signal them. They will
then, perhaps, understand that we are honest folks."

Ned Land took his handkerchief to wave in the air; but he had scarcely
displayed it, when he was struck down by an iron hand, and fell, in spite of his
great strength, upon the deck.

"Fool!" exclaimed the Captain, "do you wish to be pierced by the spur of the
Nautilus before it is hurled at this vessel?"

Captain Nemo was terrible to hear; he was still more terrible to see. His face
was deadly pale, with a spasm at his heart. For an instant it must have ceased to
beat. His pupils were fearfully contracted. He did not speak, he roared, as, with
his body thrown forward, he wrung the Canadian's shoulders. Then, leaving him,
and turning to the ship of war, whose shot was still raining around him, he
exclaimed, with a powerful voice, "Ah, ship of an accursed nation, you know
who I am! I do not want your colours to know you by! Look! and I will show
you mine!"

And on the fore part of the platform Captain Nemo unfurled a black flag,
similar to the one he had placed at the South Pole. At that moment a shot struck
the shell of the Nautilus obliquely, without piercing it; and, rebounding near the
Captain, was lost in the sea. He shrugged his shoulders; and, addressing me, said
shortly, "Go down, you and your companions, go down!"

"Sir," I cried, "are you going to attack this vessel?"

"Sir, I am going to sink it."

"You will not do that?"

"I shall do it," he replied coldly. "And I advise you not to judge me, sir. Fate
has shown you what you ought not to have seen. The attack has begun; go
down."

"What is this vessel?"

"You do not know? Very well! so much the better! Its nationality to you, at
least, will be a secret. Go down!"
 We could but obey. About fifteen of the sailors surrounded the Captain,
looking with implacable hatred at the vessel nearing them. One could feel that
the same desire of vengeance animated every soul. I went down at the moment
another projectile struck the Nautilus, and I heard the Captain exclaim:

"Strike, mad vessel! Shower your useless shot! And then, you will not escape
the spur of the Nautilus. But it is not here that you shall perish! I would not have
your ruins mingle with those of the Avenger!"

I reached my room. The Captain and his second had remained on the
platform. The screw was set in motion, and the Nautilus, moving with speed,
was soon beyond the reach of the ship's guns. But the pursuit continued, and
Captain Nemo contented himself with keeping his distance.

About four in the afternoon, being no longer able to contain my impatience, I

went to the central staircase. The panel was open, and I ventured on to the
platform. The Captain was still walking up and down with an agitated step. He
was looking at the ship, which was five or six miles to leeward.

He was going round it like a wild beast, and, drawing it eastward, he allowed
them to pursue. But he did not attack. Perhaps he still hesitated? I wished to
mediate once more. But I had scarcely spoken, when Captain Nemo imposed
silence, saying:

"I am the law, and I am the judge! I am the oppressed, and there is the
oppressor! Through him I have lost all that I loved, cherished, and venerated—
country, wife, children, father, and mother. I saw all perish! All that I hate is
there! Say no more!"

I cast a last look at the man-of-war, which was putting on steam, and rejoined
Ned and Conseil.

"We will fly!" I exclaimed.

"Good!" said Ned. "What is this vessel?"

"I do not know; but, whatever it is, it will be sunk before night. In any case, it
is better to perish with it, than be made accomplices in a retaliation the justice of
which we cannot judge."
 "That is my opinion too," said Ned Land, coolly. "Let us wait for night."

Night arrived. Deep silence reigned on board. The compass showed that the
Nautilus had not altered its course. It was on the surface, rolling slightly. My
companions and I resolved to fly when the vessel should be near enough either
to hear us or to see us; for the moon, which would be full in two or three days,
shone brightly. Once on board the ship, if we could not prevent the blow which
threatened it, we could, at least we would, do all that circumstances would allow.
Several times I thought the Nautilus was preparing for attack; but Captain Nemo
contented himself with allowing his adversary to approach, and then fled once
more before it.

Part of the night passed without any incident. We watched the opportunity for
action. We spoke little, for we were too much moved. Ned Land would have
thrown himself into the sea, but I forced him to wait. According to my idea, the
Nautilus would attack the ship at her waterline, and then it would not only be
possible, but easy to fly.

At three in the morning, full of uneasiness, I mounted the platform. Captain

Nemo had not left it. He was standing at the fore part near his flag, which a
slight breeze displayed above his head. He did not take his eyes from the vessel.
The intensity of his look seemed to attract, and fascinate, and draw it onward
more surely than if he had been towing it. The moon was then passing the
meridian. Jupiter was rising in the east. Amid this peaceful scene of nature, sky
and ocean rivalled each other in tranquillity, the sea offering to the orbs of night
the finest mirror they could ever have in which to reflect their image. As I
thought of the deep calm of these elements, compared with all those passions
brooding imperceptibly within the Nautilus, I shuddered.

The vessel was within two miles of us. It was ever nearing that
phosphorescent light which showed the presence of the Nautilus. I could see its
green and red lights, and its white lantern hanging from the large foremast. An
indistinct vibration quivered through its rigging, showing that the furnaces were
heated to the uttermost. Sheaves of sparks and red ashes flew from the funnels,
shining in the atmosphere like stars.

I remained thus until six in the morning, without Captain Nemo noticing me.
The ship stood about a mile and a half from us, and with the first dawn of day
the firing began afresh. The moment could not be far off when, the Nautilus
attacking its adversary, my companions and myself should for ever leave this
man. I was preparing to go down to remind them, when the second mounted the
platform, accompanied by several sailors. Captain Nemo either did not or would
not see them. Some steps were taken which might be called the signal for action.
They were very simple. The iron balustrade around the platform was lowered,
and the lantern and pilot cages were pushed within the shell until they were flush
with the deck. The long surface of the steel cigar no longer offered a single point
to check its manoeuvres. I returned to the saloon. The Nautilus still floated;
some streaks of light were filtering through the liquid beds. With the undulations
of the waves the windows were brightened by the red streaks of the rising sun,
and this dreadful day of the 2nd of June had dawned.

At five o'clock, the log showed that the speed of the Nautilus was slackening,
and I knew that it was allowing them to draw nearer. Besides, the reports were
heard more distinctly, and the projectiles, labouring through the ambient water,
were extinguished with a strange hissing noise.

"My friends," said I, "the moment is come. One grasp of the hand, and may
God protect us!"

Ned Land was resolute, Conseil calm, myself so nervous that I knew not how
to contain myself. We all passed into the library; but the moment I pushed the
door opening on to the central staircase, I heard the upper panel close sharply.
The Canadian rushed on to the stairs, but I stopped him. A well-known hissing
noise told me that the water was running into the reservoirs, and in a few
minutes the Nautilus was some yards beneath the surface of the waves. I
understood the manoeuvre. It was too late to act. The Nautilus did not wish to
strike at the impenetrable cuirass, but below the water-line, where the metallic
covering no longer protected it.

We were again imprisoned, unwilling witnesses of the dreadful drama that

was preparing. We had scarcely time to reflect; taking refuge in my room, we
looked at each other without speaking. A deep stupor had taken hold of my
mind: thought seemed to stand still. I was in that painful state of expectation
preceding a dreadful report. I waited, I listened, every sense was merged in that
of hearing! The speed of the Nautilus was accelerated. It was preparing to rush.
The whole ship trembled. Suddenly I screamed. I felt the shock, but
comparatively light. I felt the penetrating power of the steel spur. I heard
rattlings and scrapings. But the Nautilus, carried along by its propelling power,
passed through the mass of the vessel like a needle through sailcloth!

I could stand it no longer. Mad, out of my mind, I rushed from my room into
the saloon. Captain Nemo was there, mute, gloomy, implacable; he was looking
through the port panel. A large mass cast a shadow on the water; and, that it
might lose nothing of her agony, the Nautilus was going down into the abyss
with her. Ten yards from me I saw the open shell, through which the water was
rushing with the noise of thunder, then the double line of guns and the netting.
The bridge was covered with black, agitated shadows.

The water was rising. The poor creatures were crowding the ratlines, clinging
to the masts, struggling under the water. It was a human ant-heap overtaken by
the sea. Paralysed, stiffened with anguish, my hair standing on end, with eyes
wide open, panting, without breath, and without voice, I too was watching! An
irresistible attraction glued me to the glass! Suddenly an explosion took place.
The compressed air blew up her decks, as if the magazines had caught fire. Then
the unfortunate vessel sank more rapidly. Her topmast, laden with victims, now
appeared; then her spars, bending under the weight of men; and, last of all, the
top of her mainmast. Then the dark mass disappeared, and with it the dead crew,
drawn down by the strong eddy.

I turned to Captain Nemo. That terrible avenger, a perfect archangel of

hatred, was still looking. When all was over, he turned to his room, opened the
door, and entered. I followed him with my eyes. On the end wall beneath his
heroes, I saw the portrait of a woman, still young, and two little children.
Captain Nemo looked at them for some moments, stretched his arms towards
them, and, kneeling down, burst into deep sobs.

CHAPTER XXII

THE LAST WORDS OF CAPTAIN NEMO

The panels had closed on this dreadful vision, but light had not returned to
the saloon: all was silence and darkness within the Nautilus. At wonderful speed,
a hundred feet beneath the water, it was leaving this desolate spot. Whither was
it going? To the north or south? Where was the man flying to after such dreadful
retaliation? I had returned to my room, where Ned and Conseil had remained
silent enough. I felt an insurmountable horror for Captain Nemo. Whatever he
had suffered at the hands of these men, he had no right to punish thus. He had
made me, if not an accomplice, at least a witness of his vengeance. At eleven the
electric light reappeared. I passed into the saloon. It was deserted. I consulted the
different instruments. The Nautilus was flying northward at the rate of twenty-
five miles an hour, now on the surface, and now thirty feet below it. On taking
the bearings by the chart, I saw that we were passing the mouth of the Manche,
and that our course was hurrying us towards the northern seas at a frightful
speed. That night we had crossed two hundred leagues of the Atlantic. The
shadows fell, and the sea was covered with darkness until the rising of the moon.
I went to my room, but could not sleep. I was troubled with dreadful nightmare.
The horrible scene of destruction was continually before my eyes. From that day,
who could tell into what part of the North Atlantic basin the Nautilus would take
us? Still with unaccountable speed. Still in the midst of these northern fogs.
Would it touch at Spitzbergen, or on the shores of Nova Zembla? Should we
explore those unknown seas, the White Sea, the Sea of Kara, the Gulf of Obi, the
Archipelago of Liarrov, and the unknown coast of Asia? I could not say. I could
no longer judge of the time that was passing. The clocks had been stopped on
board. It seemed, as in polar countries, that night and day no longer followed
their regular course. I felt myself being drawn into that strange region where the
foundered imagination of Edgar Poe roamed at will. Like the fabulous Gordon
Pym, at every moment I expected to see "that veiled human figure, of larger
proportions than those of any inhabitant of the earth, thrown across the cataract
which defends the approach to the pole." I estimated (though, perhaps, I may be
mistaken)—I estimated this adventurous course of the Nautilus to have lasted
fifteen or twenty days. And I know not how much longer it might have lasted,
had it not been for the catastrophe which ended this voyage. Of Captain Nemo I
saw nothing whatever now, nor of his second. Not a man of the crew was visible
for an instant. The Nautilus was almost incessantly under water. When we came
to the surface to renew the air, the panels opened and shut mechanically. There
were no more marks on the planisphere. I knew not where we were. And the
Canadian, too, his strength and patience at an end, appeared no more. Conseil
could not draw a word from him; and, fearing that, in a dreadful fit of madness,
he might kill himself, watched him with constant devotion. One morning (what
date it was I could not say) I had fallen into a heavy sleep towards the early
hours, a sleep both painful and unhealthy, when I suddenly awoke. Ned Land
was leaning over me, saying, in a low voice, "We are going to fly." I sat up.
 "When shall we go?" I asked.

"To-night. All inspection on board the Nautilus seems to have ceased. All
appear to be stupefied. You will be ready, sir?"

"Yes; where are we?"

"In sight of land. I took the reckoning this morning in the fog—twenty miles
to the east."

"What country is it?"

"I do not know; but, whatever it is, we will take refuge there."

"Yes, Ned, yes. We will fly to-night, even if the sea should swallow us up."

"The sea is bad, the wind violent, but twenty miles in that light boat of the
Nautilus does not frighten me. Unknown to the crew, I have been able to procure
food and some bottles of water."

"I will follow you."

"But," continued the Canadian, "if I am surprised, I will defend myself; I will
force them to kill me."

"We will die together, friend Ned."

I had made up my mind to all. The Canadian left me. I reached the platform,
on which I could with difficulty support myself against the shock of the waves.
The sky was threatening; but, as land was in those thick brown shadows, we
must fly. I returned to the saloon, fearing and yet hoping to see Captain Nemo,
wishing and yet not wishing to see him. What could I have said to him? Could I
hide the involuntary horror with which he inspired me? No. It was better that I
should not meet him face to face; better to forget him. And yet—— How long
seemed that day, the last that I should pass in the Nautilus. I remained alone. Ned
Land and Conseil avoided speaking, for fear of betraying themselves. At six I
dined, but I was not hungry; I forced myself to eat in spite of my disgust, that I
might not weaken myself. At half-past six Ned Land came to my room, saying,
"We shall not see each other again before our departure. At ten the moon will not
be risen. We will profit by the darkness. Come to the boat; Conseil and I will
wait for you."

The Canadian went out without giving me time to answer. Wishing to verify
the course of the Nautilus, I went to the saloon. We were running N.N.E. at
frightful speed, and more than fifty yards deep. I cast a last look on these
wonders of nature, on the riches of art heaped up in this museum, upon the
unrivalled collection destined to perish at the bottom of the sea, with him who
had formed it. I wished to fix an indelible impression of it in my mind. I
remained an hour thus, bathed in the light of that luminous ceiling, and passing
in review those treasures shining under their glasses. Then I returned to my
room.

I dressed myself in strong sea clothing. I collected my notes, placing them

carefully about me. My heart beat loudly. I could not check its pulsations.
Certainly my trouble and agitation would have betrayed me to Captain Nemo's
eyes. What was he doing at this moment? I listened at the door of his room. I
heard steps. Captain Nemo was there. He had not gone to rest. At every moment
I expected to see him appear, and ask me why I wished to fly. I was constantly
on the alert. My imagination magnified everything. The impression became at
last so poignant that I asked myself if it would not be better to go to the Captain's
room, see him face to face, and brave him with look and gesture.

It was the inspiration of a madman; fortunately I resisted the desire, and

stretched myself on my bed to quiet my bodily agitation. My nerves were
somewhat calmer, but in my excited brain I saw over again all my existence on
board the Nautilus; every incident, either happy or unfortunate, which had
happened since my disappearance from the Abraham Lincoln—the submarine
hunt, the Torres Straits, the savages of Papua, the running ashore, the coral
cemetery, the passage of Suez, the Island of Santorin, the Cretan diver, Vigo Bay,
Atlantis, the iceberg, the South Pole, the imprisonment in the ice, the fight
among the poulps, the storm in the Gulf Stream, the Avenger, and the horrible
scene of the vessel sunk with all her crew. All these events passed before my
eyes like scenes in a drama. Then Captain Nemo seemed to grow enormously,
his features to assume superhuman proportions. He was no longer my equal, but
a man of the waters, the genie of the sea.

It was then half-past nine. I held my head between my hands to keep it from
bursting. I closed my eyes; I would not think any longer. There was another half-
hour to wait, another half-hour of a nightmare, which might drive me mad.
 At that moment I heard the distant strains of the organ, a sad harmony to an
undefinable chant, the wail of a soul longing to break these earthly bonds. I
listened with every sense, scarcely breathing; plunged, like Captain Nemo, in
that musical ecstasy, which was drawing him in spirit to the end of life.

Then a sudden thought terrified me. Captain Nemo had left his room. He was
in the saloon, which I must cross to fly. There I should meet him for the last
time. He would see me, perhaps speak to me. A gesture of his might destroy me,
a single word chain me on board.

But ten was about to strike. The moment had come for me to leave my room,
and join my companions.

I must not hesitate, even if Captain Nemo himself should rise before me. I
opened my door carefully; and even then, as it turned on its hinges, it seemed to
me to make a dreadful noise. Perhaps it only existed in my own imagination.

I crept along the dark stairs of the Nautilus, stopping at each step to check the
beating of my heart. I reached the door of the saloon, and opened it gently. It was
plunged in profound darkness. The strains of the organ sounded faintly. Captain
Nemo was there. He did not see me. In the full light I do not think he would have
noticed me, so entirely was he absorbed in the ecstasy.

I crept along the carpet, avoiding the slightest sound which might betray my
presence. I was at least five minutes reaching the door, at the opposite side,
opening into the library.

I was going to open it, when a sigh from Captain Nemo nailed me to the spot.
I knew that he was rising. I could even see him, for the light from the library
came through to the saloon. He came towards me silently, with his arms crossed,
gliding like a spectre rather than walking. His breast was swelling with sobs; and
I heard him murmur these words (the last which ever struck my ear):

"Almighty God! enough! enough!"

Was it a confession of remorse which thus escaped from this man's

conscience?

In desperation, I rushed through the library, mounted the central staircase,

and, following the upper flight, reached the boat. I crept through the opening,
which had already admitted my two companions.

"Let us go! let us go!" I exclaimed.

"Directly!" replied the Canadian.

The orifice in the plates of the Nautilus was first closed, and fastened down
by means of a false key, with which Ned Land had provided himself; the opening
in the boat was also closed. The Canadian began to loosen the bolts which still
held us to the submarine boat.

Suddenly a noise was heard. Voices were answering each other loudly. What
was the matter? Had they discovered our flight? I felt Ned Land slipping a
dagger into my hand.

"Yes," I murmured, "we know how to die!"

The Canadian had stopped in his work. But one word many times repeated, a
dreadful word, revealed the cause of the agitation spreading on board the
Nautilus. It was not we the crew were looking after!

"The maelstrom! the maelstrom!" Could a more dreadful word in a more

dreadful situation have sounded in our ears! We were then upon the dangerous
coast of Norway. Was the Nautilus being drawn into this gulf at the moment our
boat was going to leave its sides? We knew that at the tide the pent-up waters
between the islands of Ferroe and Loffoden rush with irresistible violence,
forming a whirlpool from which no vessel ever escapes. From every point of the
horizon enormous waves were meeting, forming a gulf justly called the "Navel
of the Ocean," whose power of attraction extends to a distance of twelve miles.
There, not only vessels, but whales are sacrificed, as well as white bears from
the northern regions.

It is thither that the Nautilus, voluntarily or involuntarily, had been run by the
Captain.

It was describing a spiral, the circumference of which was lessening by

degrees, and the boat, which was still fastened to its side, was carried along with
giddy speed. I felt that sickly giddiness which arises from long-continued
whirling round.
 We were in dread. Our horror was at its height, circulation had stopped, all
nervous influence was annihilated, and we were covered with cold sweat, like a
sweat of agony! And what noise around our frail bark! What roarings repeated
by the echo miles away! What an uproar was that of the waters broken on the
sharp rocks at the bottom, where the hardest bodies are crushed, and trees worn
away, "with all the fur rubbed off," according to the Norwegian phrase!

What a situation to be in! We rocked frightfully. The Nautilus defended itself

like a human being. Its steel muscles cracked. Sometimes it seemed to stand
upright, and we with it!

"We must hold on," said Ned, "and look after the bolts. We may still be saved
if we stick to the Nautilus."

He had not finished the words, when we heard a crashing noise, the bolts
gave way, and the boat, torn from its groove, was hurled like a stone from a sling
into the midst of the whirlpool.

My head struck on a piece of iron, and with the violent shock I lost all
consciousness.

CHAPTER XXIII

CONCLUSION

Thus ends the voyage under the seas. What passed during that night—how
the boat escaped from the eddies of the maelstrom—how Ned Land, Conseil,
and myself ever came out of the gulf, I cannot tell.

But when I returned to consciousness, I was lying in a fisherman's hut, on the

Loffoden Isles. My two companions, safe and sound, were near me holding my
hands. We embraced each other heartily.

At that moment we could not think of returning to France. The means of

communication between the north of Norway and the south are rare. And I am
therefore obliged to wait for the steamboat running monthly from Cape North.

And, among the worthy people who have so kindly received us, I revise my
record of these adventures once more. Not a fact has been omitted, not a detail
exaggerated. It is a faithful narrative of this incredible expedition in an element
inaccessible to man, but to which Progress will one day open a road.

Shall I be believed? I do not know. And it matters little, after all. What I now
affirm is, that I have a right to speak of these seas, under which, in less than ten
months, I have crossed 20,000 leagues in that submarine tour of the world,
which has revealed so many wonders.

But what has become of the Nautilus? Did it resist the pressure of the
maelstrom? Does Captain Nemo still live? And does he still follow under the
ocean those frightful retaliations? Or, did he stop after the last hecatomb?

Will the waves one day carry to him this manuscript containing the history of
his life? Shall I ever know the name of this man? Will the missing vessel tell us
by its nationality that of Captain Nemo?

I hope so. And I also hope that his powerful vessel has conquered the sea at
its most terrible gulf, and that the Nautilus has survived where so many other
vessels have been lost! If it be so—if Captain Nemo still inhabits the ocean, his
adopted country, may hatred be appeased in that savage heart! May the
contemplation of so many wonders extinguish for ever the spirit of vengeance!
May the judge disappear, and the philosopher continue the peaceful exploration
of the sea! If his destiny be strange, it is also sublime. Have I not understood it
myself? Have I not lived ten months of this unnatural life? And to the question
asked by Ecclesiastes three thousand years ago, "That which is far off and
exceeding deep, who can find it out?" two men alone of all now living have the
right to give an answer——

CAPTAIN NEMO AND MYSELF.

End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Twenty Thousand Leagues under the Sea (slightly
abridged), by Jules Verne

*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 20000 LEAGUES UNDER THE SEA ***

***** This file should be named 164-h.htm or 164-h.zip *****

This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
http://www.gutenberg.org/1/6/164/

Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions

will be renamed.

Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules,
set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project
Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you
do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is
subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
redistribution.

*** START: FULL LICENSE ***

THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE

PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK

To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free

distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
http://gutenberg.net/license).

Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm

electronic works

1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm

electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be
used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
works. See paragraph 1.E below.

1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"

or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the
collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an
individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.

1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in
a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check
the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning
the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
States.

1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:

1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
copied or distributed:

This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or
re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.net

1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived

from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
1.E.9.

1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted

with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked
to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.

1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm

License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.

1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this

electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
Gutenberg-tm License.

1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or
distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.net),
you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.

1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,

performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.

1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing

access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
that

- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is
owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments
must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."

- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
License. You must require such a user to return or
destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
Project Gutenberg-tm works.

- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any

money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
of receipt of the work.

- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the
Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.

1.F.

1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable

effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
your equipment.

1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right

of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.

1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a

defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with
the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy
is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
opportunities to fix the problem.

1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.

1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied

warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any
provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.

1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.

Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm

Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of

electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists
because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
people in all walks of life.

Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the

assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org.

Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive

Foundation

The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit

501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.

The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.

Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at
809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
[email protected]. Email contact links and up to date contact
information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
page at http://pglaf.org

For additional contact information:

Dr. Gregory B. Newby
Chief Executive and Director
[email protected]

Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg

Literary Archive Foundation

Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide

spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations
($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
status with the IRS.
The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations
where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To
SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
particular state visit http://pglaf.org

While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we

have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
approach us with offers to donate.

International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make

any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.

Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
donations. To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate

Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic

works.

Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm

concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.

Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed

editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily
keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.

Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:

http://www.gutenberg.net

This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,

including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.